Manual On Drills and Ceremonies

MANUAL
ON
DRILLS
AND
CEREMONIES
ARMED FORCES OF THE PHILIPPINES

General Headquarters
Camp General Emilio Aguinaldo
Quezon City
PREFACE
Learning the exact way to conduct drills and ceremonies is among the
fundamentals of military training and indoctrination. Drills and ceremonies uplift the
soldier's morale, develop a culture of teamwork and camaraderie, and project the
stature of the armed forces. Needless to say, it is essential for soldiers to not only
familiarize themselves with drills and ceremonies but also master and perfectly perform
them on the grounds. Hence a need for a manual that will serve as a standard and
precise guideline in carrying them out throughout the AFP.
The first part deals with drill guides for an individual soldier or military unit. The
second and third parts cover general procedures for all types of ceremonies, including
those observed by the PMA, PSG, PN (M) and PAF.
The drill portion includes guidance for movements of different military elements,
from individual units to brigade, under and not under arms. Included herein are manuals
for sword and pistol. To aid users of this manual with the proper giving and easy
understanding of commands, also included are definition of commonly used terms,
commands and the command voice, and translation of commands from English to
Filipino and images on the execution of the command.
For this manual, ceremonies cover the frequently conducted ones such as
Reviews, Parades, Military Honors, Wreathlaying, Change of Command, Flag Raising
and Retreat. Each section comprises a comprehensive discussion consisting of the
historical background, definition of terms, procedures, formats, illustrations and pictures
describing the ceremony.
The changes that were introduced in this edition were based on appropriateness,
practicality and suitability. Modifications were made on the giving of commands, manual
of arms, rendering of military honors, and the conduct of review. Moreover, this revised
manual provides for an official reference for practices and amendments that were not
included in the earlier edition.
Finally, since needed corrections may be observed during its continuous and
actual application, recommendations and comments are encouraged for the further
improvement and revision of this publication.
PREFACE i
FOREWORD
Every soldier should know that military drills and ceremonies play a vital role in
the tradition and development of a military organization. The way military drills and
ceremonies are performed reflects the extent of discipline, the rigorous training, and the
strength of every military unit. Drills cultivate teamwork, alertness, attention to detail and
esprit de corps. In addition, proper execution of ceremonies provides a source of every
soldier’s pride, and in the same way, boosts the morale of the organization in general.
The principles and conduct of military operations of the Armed Forces of the
Philippines, including its drill procedures and ceremonies, evolved from the doctrines of
the most celebrated and most modern armies of the world. Still and all, through time
and with the realization of its essence, the country’s Armed Forces have managed to
develop an army of its own distinction by embedding Filipino custom and values in
adopting international standards.
History also tells us that our forefathers, long before the Spaniards came, had
already been performing their own military ceremonies as a show of force and a way of
honoring important guests. However, three centuries of Spanish rule resulted to the
eradication of the practice. The Filipino revolutionary army was then formed in 1897, in
which ceremonies were patterned with that of the Spaniards'. The coming of the
Americans to the Philippines later on led to our Armed Forces’ adoption of the US
Army’s military drills and procedures.
In the process, changes had been incorporated in the conduct of drills and
ceremonies. Modifications were brought about by new directives, various
interpretations, discretionary alterations and other factors. Moreover, the procedures
were updated according to their actual and practical application. Thus there is a need to
standardize the procedures of drills and ceremonies in the AFP and provide for an
official reference to their practice.
It is in this light that I acknowledge the expediency of revising the AFP Manual on
Drills and Ceremonies. As such, I am urging every individual unit and soldier to adhere
to this manual and contribute in projecting a strong, disciplined and unified Armed
Forces of the Philippines.
ii
FOREW ORD
MANUAL ON DRILL AND CEREMONIES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PREFACE i
FOREWORD ii
PART 1 – DRILLS
SECTION I. GENERAL DRILL INFORMATION 002

SECTION II. COMMANDS & THE COMMAND VOICE 008
SECTION III. INDIVIDUAL MOVEMENTS NOT UNDER ARMS 015
SECTION IV. INDIVIDUAL MOVEMENTS WITH ARMS 030
SECTION V. SQUAD DRILL 059
SECTION VI. PLATOON DRILL 069
SECTION VII. COMPANY DRILL 082
SECTION VIII. BATTALION AND BRIGADE FORMATION 098
SECTION IX. MOUNTED DRILL 102
PART 2 – CEREMONIES
SECTION I. REVIEWS 107

SECTION II. PARADE 123
SECTION III. MILITARY HONORS 130
SECTION IV. COLORS 143
SECTION V. GUARD MOUNTING 152
SECTION VI. CHANGE OF COMMAND 170
SECTION VII. FLAG RAISING / RETREAT
AND REVEILLE CEREMONIES 174
SECTION VIII. WELCOME CEREMONY AND SEND OFF
CEREMONY FOR UNITS (UNIT HONORS) 179
SECTION IX. ACTIVATION/DE-ACTIVATION OF UNITS 185
SECTION X. FUNERAL HONORS AND SERVICES 190
SECTION XI. WREATHLAYING CEREMONY 209
SECTION XII. MILITARY WEDDING 215
SECTION XIII. OATHTAKING 224
SECTION XIV. OPENING/CLOSING AND GRADUATION CEREMONIES 226
PART 3 – SPECIAL CEREMONIES
SECTION I. SPECIAL DRILLS AND CEREMONIES FOR

PHILIPPINE MILITARY ACADEMY 232
SECTION II. SPECIAL CEREMONIES FOR
PRESIDENTIAL SECURITY GROUP
AT MALACAÑAN PALACE 259
SECTION III. SPECIAL CEREMONIES FOR
PHILIPPINE MARINE CORPS 271
SECTION IV. SPECIAL CEREMONIES
FOR PHILIPPINE AIR FORCE 283
README
CREDITS
PART I
DRILLS
Part I: Drills 1
M AN U AL O N D RIL LS AND C EREM ONIES
SECTION I
GENERAL DRILL INFORMATION

“Troops who march in an irregular and disorderly manner are always in great danger of being
defeated.” – Vegetius: De Re Militari: A.D. 378
1.1 PURPOSE AND SCOPE
This portion of the manual provides guidance for AFP-wide uniformity in the
conduct of drills. It includes methods of instructing drills, teaching techniques, individual
and unit drills, manual of arms for infantry weapons and various other aspects of basic
drill instruction.
This is designed for use by soldiers of all military occupational skill, including
cadets and recruits in the initial training environment. So as to maintain consistency
throughout the AFP, the procedures prescribed herein shall be adhered to as closely as
possible.
1.2 GENERAL
a) The AFP prescribes its own drill regulations with the end goal of cultivating
to the full alertness and the presence of mind of each military personnel not only during
drills but at all times. These attributes of character are essential to the members of the
AFP.
b) All movements in this manual are precision movements designed to foster

proper coordination among military personnel. Teamwork is the final result.
c) In the military service, we help attain teamwork through drill and

ceremonies.
d) Drills consist of certain movements by which the squad, platoon, company

or battalion is moved in an orderly manner from one formation to another. These
Part I / Section I: General Drill Information 2

movements are executed with smartness, order and precision. Each individual in the
squad, platoon or company does his part exactly as how he is supposed to perform.
e) The primary purpose of drill is to teach a precise and orderly way of doing
things. As drills increase skill and coordination, they accustom a soldier to respond to
commands. Drills also promote teamwork. It is important for a soldier to know and
understand a drill, otherwise, its value is lost. It must be remembered that a drill is
conducted with precision. Hence, perfection is the only accepted standard. Drill periods
are frequent and of short duration.
f) Finally, everyone gets a certain amount of pleasure from doing anything

well in joint effort with others. A military ceremony provides the same reaction. After
every successful ceremony, every soldier-participant can proudly claim: “I was there”.
1.3 DRILL TERMS - To help understand the meaning of drill terms, the following
definitions are included:
ALIGNMENT (Linya): A straight line upon which several elements or terms are
formed. It is the dressing of several elements upon a straight line. A unit is aligned when
it is dressed.
ARMS SWING: The swinging of arms must be 6 inches straight to the front and 3
inches straight to the rear of the trouser seams, with knuckles out facing forward and
fingers formed into a fist with the thumb over the forefinger.
BASE: The elements on which a movement is regulated. For instance, in

executing right front into line, the leading squad is the base.
CADENCE: The uniform rhythm by which a movement is executed or the

number of steps or counts per minute of which movement is executed. Drill movements
are normally executed at the cadence of quick time or double time.
CENTER (Gitna): The middle point or element of a command. In a platoon of

three squads in line, the second squad from the right is the center. With four squads in
the platoon, the second squad from the right is the center squad, the rule being that
when these are even number of squads (platoons), the right-center squad (platoon) is
the center squad (platoon).
COLUMN: A formation in which the elements are placed one behind another.
Example: a column of files (men placed one behind another); column squad (squads
one behind another); and column platoon (one behind another).
DEPTH (Lalim): The space from front to rear of any formation or position. This
includes the front and rear elements. The depth of a man is assumed to be 12 inches.

DISTANCE (Layo): The space between elements when the elements are one
behind the other. Between units, it varies with the size of the formation; between
individuals it is an arm’s length to the front plus six inches or about 40 inches, measured
from chest of one man to the back of the man immediately to his front.
DOUBLE TIME (Takbong Hakbang): Cadence at a rate of 180 steps per

minute.
ECHELON: One of a series of elements formed one behind another. This is also
a modification of line formation in which adjacent elements are disposed one in the rear
of the other.
ELEMENT: An individual, squad, platoon, company, or larger body, forming a

part of still another larger body.
EYES RIGHT (Handa, Tingin sa Kanan, Na): The direction of the face during
the eyes right should be 45 degrees to the right side.
FILE (Tudling): Two men, the front-rank man and the corresponding man of the
rear rank. The front-rank man is the file leader. A file, which has no rear-rank man, is
not a file. The term file applies also to a single man in a single rank formation. It is a
single column of men one behind the other.
FLANK (Panig): The right or left extremity of a unit, either in line or in column;
the element on the extreme right or left of the line; a direction at a right angle to the
direction where an element or a formation is facing.
FORMATION (Hanay): Arrangement of the elements of a unit in line, in column

or any other prescribed manner.
FRONT (Harap): The direction in which a command faces.
FRONTAGE (Harapan): The space occupied by an element measured from one

flank to the opposite flank. The frontage of a man is assumed to be 22 inches,
measured from the right to the elbow and therefore does not include the 12 inches
between all men in line. The frontage of a squad, however, includes the intervals
between men.
GUIDE (Gabay): The man with whom the command or element thereof regulates
its march. This is often the case in battle or on practice marches. In a squad drill, a
private (number 1 front rank) is often the guide.
HEAD (Unahan): The leading element of a column. To understand this definition,

one must remember that an element is a file squad platoon, company or larger body
forming a part of still another larger body.

INTERVAL (Pagitan): The lateral space between elements on the same line. An
interval is measured between individuals from shoulder to shoulder; and between
formations, from flank to flank. Unit commanders and those with them are not
considered in measuring interval between elements of the unit with which they are
posted. Normal interval between individuals is one arm’s length. Close interval is the
horizontal distance between shoulder and elbow when the left hand is placed on the left
hip.
LEFT (Kaliwa): The left extremity or element of a body of troops.
LINE (Linya): A formation in which the different elements are abreast. The
expression “abreast of each other” means on the same line. The other vital part of this
definition centers on the word “element”. A section may be an element. Therefore, if the
leading elements of several sections are on the same line, it becomes a line formation.
LOOSE PIECES: Rifles and automatic rifles not used in making stacks.
OBLIQUE (Lihis): An angle between 0 and 45 degrees. (Right/Left oblique -

march is at an angle of 45 degrees.)
ORDER CLOSE: The formation in which the units, in double rank, are separated
by intervals greater than that in close order.
PACE: 30 inches is the length of the full step in quick time. The pace at double
time is 36 inches.
PIECE: The term piece as used in this text means the rifle or automatic rifle.
POINT OF THE REST: The point at which a formation begins, especially the
point toward which units are aligned in successive movements. For instance, in
executing “ON RIGHT INTO LINE”, the point of rest is the place where the leading
squad halts.
QUICK TIME (Siglang Hakbang): Cadence at a rate of 120 steps per minute.
RIGHT: The right extremity or element of a body of troops.
SWORD SWING: The swinging of sword must be 6 inches to the front and 3
inches to the rear of the trouser seams.
SLOW TIME: Cadence at a rate of 60 steps per minute.
STEP (Hakbang): The distance measured from heel to heel between the feet of
a man walking. A step maybe any prescribed number of inches. The half step and back
step are 15 inches. The right step and left step are 12 inches. The steps in quick and
double time are 30 and 36 inches, respectively.

SUCCESSIVE MOVEMENT (Sunud-sunurang galaw): A maneuver in which
the various elements of a command execute a certain movement one after another as
distinguished from a simultaneous movement.
TO REVOKE A COMMAND: To cancel a command that has not been carried out
or to start a movement improperly begun from halt, the command MANUMBALIK is
given. On this command, the movement of troops and men resumes its former position.
PARTIAL CHANGES OF DIRECTION: To change the direction of a column by

45 degrees to the left or right the command is LIKO HATING-KANAN (KALIWA), KAD.
To execute a slight change of direction, the command PAGAWING KANAN (KALIWA)
is given. The guide or guiding elements move/s in the indicated direction, and the rest of
the unit follows.
NUMBERING UNITS: For drill purposes, platoons within each company are
numbered from right to left when the company is in line and from front to rear when the
company is in column. Squads within each platoon are numbered from right to left when
the platoon is in line and from front to rear when the platoon is in column.
POST: Post means the correct place for an officer or non-commissioned officer
to stand. This can be in front, behind or by the side of a unit. When changes in
formation involve changes of posts, the new post is taken by the most direct route and,
as soon as practicable, after the command of execution. Officers and non-
commissioned officers who have prescribed duties in connection with the movements
take their posts when the duties are completed. In executing a movement or facing, and
when moving from one post to another, officers and non-commissioned officers
maintain a military bearing and move with smartness and precision.
a. In movements after the first formation, guidon bearers and special units
maintain their positions with respect to the flank or the end of the unit to which they
were originally posted.
b. In all formations and movements, non-commissioned officers commanding

an element take the same post as prescribed for an officer. When giving commands,
making or receiving reports (except squad leaders in ranks) or drilling a unit, a non-
commissioned officer armed with rifle carries it at the right shoulder.
c. When acting as an instructor, the officer or non-commissioned officer goes

wherever his presence is needed to correct mistakes and supervise the performance of
the men in ranks.
COUNTING CADENCE
a. Except at the beginning of basic training, the commander or instructor

does not count cadence to acquaint the men with cadence rhythm. When a man gets

out of step, he is corrected by the commander who halts the unit and then moves
everybody off in the step. Counting cadence by the group helps to teach group
coordination, cadence, and rhythm. To help a man keep in step, the commander
encourages him to keep his head up and watch the head and shoulders of the man in
front of him. The command is BILANG HAKBANG, KAD. The command of execution is
given as the left foot strikes the ground. The next time the left foot strikes the ground,
the group calls the cadence for 8 steps in a firm and vigorous manner as follows: ISA,
DALAWA, TATLO, APAT… However, this command must not be executed in a
boisterous manner. The good instructor holds his counting to a minimum.
b. As soldiers begin to master the art of drills, instructors try to create a spirit
of competition among individuals and between units. Although repetition is necessary
when teaching drills, instructors must use competitive drill exercises to ensure that drills
do not become boring or monotonous.
c. Mass commands are used to develop confidence and promote

enthusiasm. These are effective in developing a command voice when instructing a
leadership course. Procedures for using mass commands are discussed in Section 2.

SECTION II
COMMANDS AND THE COMMAND VOICE

“The spirit of discipline, as distinct from its outward and visible guises, is the result of
association with martial traditions and their living embodiment.” – B.H. Liddell Hart, Thoughts on
War, 1944
Commands
2.1 GENERAL
a. A drill command is an oral order of a commander or leader. The precision

of a movement is affected by the manner in which the command is given.
b. The following rules for giving commands apply to the commander when
the unit drills as a separate unit and not as a part of a larger formation.
1) When at halt, the commander faces the troops when giving

commands. On commands that set the unit in motion (marching from one point to
another), the commander moves simultaneously with the unit to maintain correct
position within the formation.
2) When marching, the commander turns his head toward the

direction of the troops to give commands.
3) Exceptions to these rules occur during ceremonies.
c. When elements drill as a part of a larger unit, the rules of supplementary

commands apply (see supplementary commands).
d. The commander gives the command MANUMBALIK (AS YOU WERE) to

revoke a preparatory command that he has given. The command MANUMBALIK must
Part I / Section II: Commands and the Command Voice 8

be given prior to the command of execution. The commander cannot cancel the
command of execution with MANUMBALIK. If an improper command is not revoked,
the personnel execute the movement in the best manner possible.
2.2 TWO PART COMMANDS
a. Most drill commands have two parts: the preparatory command and the
command of execution. Neither is a command itself, but the parts are termed
commands to simplify instruction. The command HANDA (READY), SIPAT (AIM),
PUTOK (FIRE) is considered to be a two-part command even though it contains two
pre-commands.
1) The preparatory command states the movement to be carried out

and mentally prepares the soldier for its execution. In the command PASULONG KAD,
the preparatory command is PASULONG.
2) The command of execution tells when the movement is to be

carried out. In PASULONG KAD, the command of execution is KAD.
b. To change the direction of a unit when marching, the preparatory

command and the command of execution for each movement are given so they begin
and end in the direction of the turn. KANANG PANIG, KAD (RIGHT FLANK) is given
as the right foot strikes the marching surface, and KALIWANG PANIG, KAD (LEFT
FLANK) as the left foot strikes the marching surface. The interval between the
preparatory command and the command of execution is normally one step or count.
2.3 ENGLISH VERSION TO FILIPINO VERSION
a. The AFP commands are derived from English and subsequently

translated to Filipino. This attempt to localize the English version has brought about
varied interpretations as to the preciseness of the terms being used. In the command of
execution, for example, the words RAP, NA, KAD, TA and others are often
misused/interchanged. The commander also opts to use what he thinks is appropriate.
b. To provide for uniformity, simplicity and preciseness and to suit the Filipino
commands in terms of voice control, distinctiveness, inflections and cadence, the
following guidelines are set forth.
1) In general, the word NA is used to signal the command of

execution except for the following:
a) TA – (abbreviated SANDATA) manual of arms for rifles and

pistols except for KALIS and TALIBONG, which fall under general rule.
b) KAD – (abbreviated LAKAD) from at rest to motion and all

subsequent commands in motion, e.g.: PASULONG, KAD.

c) TO – (abbreviated HINTO) from motion to rest.
d) RAP – (abbreviated HARAP) in HANDA HARAP as literal

translation of READY FRONT. They are also to be used in the commands left face, right
face and about face.
e) DA – (abbreviated HUMANDA) for attention.
f) NGA – (abbreviated PAHINGA) in TIKAS PAHINGA or

PARADE REST.
g) Combined commands
h) Supplementary commands
i) Mass Commands
j) Directives
2.4 COMBINED COMMANDS
In some commands, the preparatory command and the command of execution

are combined, for example, HUMANAY (FALL IN), PALUWAG (AT EASE),
LUMANSAG (DISMISS). The commands are given without inflection and at a uniform
high pitch and loudness comparable to that of a normal command of execution.
2.5 SUPPLEMENTARY COMMANDS
a. Supplementary commands are oral orders given by a subordinate leader

to reinforce and complement a commander’s orders. They ensure proper understanding
and execution of a movement. They extend to the lowest subordinate leader exercising
control over an element for he commands as a separate element within the same
formation.
b. A supplementary command may be a preparatory command, a portion of

a pre-command, or a two-part command. It is normally given between the pre-command
and the command of execution. It is used when a command requires an element of a
unit to execute a movement different from other elements within the same formation, or
the same movement at the time prescribed by the procedures covering that particular
movement. For example, the platoon is in column formation and the platoon leader
commands DALAWAHANG TUDLING SUNUDSURAN MULA SA KALIWA (pause),
KAD. The first and second TUDLING leaders command PASULONG; the third and
forth TUDLING leaders command MANATILI (STAND FAST). On the command of
execution KAD, the first and second squads march forward. At the appropriate time, the
squad leader (third) nearest the moving element commands LIKO HATING KALIWA,
KAD (for both remaining squads). As the third and fourth squad leaders reach the line

of the march, they automatically execute a LIKO HATING KANAN and obtain normal
distance behind the first and second squads.
c. A subordinate leader gives all supplementary commands over his right

shoulder except when his command is based on the actions of an element on his left or
when the sub-element is to execute a LIKO SA KALIWA, LIKO HATING KALIWA or
KALIWANG PANIG. Giving commands over the left shoulder occurs when changing
the configuration of a formation, such as forming a file or a column of four and
reforming.
Note: When in formation at present arms and the preparatory command of order of arms is given, the
subordinate leaders terminate their salute before giving their supplementary commands.
d. Supplementary commands are not given by a sub-leader for the combined

commands HUMANAY, PALUWAG, TIWALAG or for mass drills when his element
forms part of a mass formation. However, supplementary commands are given when
forming a mass or when forming a column from a mass.
e. Except for commands while in mass formation, platoon leaders give

supplementary commands following the commands of the commander. When the
preparatory command is BALANGAY, the platoon leaders immediately come to
attention and command PULUTONG. The company commander allows for all
supplementary commands before giving the command of execution.
f. When no direction is given, the response is understood to be forward.

When no rate of march is given, the response is SIGLANG HAKBANG (QUICK TIME).
This normally happens when a direction or rate of march is included in the pre-
command, or the direction or rate of march is given as a supplementary command.
2.6 MASS COMMANDS
a. Mass commands may be used to develop confidence and promote

enthusiasm. (They are definitely effective in developing a command voice when
instructing a leadership course.)
b. When the commander wants the unit to use mass commands, he

commands SA AKING PAG-UTOS (AT MY COMMAND). The commander gives
preparatory command describing the movement to be performed. For example, face the
platoon to the right. The command of execution is RAP (COMMAND). When the
commander orders HARAP SA KANAN, RAP (COMMAND), all personnel in the unit
execute the command HARAP SA KANAN (RIGHT FACE) in unison.
c. To give mass commands while marching, the commander gives the

preparatory command for the movement and substitutes KAD (COMMAND) for the
command of execution KAD (MARCH), for example, LIKO SA KANAN, KAD
(COLUMN RIGHT COMMAND); PABALIK KAD (REAR COMMAND).

d. Mass commands for the execution of the manual of arms are given in the
same manner as described in sub-paragraphs a-c.
e. When the commander wants to stop mass commands, he commands SA

AKING PAG-UTOS (AT MY COMMAND). The normal method in the conduct of drills is
then resumed.
2.7 DIRECTIVES
a. Directives are described as all oral orders given by the commander that
direct or cause subordinate leader to take actions.
b. The commander gives directives rather than commands when it is more

appropriate for subordinate elements to execute a movement or perform a task as
independent elements of the same formation.
c. Directives are given in sentence form and are normally prefixed by the
terms “IBUKA ANG TALUDTOD AT ITUNGKOD ANG SANDATA”. Example:
“ITANGHAL ANG SANDATA”.
d. “PAMUNUAN ANG INYONG PANGKAT O TILAP, PULUTONG,

BALANGAY” is the only directive with which a commander relinquishes his command
and with which salutes are exchanged.
e. A subordinate commander, upon receiving a directive, will resort to the

normal two-part command.

The Command Voice
2.8 GENERAL
Everyone in the unit will easily understand a correctly delivered command.

Correct commands have a tone, cadence, and snap that demands willing, correct, and
immediate response.
2.9 VOICE CONTROL
a. The loudness of a command is adjusted to the number of soldiers in the

unit. Normally, the commander is in the front and at the center of the unit and speaks
facing the unit so that his voice reaches everyone.
b. It is necessary for the voice to have carrying power, but excessive exertion
is unnecessary and harmful. A typical result of trying too hard is the almost unconscious
tightening of the neck muscles to force the sound out. This produces strain, hoarseness,
sore throat and worst of all, indistinct and jumbled sounds instead of clear commands.
Ease is achieved through good posture, confidence, proper breathing and correct
adjustment of throat and mouth muscles.
c. The best posture for giving commands is the position of attention. Soldiers
in formation are prone to adopt the posture of their leader. If the posture is unmilitary
(relaxed, slouched, stiff or uneasy), the subordinates will imitate it.
d. The most important muscle used in breathing is the diaphragm - the large
muscle that separates the chest cavity from the abdominal cavity. The diaphragm
automatically controls normal breathing and is used to control the breath in giving
commands.
e. The throat, mouth and nose act as amplifiers and help to give loudness
(resonance) and projection to the voice.
2.10 DISTINCTIVENESS
a. Distinctiveness depends on the correct use of the tongue, lips and teeth
that form the separate sounds of a word into syllables. Distinct commands are effective.
Indistinct commands cause confusion. All commands can be pronounced correctly
without loss of effect. Emphasize correct enunciation (distinctiveness) and enunciate
clearly making full use of the lips, tongue and lower jaw.
b. To develop the ability to give clear and distinct commands, practice giving
commands slowly and carefully, prolonging the syllables. Then gradually increase the
rate of delivery to develop proper cadence, still articulating each syllable distinctly.

2.11 INFLECTION
Inflection is the rise and fall in pitch and the tone changes of voice.
a. The preparatory command is the command that indicates movement.

Pronounce each preparatory command with a rising inflection. The most desirable pitch
when beginning a preparatory command is near the level of the natural speaking voice.
It is possible to give the command execution with clarity or without strain. It is good to
remember to begin a command near the natural pitch of the voice.
b. The command of execution is the command that indicates when a

movement is to be executed. Give it in a sharper tone and in a slightly higher pitch than
the last syllable of the preparatory command. It must be given with plenty of snap. The
best way to develop a command voice is to practice.
c. In combined commands such as HUMANAY (FALL IN) and TIWALAG

(FALL OUT), the preparatory command and command of execution are combined. Give
these commands without inflection and with the uniform high pitch and loudness of a
normal command of execution.
2.12 CADENCE
a. Cadence in commands means a uniform and rhythmic flow of words. The

interval between commands must be uniform in length for any given troop unit. This is
necessary so that everyone in the unit will be able to understand the preparatory
command and will know when to expect the command of execution. For the squad or
platoon in marching, except when supplementary commands need to be given, the
interval of time is that which allows one step (or count) between the preparatory
command and the command of execution. The same interval is used for commands
given at halt. Longer commands, such as KANANG PANIG, KAD (RIGHT FLANK
MARCH), must be started in such a way that the preparatory command will end on the
proper foot, and leave a full count between the preparatory command and the command
of execution.
b. When the supplementary commands are necessary, the commander

should allow for one count between the preparatory command and the subordinate
leaders’ supplementary command, and an additional count after the subordinate
command but before the command of execution.

SECTION III
INDIVIDUAL MOVEMENTS NOT UNDER ARMS

“Maintain discipline and caution above all things, and be on the alert to obey the word of
command. It is both the noblest and the safest thing for a great army to be visibly animated by
one spirit.” – Archidamus of Sparta
Movements While At Halt
3.1 GENERAL
a. This chapter contains most of the individual positions and stationary

movements required in drills. These positions and the correct execution of the
movement in every detail should be learned before proceeding to other drill movements.
b. Movements are initiated from the position of attention. However, some rest
movement may be executed from other rest positions.
3.2 POSITION OF ATTENTION
Part I / Section III: Individual Movements Not Under Arms 15

a. In coming to attention, bring your heels together smartly on the same line.
Hold them as near each other as the conformation of your body permits.
b. Turn your feet out equally, forming an angle of 45 degrees.
c. Keep your knees straight without stiffness.
d. Hold your hips level, your body erect, your chest lifted and arched, your
shoulders square and even.
e. Let your arms hang straight down without stiffness, thumbs along the
seams of your trousers. Hold the back of your hands out, with the fingers held naturally
so that the thumbs rest along the tip of the forefingers.
f. Keep your head erect and squarely to the front, your chin drawn in so that
the axis of your head and neck is vertical. Look straight to the front (about 30 yards
ahead).
g. Rest the weight of your body equally on the heels and the balls of your
feet.
h. Remain silent and do not move unless otherwise directed.
3.3 REST POSITION AT THE HALT
a. Parade Rest

The command is TIKAS, PAHINGA. On the preparatory command, TIKAS, shift
the weight of your body to the right leg without noticeable movement. On the command
of execution, PAHINGA, and at the count of one, move the left foot smartly twelve
inches to the left of the right foot. The 12 inches are measured from the inside of the left
heel to the inside of the right heel. The legs remain straight without stiffness, allowing
the body weight to rest equally on both legs. At the same time the left foot is moved,
clasped behind the back. The left hand is placed at the small of the back, just below the
belt, and the right hand is placed inside the left. The thumb of the right hand interlocks
the thumb of the left hand. All the fingers are extended and joined and the palms are to
the rear. The elbows shall be in line with the body. Silence and immobility are required.
The only command is TILAP/PULUTONG or BALANGAY, DA. On the command of
execution, DA, smartly bring the left heel against the right heel and, at the same time,
drop the arms to the sides and assume the position of attention.
b. Stand at Ease
The command for this movement is TINDIG PALUWAG. On the command of

execution PALUWAG, execute PARADE REST, but turn the head and eyes directly
toward the person in charge of the formation. AT EASE or REST may be executed from
this position.
c. At Ease
The command for this movement is PALUWAG. On the command PALUWAG,

the soldier may move, however, he must remain standing and silent with his right foot in
place. PAHINGA may be executed from this position.

d. Rest
The command for this movement is PAHINGA. On the command PAHINGA, the
soldier may move or talk, keeping his right foot in place, unless otherwise directed. At
ease may be executed from this position.
e. Fall Out
1) At the command TIWALAG, you may leave the ranks but you are
required to remain in the immediate area. You resume your former place at attention in
ranks at the command HUMANAY.
2) Being at any of the rests except TIWALAG, to resume the position

of attention the command is – TILAP, HUMANDA. At the command TILAP take the
position of parade rest. At the command of HUMANDA, take the position of attention.
TINDIG PALUWAG, PALUWAG and PAHINGA can also be executed from the position
of attention.
3.4 DISMISS
At the command LUMANSAG, the troops shall execute about face and leave the
immediate vicinity, unless instructed otherwise.
3.5 EYES RIGHT
a. Used as a courtesy to reviewing officers and dignitaries during parades

and ceremonies. It is a one-count movement and the command is given while halted at
attention or marching at quick time. The commands are HANDA TINGIN SA KANAN
(KALIWA), NA and HANDA, RAP.
b. Assume you are halted at attention. Upon the approach of the reviewing
officer, the unit leader commands, HANDA TINGIN SA KANAN. On the command of
execution, NA, and at the count of one, all members of the formation smartly turn their
heads 45 degrees to the right. The shoulders remain square to the front. There is no
command to terminate this movement. When the reviewing officer comes into your line
of vision, you will follow his movement with your head and eyes until they are straight to
the front. At this time the movement is terminated, and you remain at the position of
attention until given another command.
3.6 FACING AT THE HALT
a. Facing to the flank is a two-count movement. The command is HARAP

SA KANAN (KALIWA), RAP. On the command of execution, RAP slightly raise the
right heel and left toe, and turn 90 degrees to the left on the left heel, assisted by a
slight pressure on the ball of the right foot. Keep the left leg straight without stiffness
and allow the right leg to bend naturally. On the second count, place the right foot

beside the left foot, resuming the position of attention. Arms remain at the sides, as in
the position of attention, throughout this movement.
b. Facing to the rear is a two-count movement. The command is HARAP SA

LIKOD, RAP. On the command of execution RAP, move the toe of the right foot to a
point touching the marching surface about half the length of the foot to the rear and
slightly to the left heel. Rest most of the weight of the body on the heel of the left foot
and allow the right knee to bend naturally. On the second count, turn to the right 180
degrees on the left heel and ball of the right foot, resuming the position of attention.
Arms remain at the sides, as in the position of attention, throughout this movement.
3.7 HAND SALUTE
a. The hand salute is a one-count movement. The command is PUGAY

KAMAY, NA, when wearing a headgear with visor (with or without glasses). On the
command of execution NA, raise the right hand sharply, fingers and thumb extended
and joined, palm facing down, and place the tip of the right forefinger on the rim of the

visor slightly to the right of the right eye. The outer edge of the hand is barely downward
so that neither the back of the hand nor the palm is clearly visible from the front. The
hand and the wrist should be straight, the elbow inclined slightly forward, and the upper
arm is horizontal to the ground with your forearm inclined at 45 degrees.
b. When wearing a headgear without a visor (or uncovered) and not wearing
glasses, execute the hand salute in the same manner as previously described in sub-
paragraph a, while touching the tip of the forefinger to the forehead to that point on the
glasses where the temple frame meets the right edge of the right eye brow.
c. When wearing a headgear without a visor (or uncovered) and wearing

glasses, execute the hand in the same manner as described in sub-paragraph a, while
touching the tip of the right forefinger to that point on the glasses where the temple
piece of the frame meets the right edge of the right eye brow.
d. Order Arms from the hand salute is a one-count movement. The

command is BABA, KAMAY, NA. On the command of execution NA, return the hand
sharply to the side resuming the position of attention.
e. When the rifle is slung to the right shoulder, the left hand shall
automatically hold the sling of the rifle across the body then execute the hand salute in
the same manner as described in sub-paragraph a.
f. When carrying a rifle, salute can be done either in the position of Attention
or while in Right Shoulder Arms. When executing Order Arms, raise the rifle at least
three (3) inches above the ground. Then execute sharply the salute by touching the
muzzle of the rifle with the left hand. When executing at Right Shoulder Arms, just follow
the same sequence in the former but now touching the rear sight knob of the rifle.
3.8 REMOVE/RETURN HEADGEAR
a. To remove a headgear is a two-count movement. The command is ALIS

KUPYA, NA. On the last note of the preparatory command ALIS KUPYA, hold your
visor with your right hand (with your left hand if under arms) including the chinstrap if

making use of it. At the command of execution NA, remove the headgear from your
head and bring the cap to your side.
b. In returning the headgear, the command is BALIK KUPYA, NA. On the

last note of the preparatory command BALIK KUPYA, place the headgear on your head
(if making use of a chin strap, fix the strap in your chin and hold your visor again)
holding your visor. At the command of execution NA, bring down your hand smartly to
the position of Order Arms/Attention.

Steps and Marching
3.9 GENERAL
a. This section contains all the steps in marching of the individual soldier.
These steps should be learned thoroughly before proceeding to unit drill.
b. All marching movements executed from the halt are initiated from the
position of Attention.
c. Except for route step march and at ease march, all movements are
executed while marching at attention. Marching at attention is the combination of the
position of Attention and the procedures for the prescribed step executed
simultaneously.
d. When executed from the halt, all steps except right step begin with the left
foot.
e. For short-distance marching movements, the commander may designate

the number of steps forward, backward, or sideward by giving the appropriate
command: ISANG HAKBANG PAKANAN, KAD or DALAWANG HAKBANG
PASULONG (PAURONG), KAD. On the command of execution KAD, step off with the
appropriate foot, and halt automatically after completing the number of steps
designated. Unless otherwise specified, when directed to execute steps forward, the
steps will be 30-inch steps.
f. All marching movements are executed in the cadence of quick time (120
steps per minute), except the 36-inch step, which may be executed in the cadence of
180 steps per minute on the command TAKBONG HAKBANG, KAD.
g. A step is the prescribed distance measured from heel to heel of a

marching soldier.
h. All 15-inch steps are executed for a short distance only.
i. Both the preparatory command and the command of execution are given
as the foot in the direction of the turn strikes the ground. Normally, for a unit not larger
than a squad or platoon, the preparatory command is given as your left (or right) foot
strikes the ground and the command of execution is given when your left (or right) foot
next strikes the ground. For units larger than a platoon, time is allowed for the unit
leaders to repeat the preparatory command.
3.10 THE 30-INCH STEP (QUICK TIME)

a. To march with a 30-inch step from the halt, the command is PASULONG,
KAD. On the preparatory command PASULONG, shift the weight of the body to the
right foot without noticeable movement. On the command of execution KAD, step
forward 30 inches with the left foot and continue marching with 30-inch steps, keeping
the head and eyes fixed to the front. The arms swing in natural motion, without
exaggeration and without bending at the elbows, approximately 6 inches straight to the
front and 3 inches straight to the rear of the trouser seams, knuckles out facing forward,
b. In halt while marching, the command TILAP (PULUTONG), HINTO shall

be given. The preparatory command TILAP (PULUTONG) is given as either foot strikes
the marching surface as long as the command of execution TO is given the next time
that foot strikes the marching surface. The halt is executed in two counts. After HINTO
is commanded, execute the additional step required after the command of execution
and then bring the trail foot alongside the lead foot, assuming the position of Attention
and terminating the movement.
c. Quick Time from Double Time
Assume you are marching forward at double time and you receive the command,
SIGLANG HAKBANG, KAD. The command of execution may be given as either foot
strikes the deck. The command will be given as the left foot strikes the deck. On the
command of execution, KAD, your next step will be a 30-inch step to the front with your
left foot (step). Thirty (30) inches are measured from the rear of your left heel to the rear
of your right heel. At the same time you will decrease the cadence to 120 steps per
minute, and lower your arms to the quick time position. You will continue to march,
taking 120, 30-inch steps per minute, swinging your arms 6 inches straight to the front
and 3 inches straight to the rear of the trouser seams. Knuckles out facing forward and
3.11 CHANGE STEP
a. To change step while marching, the command PALIT HAKBANG, KAD is

given as the right foot strikes the marching surface. On the command of execution KAD,
take one more step with the left foot, clip your arms on your side, then in one count,
place the right toe near the heel of the left foot and step off again with the left foot. The
arms shall swing naturally after execution.
3.12 TO MARCH AT REST
At Ease March
The command PALUWAG, KAD is given as either foot strikes the marching
surface. On the command of execution KAD, the soldier is no longer required to retain
cadence; however, silence and the approximate interval and distance are maintained.

SIGLANG HAKBANG, KAD and LAYANG HAKBANG, KAD are the only commands
that can be given while marching at ease.
3.13 HALF STEP MARCH (15-Inch Step)
a. To march with a 15-inch step from the halt, the command is HATING
HAKBANG, KAD. On the preparatory command, HATING HAKBANG, shift the weight
of the body to the right foot without noticeable movement. On the command of
execution KAD, step forward 15 inches with the left foot and continue marching within
15-inch steps. The arms swing while marching with a 30-inch step.
b. To alter the march to a 15-inch step while marching with a 30-inch step,
the command is HATING HAKBANG, KAD. This command may be given as either foot
strikes the marching surface. On the command of execution KAD, take one more 30-
inch step and then begin marching with a 15-inch step. The arms shall be clipped on the
sides while marching the 15-inch steps.
c. To resume marching with a 30-inch step, the command PASULONG,

KAD is given as either foot strikes the marching surface. On the command of execution
KAD, take one more 15-inch and then begin marching with a 30-inch step.
d. The halt while marching at the half step is executed in two counts, the
same as the halt from the 30-inch step.
e. While marching at the half step the only commands that may be given are:
PATAKDA, KAD; PASULONG, KAD; PADALANG, KAD; and TILAP / PULUTONG /
BALANGAY / TALUPAD, TO.
3.14 MARCHING IN PLACE
a. To march in place, the command PATAKDA, KAD is given as either foot

strikes the marching surface and only while marching with a 30-inch step forward. On
the command of execution, KAD, take one more step, bring the trailing foot alongside
the leading foot, and begin to march in place. Raise each foot (alternately) 30-inch off
the marching surface and keep the arms at the sides as in the position of Attention.
b. To resume marching with a 30-inch step, the command PASULONG,

KAD is given as either foot strikes the marching surface. On the command of execution
KAD, take one more step in place and then step off with a 30-inch step.
c. Mark Time from Double Time in Place
Assume you are double-timing in place and you receive the command,
PATAKDA, KAD. The command of execution may be given as either foot strikes the
deck. For the purpose of demonstration, I will give the command as the left foot strikes
the deck. On the command of execution, KAD, your next step will be one more six-inch

vertical step in place with your right foot (step). Your next step will be a two-inch vertical
step in place with your left foot to the deck. At the same time, reduce the cadence to
120 steps per minute and lower the arms to the quick time position. You shall continue
marching in place, take 120- two-inch vertical alternating steps per minute.
d. The halt from mark time is executed in two counts, basically the same as
the halt from the 30-inch step.
3.15 SIDE STEP (RIGHT/LEFT)
a. To march with a 15-inch step right (left), the command is HAKBANG

PAKANAN (PAKALIWA), KAD. The command is given only while at the halt. On the
preparatory command of HAKBANG PAKANAN (PAKALIWA), shift the weight of the
body without noticeable movement onto the left (right) foot. On the command of
execution KAD, bend the right knee slightly and raise the right foot only high enough to
allow freedom of movement. Place the right foot 15 inches to the right of the left foot,
and then move the left foot (keeping the left leg straight) alongside the right foot as in
the position of Attention. Continue this movement, keeping the arms at the sides as in
the position of Attention.
b. To halt when executing right or left step, the command is TILAP

(PULUTONG), TO. This movement is executed in two counts. The preparatory
command is given when the heels are together. The command of execution TO is given
the next time the heels are together. On the command of execution TO, take one more
step with the lead foot and then place the trailing foot alongside the lead foot, resuming
the position of Attention.
3.16 BACKWARD MARCH
a. To march with a 15-inch step backward, the command is PAURONG,

KAD. The command is given only while at halt. On the preparatory command
PAURONG, shift the weight of the body without noticeable movement onto the right
foot. On the command of execution KAD, take a 15-inch step backward with the left foot
and continue marching backward with 15-inch steps. Arms are clipped on the side while
executing backward march.
b. The halt from backward march is executed in two counts, basically the
same as the halt from the 30-inch step.
3.17 DOUBLE TIME MARCH
a. To march in the cadence of 180 steps per minute with a 30-inch step, the
command is TAKBONG HAKBANG, KAD. It may be commanded while at the halt or
while marching at quick time with a 30-inch step.

b. When at halt and the preparatory command TAKBONG HAKBANG is
given, shift the weight of the body to the right foot without noticeable movement. On the
command of execution KAD, raise the forearms to a horizontal position, with the fingers
and thumb closed, knuckles out, simultaneously step off with the left foot. Continue to
march with 30-inch steps at the cadence of double time. The arms swing naturally to the
front and rear with the forearms kept horizontal (when armed soldiers come to Port
Arms on receiving the preparatory command TAKBONG HAKBANG). Guides, when at
Sling Arms will double time with their weapons at Sling Arms upon receiving the
directive “MGA GABAY SUMALUNAN” (GUIDES ON LINE).
c. When marching with a 30-inch step in the cadence of quick time, the
command TAKBONG HAKBANG, KAD is given as either foot strikes the marching
surface. On the command of execution KAD, take one more 30-inch step at quick time
and step off with the trailing foot, double timing as previously described.
d. To resume marching with a 30-inch step at quick time, the command

SIGLANG HAKBANG, KAD is given as either foot strikes the marching surface. On the
command of execution KAD, take two more 30-inch steps at double time, lower the
arms to the sides, and resume marching with a 30-inch step at quick time.
e. When you are marking time and you receive the command TAKBONG
HAKBANG, KAD, the command of execution may be given as either foot strikes the
deck. To demonstrate, the command is given as the left foot strikes the deck. On the
command of execution, KAD, your step will be one more two–inch vertical step in place
with your right foot (Step). Your next step will be a 36-inch step to the front with your left
foot (Step). Thirty-six inches are measured from the rear of your left heel to the rear of
your right heel. At the same time, increase the cadence to 180 steps per minute and
raise the forearms to a horizontal position along the waistline, fingers closed, knuckles
out. You will continue to march, taking 180, 36-inch steps per minute, swinging your
arms in their natural arc across the front of your body, until given another command.
f. When you are double-timing in place and you receive the command,
TAKBONG HAKBANG, KAD, the command of execution may be given as either foot
strikes the deck. For the purpose of demonstration, the command will be given as the
left foot strikes the deck. On the command of execution, KAD, your next step will be one
more six-inch vertical step in place with your right foot (step). Your next step will be a
36-inch step to the place with your left foot (Step). Thirty-six inches shall be measured
from the rear of your left heel to the rear of your right heel. You will continue to march,
taking 180 36-inch steps per minute, swinging your arms naturally across the front of
your body, until given another command.
3.18 TO FACE IN MARCHING
a. Face to the Right as in Marching

Assume you are halted at attention and you receive the command, LIKO SA
KANAN, KAD. On the preparatory command, LIKO SA KANAN, shift the weight of
your body to the left leg without noticeable movement. On the command of execution
KAD, face 90 degrees to the right by pivoting on the ball of the left foot, at the same
time taking a 30-inch step in the new direction with the right foot, swinging your arms in
their natural arc, six inches to the front and three inches to the rear of your legs, but
allow them to swing away from the body (Step). You will continue to march, taking 120,
30-inch steps per minute, swinging your arms 6 inches to the front and 3 inches to the
rear of your legs, until given another command.
b. Face to the Left as in Marching
Assume you are halted at attention and you receive the command, LIKO SA
KALIWA, KAD. On the preparatory command shift the weight of your body to the right
leg without noticeable movement. On the command of execution, KAD, face 90 degrees
to the left by pivoting on the ball of the right foot, at the same time taking a 30-inch step
in the new direction with the left foot, swinging your arms in their natural arc, six inches
to the front and three inches to the rear of your legs, not allowing them to swing away
from the body (Step). You will continue to march, taking 120, 30-inch step per minute,
swinging your arms 6 inches to the front and 3 inches to the rear of your legs until given
another command.
3.19 TO MARCH BY THE FLANK
While marching, the command is KANANG (KALIWANG) PANIG, KAD. At the

command KAD, strike the given foot on the ground, advance and plant your left (or
right) foot; then face to the right (or left) in marching and step off in the new direction on
your right (or left) foot.
3.20 TO MARCH TO THE REAR
a. While Marching Forward at Quick Time
Assume you are marching forward at quick time and you receive the command,
PABALIK, KAD. The command of execution will be given as the right foot strikes the
deck, as this involves movement to the right. On the command of execution, KAD, your
next step shall be to place your left foot approximately 30 inches and directly in front of
your right foot (Step). Your next step shall be to face 180 degrees to the right about by
pivoting on the balls of both feet (Step). The legs remain straight without stiffness and
the arms continue their natural swing, but not allowing it to swing wide from the body.
Your next step, without loss of cadence, will be a 30-inch step in the new direction
(Step). You shall continue to march quick time, until given another command.
b. While Marching Forward at Double Time

Assume you are marching forward at double time and receive the command,
PABALIK, KAD. The command of execution will be given as the right foot strikes the
deck, as this involves a movement to the right. On the command of execution, KAD,
your next steps will be two 36-inch steps to the front (Step, Step). Your next steps shall
be four six-inch vertical alternating steps in place, at the same time turning 180 degrees
to the right about (Step, Step, Step, and Step). The arms shall continue their natural
swing, but shall not be allowed to swing away from the body. Your next, without loss of
cadence, will be a 36-inch step in the new direction with your left foot (Step). You will
continue to march at double time cadence until given another command.
3.21 EYES RIGHT/LEFT WHILE MARCHING
a. While marching at quick time, the unit leader commands HANDA TINGIN
SA KANAN, NA when he is six paces away from the reviewing officer. The command of
execution should be given as the right foot strikes the deck, as this is a movement to the
right. On the command of execution, NA, and for the count of one, your next step will be
a 30-inch step to the front with your left foot. At the same time, all files, except the right
file, will smartly turn their head and eyes 45 degrees to the right (Step). The shoulders
remain square to the front. The members of the right file will keep their heads and eyes
to the front. You shall continue to march until given the next command. The command
to terminate this movement is HANDA, HARAP. The command of execution is given
when the last rank is six paces beyond the reviewing officer, and as the left foot strikes
the deck, as this involves a movement to the left. On the command of execution,
HARAP, your next step is a 30-inch step to the front with your right foot. At the same
time, all men who have executed eyes right will then turn their heads and eyes to the
front (Step). You shall continue to march until given another command.
Eyes Left: The movement of eyes left may only be executed while marching
and is normally done during street parades, when the reviewing stand is on the left.
While marching at quick time, the unit leader gives the command when he is six paces
away from the reviewing officer. The command of execution is given as the left foot
strikes the deck, as this involves a movement to the left. On the command of execution,
NA, and the count of one, your next step will be a 30-inch step to the front with your
right foot. At the same time, all files except the left file will smartly turn their heads and
eyes 45 degrees to the left (Step). The shoulders remain square to the front. The
members of the left file will keep their heads and eyes to the front. You shall continue to
march until given the next command. The command to terminate this movement is
HANDA, HARAP. The command of execution is given when the last rank has moved
six paces, as this involves a movement to the right. On the command of execution,
HARAP, your next step is a 30-inch step to the front with your left foot. At the same
time, all files that have executed eyes left will smartly turn their head and eyes to the
front (Step). You shall continue marching until given another command.
3.22 STAFF BEHIND THE COMMANDER

To make a staff move to the rear of a commander, the command is
KALUPUNAN, SUMALIKOD KO, KAD. The movement is executed in 9 counts for 2 or
3 men staff, 11 for 4 men staff, 13 for 5 man staff, and 15 for 6 men staff.
At the command KAD, all members of the staff execute right face, then the first
man faces to the left and marches 4 steps, column left and halts on the prescribed last
count. All members shall march forward and follow the first man turning at the same
pivot made by the first man.
All members halt in the designated count and face left altogether automatically
facing the new direction.

SECTION IV
INDIVIDUAL MOVEMENTS UNDER ARMS

“ Feed ‘em and give ‘em hell. Teach them where they are. Make ‘em so mad they’ll eat still
rather than get dressing from you. Make ‘em hard but don’t break them.” – Laurence Stallings
Manual of Arms
4.1 GENERAL
a. This section contains procedures for executing the manual of arms with
the M14 rifle in conjunction with individual and unit drill movements.
b. At the halt, all movements are initiated from Order Arms or Sling Arms,
which are the positions of attention with the rifle.
c. All precision movements are executed in quick-time cadence.
d. For drill purposes, the modified magazine is carried in the rifle. When
performing duty requiring the use of magazine, the rifle is carried at Sling Arms.
e. The command AGAP, TA or ISAKBAT, TA must be given, prior to the

command for double time.
f. Execute HUMANAY with your rifle at Port Arms.
g. Movements for short distances are executed at the trail by introducing

preparatory commands such as BITBIT SANDATA, or BITBIT SANDATA,
PASULONG, KAD. Take the trail position at the command, KAD, and resume the order
on halting.
Part I / Section IV: Individual Movements Under Arms 30

M ANU AL ON DRILLS AND CEREM ONIES
h. With your rifle at Order Arms, bring it to the trail while in motion when
executing the facing, alignments, opening and closing of ranks, side step, back step or
extending and closing. In each case, take the position of Trail Arms at the command of
execution. Push and pull your rifle smartly and resume Order Arms position and adjust
hands slowly.
i. Facing movements are executed from Order Arms or Sling Arms. When
facing is necessary to establish the direction of march, the facing movement is executed
before the command for the manual of arms. After a marching movement has been
completed, BABA, TA or ISAKBAT, TA is commanded prior to the command for the
facing movement.
j. In saluting when you are not in ranks and at Sling Arms, give the hand
salute.
k. In all movements except those mentioned above, the rifle is carried Right
Shoulder Arms in cadence. Execute Right Shoulder Arms simultaneously with the
stepping off for any movement in cadence.
l. In halting, the rifle is to be brought to Order Arms in cadence, after halt

has been completed as in a soldier without arms, unless the command is preceded in
place, in which case, remain at Right Shoulder Arms.
m. Port Arms is the key position assumed in most manual of arms movement
from one position to another except Right Shoulder Arms from Order Arms and Order
Arms from Right Shoulder Arms.
n. Manual of arms movements are a combination of the position of attention

and the procedures for the prescribed movement. Most manual of arms movements are
executed with the head, eyes, and body in the position of attention.
4.2 RULES GOVERNING THE EXECUTION OF MANUAL OF ARMS
a. Unless indicated in this manual, these rules apply.
b. The term "at the balance" refers to a point on the M14 just in front of the
trigger housing.

c. Whenever a position is described as "diagonally across the body," the rifle
barrel is up, the butt is in front of your right hip, and the rifle barrel bisects the junction of
your neck and left shoulder. The rifle and sling are grasped at the balance with your left
hand. Hold the rifle with the palm of your hand toward your body with the wrist straight.
The space between the barrel and the gas cylinder is approximately aligned with your
left ear. Small finger of the left hand is tangent to the operating rod handle. Maintain the
rifle one fist away from your body.
d. The cadence for rifle movement is quick time. In the early stages of your
training, give your whole attention to the details of the motions. You acquire the
cadence gradually as you become accustomed to handling your rifle. Sometimes, the
commander may require you to count aloud in cadence with motions.
e. The manual of arms is taught at a halt. However, to add interest to the drill
or to prevent fatigue in long marches Right Shoulder to Left Shoulder (or Left Shoulder
to Right Shoulder), or Port Arms may be given when marching at attention.
f. Any position of manual of arms may be ordered from a previous position

by giving the suitable commands. However, when at Inspection Arms, the command
AGAP, TA is given and executed before moving to any other position of the manual.
g. When executing movements with the rifle, the movements are executed
SMARTLY and snappily. Movements with the rifle shall be executed in the most direct
manner and exaggeration of movements shall not be taught, with the exception of the
head and limbs, when required to perform a function while executing the manual.
4.3 ORDER ARMS
a. Assume Order Arms on the command HUMANAY or from Parade Rest on

the command of execution HUMANDA.

b. At Order Arms, maintain the position of attention with the rifle. Place the
butt of the rifle on the marching surface, with sights to the rear. The toe of the butt
touches the foot on line. Secure the rifle with the right hand in a "U" formed by the
fingers (extended and joined) and thumb. Hold the rifle on the upper hand, guard with
the right thumb and forefinger pointed downward, and in line with the flat surface of the
handguard. Keep the right hand and arm behind the rifle so that the thumb is straight
along the seam of the trouser’s leg.
4.4 REST POSITIONS
The rifle rest positions are commanded and executed in the same manner as in
the individual drill not under arms with the following conditions:
a. Parade Rest
On the command of execution PAHINGA or TIKAS, PAHINGA, thrust the

muzzle forward, simultaneously changing the grip of the right hand to grasp the stock
just below the gas cylinder lock screw, keeping the toe of the butt of the rifle in line with
your toe and on the marching surface and the right arm straightened directly to the front.
Silence and immobility are required - if at Sling Arms the rifles shall remain slung.

b. Stand at Ease
Execute Stand at Ease in the same manner as Parade Rest with the rifle but turn
the head and eyes toward the commander.
c. Rest
On the command PALUWAG or PAHINGA, keep the butt of the rifle in place as
in Parade Rest and bring the rifle diagonally in front of you with your right hand and
simultaneously grasp with your left hand clasping your right hand. At this position, the
soldier may move; however, he must remain standing and silent with the rifle and right
foot in place.

d. Rifle Position at Route Steps
At the command of LAYANG HAKBANG, KAD rest the flat side of the stock on
your shoulder, with your right arm clipped to your sides, and your forearm forming a 45-
degree angle to the sides.
4.5 PORT ARMS
a. Port Arms from Order Arms is a two-count movement. The command is

AGAP, TA. On the command of execution TA, grasp the rifle with the right hand and
raise the rifle diagonally across the body, keeping the right elbow down (without strain).
With the left hand, simultaneously grasp the balance of the rifle so that the rifle is about
4 inches from the waist. On the second count, regrasp the rifle at the small of the stock
with the right hand. Hold the rifle diagonally across the body, about 4 inches from the
waist and parallel to the body, with the right forearm in horizontal position, and the
elbows close to the sides.
b. Order Arms from Port Arms is executed in three counts. The command is
BABA, TA. On the command of execution TA, move the right hand up and across the
body to the upper hand guard without strain. On the second count, remove the left hand
from the balance and lower the rifle to the right side until it is about three inches from
the marching surface. Guide the rifle to the side by placing the forefinger of the left hand
at the flash suppressor, fingers and thumb extended and joined, and palm to the rear.
On the third count, move the left hand sharply to the left side, lower the rifle gently to the
marching surface, and resume position of Order Arms.

4.6 PRESENT ARMS
a. At Order Arms, the command is TANGHAL, TA. At the command TA,

which is at the count of one in this movement, raise the rifle in front and at the center of
your body with your right hand. The barrel is to the rear and vertical. Then grasp the rifle
at the balance with your left hand, the forearm horizontally resting against your body
with your fingers joined. At the count of two, place your right hand at the small of the
stock. Hold the small of the stock in a "U" formed by the fingers (extended and joined)
and thumb.

b. The distance of the rifle from the body is about a fist away and the front
sight is at the level of the eyes.
c. Order Arms from Present Arms is executed in three counts with the
command BABA, TA. On the command TA, which is at the count of one in this
movement, move your right hand from its grasp of the stock and regrasp the piece on
the hand guard. On the second count, release the grasp of your left hand, lower the rifle
to the right so that the butt is three inches from the ground, barrel to the rear. Guide it to
the side by placing the forefinger of the left hand at the flash suppressor, fingers and
thumb extended and joined and palm to the rear. On the third count, move the left hand
sharply to the left side, lower the rifle gently to the marching surface, and resume the
position of Order Arms.
4.7 RIGHT SHOULDER ARMS
a. When executed from Order Arms, Right Shoulder Arms is a five-count

movement. The command is SA KANANG BALIKAT, TA. On the command TA, (One)
raise and carry the rifle diagonally across the body with the right hand, at the same time,
grasp it at the balance with your left hand. Regrasp the butt with your right hand, the
heel of the butt between the first two fingers, thumb and fingers closed on the stock.
(Three) Twist. (Four) Without changing the grasp of your right hand, place the rifle on
your right shoulder, barrel up and inclined at an angle of about 90 degrees. Hold your
right elbow against your side with the forearm horizontal. The trigger guard should be in
the hollow of your right shoulder. At the same time, with your left hand at the small of
stock, thumb and fingers extended and joined, guide the rifle to your right shoulder. The
first joint of the forefinger touches the rear end of the receiver. Hold your wrist straight,
and your elbow down. (Five) Cut away your left hand smartly to the side.

Note: The rifle should be angled at 30 degrees by 60 degrees
b. The return to Order Arms is a four-count movement. On the command

BABA, TA, press down the rifle’s butt quickly and move the rifle diagonally across your
body, turning the butt so as to keep the barrel up. Grasp the rifle at the balance with
your left hand, retaining the grasp of your right hand on the butt (count one). On the
second count, move your right hand up and across your body and grasp the front
handguard. The third and fourth counts are executed in the same manner as the second
and third counts in executing Order Arms from Port Arms.
c. Right Shoulder Arms from Port Arms is a four-count movement. On the

first count, regrasp the rifle at the butt with your right hand as you would in coming to
Right Shoulder from Order Arms. The last three counts are the same as the last two
counts in moving from Order to Right Shoulder Arms.
d. Port Arms from Right Shoulder Arms is a two-count movement. The first
count is the same as the first count from Right Shoulder to Order Arms. On the second
count, regrasp the rifle with your right hand at the small of the stock in the position of
Port Arms.
4.8 STACK AND TAKE ARMS
a. Stack Arms is executed from Order Arms only. It may be executed while at
normal interval in a line (squad) or a column formation. STACK ARMS is not a precise
movement; however, it is executed in a military manner.
b. The leader designates the stackmen by numbers (3-6-9-12) when in a line
formation, or by a squad (second or third) when in a column formation. After the
stackmen have been designated, the leader then commands AYUSIN ANG SAKBAT.
c. On the command SAKBAT, each stackman places the butt of his rifle on
his right hip and cradles it in the crook of his right arm. He then adjusts the sling keeper
to form a 2-inch loop next to the upper sling swivel. As soon as he has prepared the
loop, he returns to Order Arms.
d. When all stackmen have returned to Order Arms, the leader commands,
ITUNGKOD, TA. On the command TA, each stackman places his rifle directly in front of
and centered on his body with the sling facing the front. The heel of the rifle’s butt is on
the marching surface in line with the toes of his shoes. He grasps the rifle by the
handguard with his left hand. The first two fingers of the left hand hold the inner part of
the loop against the rifle. He reaches across the front of the rifle with the right hand,
grasps the outer part of the loop, and holds it open for the insertion of the other rifles.
He holds the rifle vertical at all times.
e. On the command TA, the men to the left and right of the stackman
perform the following movements simultaneously:

1) The man to the left of the stackman raises and centers his rifle in
front of his body so that his right hand is shoulder high and the rifle is about four inches
from his chest, with the sling to the front. He then grasps the rifle with his left hand at
the small of the stock and lowers both arms, holding the weapon in a horizontal position.
2) The man to the right of the stackman raises and centers his rifle,
wrist shoulder high, with the sling facing the front. He then grasps the rifle with the left
hand directly below his right hand, and, in the most convenient manner, grasps the rifle
with the right hand at the small of stock. He then lowers both arms, holding the rifle in
horizontal position.
3) As soon as both men have completed these movements, each

moves the foot nearest the stackman 18 inches (half left or right) toward the stackman.
In continuing motion, the man to the left of the stackman inserts the muzzle of his rifle in
the loop held by the stackman until the bayonet stud protrudes past the far end of the

loop. He holds his rifle in that position until the man to the right of the stackman inserts
the muzzle of his rifle through the loop in the same manner and above the muzzle of the
rifle of the left man.
4) When both rifles have been inserted into the loop, the men on each
side of the stackman swing the butts of their rifles up and down to the marching surface
until the stack is tight with the (two) rifle butts in line and about two feet from the
baseline.
5) After necessary adjustments have been made, the three men

execute Attention.

f. Extra rifles are passed on to the nearest stack on the right. As each rifle is
passed, it is grasped at the upper part of the handguard with the right hand. Then, with
the rifle held vertically, it is passed with fully extended arm to the right front. The man on
the right grasps the rifle at the balance with his left hand, brings the rifle to the center of
his body, and regrasps it at the upper part of the handguard with his right hand. This
action continues until the stackman receives the rifle and places it on the stack with his
right hand nearly vertical as possible. He places the rifles on the stack with the slings
away from the stack (if the second squad is the stack squad, extra rifles are passed to
the left).
g. To take arms, the leader commands DAMPOT, TA.
1) On the command TA, the stackman passes each extra rifle toward
its bearer. The rifles are handled in the manner described for passing them to the stack
(left hand at the balance, right hand at the upper part of the handguard). As the men
receive their rifles, they come to Order Arms.
2) After all extra rifles have been returned, the stackman grasps the
base of the rifles, holding the loop open as in Stack Arms. The men to the right and left
of the stackman take one step to their left and right fronts, respectively. They reach
down, grasp their rifles, and bring the rifles to a horizontal position. The man to the right
of the stackman frees his rifle from the stack first. Each man returns to Order Arms after
unsling arms and retrieves his rifle. He does this by guiding and steadying the rifle with
his left hand (as in the next to the last count of Order Arms).
3) The stackman adjusts the sling of his rifle before returning to Order
Arms.
4.9 REST WITH THE LEFT SHOULDER ARMS

a. From Port Arms, the command is SA KALIWANG BALIKAT, TA.
b. At the command TA, release the grip of your left hand on the rifle, and
with your right hand still grasping the small of the stock, place the rifle on your left
shoulder, barrel up. At the same time, grasp the butt with your left hand, heel of the butt
between the first and second fingers, thumb and fingers closed on the stock, left
forearm horizontal, and left elbow against your side. Drop your right hand quickly to the
side.
c. Left Shoulder Arms may also be ordered when rifles are at the Order,
Right Shoulder or Present. On the command TA, execute Port Arms and continue in
cadence to the Left Shoulder.
d. Left Shoulder Arms from Right Shoulder Arms is a four-count movement.

The command is SA KALIWANG BALIKAT, TA. On the command of execution TA,
execute the first count in the same manner as executing Order Arms. On count two,
remove the right hand from the butt of the rifle and regrasp the small of the stock (Port
Arms). Counts three and four are the same movements with Port Arms. When
marching, the command is given as the left foot strikes the marching surface.
4.10 TRAIL ARMS
a. From Order Arms, the command is BITBIT, TA. On the command TA,
raise your rifle approximately 2 inches off the ground and incline the muzzle forward so
that the barrel makes an angle of about 15 degrees vertical. Hold your right arm slightly
bent. Hold your rifle in the upper handguard. Assume that you are at trail arms and you
receive the command, BABA, TA. On the command of execution, TA, gently and
quietly lower the butt of the rifle to the deck and assume the position of Order Arms.

b. To March with the Rifle at Trail Arms
Facing movements, alignments, and short distance marching movements are

executed from Order Arms. Side steps, back steps, open and close ranks, and close
and extend are short distance movements. Forward March may be given from Order
Arms to march units forward for a short distance. When these movements are
commanded while at Order Arms, it is necessary to come automatically to Trail Arms on
the command of execution for the movement. The rifle is kept at the trail during the
movement, and the position of Order Arms is automatically assumed without command
after halting.
4.11 SLING ARMS
a. From Order Arms with the sling(s) loose, the command for Sling Arms is
ISAKBAT, TA. On the command of execution TA, grasp the rifle barrel with the right
hand and raise it vertically. Grasp the sling near the upper sling swivel with the left
hand, and release the right hand. Place the right hand and arm between the sling and
rifle and place the sling over the right shoulder. Regrasp the sling with the right hand so
that the wrist is straight, the right forearm is horizontal, the elbow is tight against the
side, and the rifle is vertical. Release the grasp of the left hand and move it sharply to
the left side as in the position of attention.
b. From Order Arms with sling(s) tight, the command is ISAKBAT, TA. On
the command of execution TA, grasp the rifle’s barrel with the right hand and raise the
rifle vertically. With the left hand, place the rifle’s butt on the right hip, cradle the rifle in
the crook of the right arm, and use both hands to adjust the sling. Grasp the sling with
the left hand near the upper sling swivel and execute Sling Arms.

c. To return the rifle to Order Arms with the sling tight, the command is
AYUSIN ANG SAKBAT. On the command AYUSIN ANG SAKBAT, remove the rifle
barrel with the right hand and raise it vertically. With the left hand, place the butt of the
rifle on the right hip and cradle it in the crook of the right arm. Use both hands to tighten
the sling on the ejection port side. Grasp the rifle barrel with the right hand and guide
the rifle to the position of Order Arms.
d. To return the rifle to Order Arms with the sling loose, the command is
LIHIS, SANDATA. On the command of execution TA, reach across the body with the
left hand and grasp the sling at the right shoulder. Release the right hand grasp of the
sling and remove the rifle from the shoulder. Grasp the rifle’s barrel with the right hand,
release the left hand grasp of the sling, and guide the rifle to the position Order Arms.
e. Port Arms from Sling Arms
The command for this movement is AGAP, TA. On the command of

execution TA, reach across the body with the left hand and grasp the sling at the
shoulder. Lift the weapon (by the sling), swing it to the front of the body, and grasp the
small of the stock with the right hand. Release the sling (left hand) and regrasp the
weapon at the balance. Ensure that the rifle is four inches from the belt and held
diagonally across the body. Keep the elbows in at the sides, and the right forearm
horizontal. To resume Sling Arms, the command is ISAKBAT, TA. On the command of
execution TA, grasp the sling near the upper sling swivel with the left hand. Release the
right hand and swing the rifle back onto the shoulder by placing the right arm between
the sling and the rifle. Immediately resume the position of Sling Arms.
f. Inspection Arms from Sling Arms
The command for this movement is SIYASAT, TA. On the command of

execution TA, execute Port Arms and then execute counts Three through Seven in the
same manner as for Inspection Arms from Order Arms. AGAP, TA is executed in the
same manner as explained in the manual of arms. To resume Sling Arms, the
procedures are the same as those of Port Arms.
g. Salute at Sling Arms
To salute while at Sling Arms, the command is TANGHAL, TA. On the

command of execution TA, reach across the body with the left hand and grasp the sling
just above the right hand. Release the right hand and execute the hand salute.
To terminate the hand salute, the command is BABA, TA. On the

command of execution TA, lower the right hand sharply to the side as in the position of
Attention and then regrasp the sling at the original position. After grasping the sling with
the right hand, release the left hand and return it sharply to the left side as in the

MANUAL FOR PISTOL
4.12 GENERAL RULES
a. The movements described here differ in purpose from those of the manual
of arms of the rifle since these are not designed to be executed in exact unison, there
being, with only a few exceptions, no real necessity for their simultaneous execution.
They are not, therefore, planned as disciplinary drill to be executed in cadence with
snap and precision, but merely as simple, quick and safe methods of handling the pistol.
b. In general, movements begin and end at the position of Raise Pistol.
c. Officers and enlisted persons armed with the pistol remain at the position
of attention during the manual of arms, but render the hand salute at the command
TANGHAL, TA.
4.13 MOVEMENTS OF THE PISTOL MANUAL
a. Raise pistol
Unbutton the flap of the holster with the right hand and grasp the butt.
Draw the pistol from the holster, raise it, muzzle up, the thumb and the last three fingers
holding the bolt, the forefinger extended outside the trigger guard, the barrel of the pistol
to the rear and inclined to the front at an angle of 30 degrees, and the hand as high as
six inches in front of the point of the right shoulder.
b. Withdraw Magazine

Without lowering the right hand, turn the barrel slightly to the right, look at
the pistol, press the magazine catch with the right thumb, and with the left hand, remove
the magazine. Place the magazine between the pistol belt and outer garment.
c. Open Chamber
Withdraw the magazine, if not already withdrawn, and resume the position
of Raise Pistol. Without lowering the right hand, grasp the slide with the thumb and the
first two fingers of the left hand, thumb on the left side of slide and pointing downward
keeping the muzzle elevated, shift the grip of the right hand so that the right thumb
engages the slide stop. Push downward to its full extent and force the slide stop into its
notch with the right thumb without lowering the muzzle of the pistol.
d. Close Chamber

Look into the chamber. If it is not empty, empty it. With the left thumb
press down the slide stop and let the slide go forward. Squeeze the trigger, making sure
that the muzzle is still elevated.
e. Insert Magazine
Without lowering the right hand, turn the barrel to the right, grasp the
magazine with the first two fingers and thumb then withdraw it from the belt and insert in
the pistol. Press the magazine and make sure that it is firmly in place.
f. Load and Lock
If a loaded magazine is not yet in the pistol, insert it without lowering the
right hand, turn the barrel slightly to the left. Grasp the slide with the thumb and fingers
of the left hand (thumb on the right side of the slide and pointing upward). Pull the slide
downward to its full extent. Release the slide and engage the safety lock.

g. Unload
Withdraw the magazine. Open the chamber as previously described.

Glance at the chamber to verify that it is empty. Close the chamber. Take the position of
Raise Pistol and squeeze the trigger. Then, insert an empty magazine.
h. Inspection Arms
The command is, SIYASAT, TA. At the command TA, withdraw the
magazine. Open the chamber, retake the position of Raise Pistol, then, withdraw the
magazine and hold it in the open left hand at the height of the belt. After the pistol has
been inspected or at the command AGAP, TA, close the chamber. Take the position of
Raise Pistol, and squeeze the trigger, make sure that the muzzle is still elevated. Insert
an empty magazine and execute return pistol.

i. Return Pistol
The command is BALIK, TA. At the command, BALIK, lower the pistol to
the holster and muzzle down. Raise the flap of the holster with the right thumb; insert
the pistol in the holster and thrust it home. Button the flap of the holster with the right
hand. At the command TA, execute the position of Attention.

MANUAL FOR SWORD
4.14 GENERAL
a. The sword is worn by officers, cadet officers, officer candidates and

student officers while participating in ceremonies with troops under arms, or as directed.
It is carried on the left side of the body attached to a sword strap.
b. Command of execution for sword drill is KALIS (i.e. TANGHAL KALIS)

while for the troops with arms is TA (i.e. TANGHAL, TA)
NOMENCLATURE
PICTURE OF AN ACTUAL SWORD

4.15 GENERAL RULES
a. The sword shall be drawn with armed troops or in command of a unit.
b. Carry sword is assumed when:
1) Giving commands to include preparatory commands
2) Changing position in formation at quick time
3) Addressing or being addressed by a senior
4) Marching at quick time
5) Any manual of arms movement has been ordered, except Parade
6) Rest, At Ease, Rest, Present Arms, Order Arms, or Eyes Right

(Left)
c. Present sword is assumed when:
1) Saluting with the sword
2) The unit is presented to the Colors or to any person, or when the

National Anthem, To the Color or Retreat is played.
3) Executing Eyes Right (Left) when marching past a reviewing officer

or stand. In the interior of a formation, remain at carry position.
d. While marching with the sword at the carry position, the arms should
swing naturally. Do not hold the scabbard or sling.
e. While marching at double time, hold the sword diagonally across the
chest. Hold the scabbard with the left hand just below the frog stud.
f. The sword must always be worn correctly attached to a white sword strap
with the breastplate and the strap fastened by a white belt or sash.
4.16 DRAW SWORD
a. On the preparatory command, ANTABAY BUNOT, grasp the scabbard

and rotate 180 degrees clockwise with the scabbard still parallel with your foot. At the
same time, grasp the grip of the sword with the right hand and pull the sword about 10
inches from the scabbard. The right forearm should now be roughly parallel to the
ground with the left hand still holding the scabbard against the side.

b. On the command of execution KALIS, draw the sword smartly out of the
scabbard and raise the right arm to its full extent, directly to the front, blade at an angle
of 45 degrees, sword in a straight line with arm. Verify the tip of the sword against the
shoulder seam, blade vertical, releasing the left hand from the scabbard with the last
count.
4.17 CARRY SWORD
At the position of carry sword, the sword is held by the right hand, the blade
vertical, the right arm nearly extended, the thumb and forefinger embracing the lower
part of the grip, thumb along the trouser, with fingers joined holding the grip. The front of
the blade rests inside the point of the shoulder and not along the arm.
4.18 PRESENT SWORD FROM ORDER SWORD/CARRY SWORD
a. Executed only when halted at Order or Carry Sword.
b. On the preparatory command, TANGHAL, raise the right hand smartly to

the level of your neck about a fist away from your chin, keep the thumb on the left side

of the grip, wrist straight, elbow against the body and the blade of the sword inclined at
a 30 degree angle.
c. On the command of execution, TA, vertically lower the sword seeing to it

that the blade is parallel to your body, then lower the point down smartly to a position
about 3 inches above the ground. Straighten the right arm while the thumb remains on
the left side of the grip. The tip of the sword should be held directly forward.
PRESENT SWORD
4.19 ORDER SWORD FROM PRESENT SWORD
a. The command is BABA, TA. This is a one-count movement.
b. On the command of execution, TA, turn the true edge down. In this
position, the right arm hangs naturally, thumb along the trouser seam. The blade is
inclined down and forward, with the tip 3 inches above the ground.
ORDER SWORD

4.20 CARRY SWORD FROM ORDER SWORD
a. The command is HANDA DALA, KALIS.
b. On the preparatory command HANDA DALA, twist the sword counter-

clockwise letting the flat side of the sword face front.
c. At the command of execution KALIS, bring up the sword to the position of

Carry Sword using the action of your fingers only.
CARRY SWORD
4.21 REST WITH THE SWORD
a. Parade Rest
1) Executed normally from Order Sword. If executed from Carry

Sword execute Order Sword first before going to Parade Rest.
2) If executed from Order Sword it is a one-count movement. On the

command of execution, PAHINGA, move the left foot and arm as executed when armed
with the riffle.
3) On the command of execution, HUMANDA, assume the position of

Attention, at the position of Order Sword.
4) If executed from Carry Sword, it will be a two-count movement. The

first count shall be to execute order sword followed by the execution of TIKAS,
PAHINGA.

TIKAS PAHINGA
b. Rest and At Ease
1) The command PALUWAG is given only from the position of Parade

Rest.
2) At the command of execution, PALUWAG, the tip of the sword is

brought to the left side horizontal to the ground and is simultaneously received by the
left hand. Both the right hand and left hand are fully extended at this position. The
shoulder may move, however, soldier must remain standing and silent with his right foot
in place.
3) Rest may be executed from At Ease. At the command PAHINGA,

the cadet may move and talk but his right foot should remain in place.
4) On the preparatory command, PULUTONG (BALANGAY), resume

the position of Parade Rest. On the command of execution, assume the position of
Attention, at Order Sword.
4.22 RETURN SWORD
a. The command is ANTABAY SALONG, KALIS.
b. It is executed from carry sword.
c. On the preparatory command, ANTABAY SALONG, raise the right hand

to a position a fist away from and in front of and on line with your left shoulder. The
blade of the sword must be perpendicular to the ground.
d. At the command of execution, KALIS, the sword is rotated 270 degrees

counter-clockwise towards the front then fully extending the right hand towards the front
and simultaneously placing and catching the tip of the sword at the throat of the
scabbard.

e. At the command SAKSAK, sheathe the sword to a point only where the
right forearm holding the sword is parallel to the ground and the left hand holding the
scabbard toward the side.
f. At the command BABA, push the sword smartly down on, and release the
grip of the sword with the right hand so that it pulls and slides all the way down into
scabbard. In the same position, return the right hand to the right side. Release the
scabbard with the left hand and return it to the left side, assuming the position of
Attention.
RETURN SWORD
4.23 INSPECTION ARMS
a. The command is SIYASAT KALIS.
b. When an inspecting officer approaches a soldier for inspection, the first

execution is Carry Sword. From Carry Sword raise your right hand smartly to a position
a fist away from and in front of and in line with your left shoulder keeping the blade of
the sword vertical.
c. On the second count, bring the sword to the right side, keeping your right
upper arm as close as possible to the body, holding the sword vertical to the ground
with the guard of the sword in line with the shoulder.
d. After the inspection, bring the sword to the position of Carry Sword.

4.24 EYES RIGHT WHILE MARCHING
a. The command HANDA TINGIN SA KANAN, NA is executed while

marching at Carry Sword.
b. The command HANDA is given as the left foot strikes the marching
surface (no action is taken). The second time the left foot strikes the marching surface
the command TINGIN SA KANAN is given and the sword is brought to the position of
Present Arms.
c. As the right foot strikes the marching surface the sword is brought down
vertically to the level of the waist holding it parallel to the body.
d. As the left foot strikes the surface the third time the command of execution
NA is given, bring the sword down in the last count of Present Arms.
e. As the right foot strikes the ground, pull the right hand back as in swinging
of arms and simultaneously turn the head sharply to the right at a 45 degree angle.
f. While marching at eyes right, the right arm is swung naturally nine (9)
inches to the front and six (6) inches to the rear from the seam in a vertical plane flexing
the wrist to keep the tip of the blade level above the marching surface. This requires
extending the wrist forward and elevating the wrist rearward.
g. The command HANDA, HARAP is executed as follows:
1) The command HANDA is given as the right foot strikes the

marching surface (no action is taken).
2) The second time the right foot strikes the marching surface the
command, HARAP is given (still no action is taken).
3) As the left foot strikes the ground the sword is turned to the order
position while maintaining the arm swing and simultaneously turning the head sharply to
the front.
4) And finally, as your right foot strikes the ground, return the sword to
the carry position.

4.25 PORT ARMS
a. Port Arms is executed on the preparatory command SIGLANG

HAKBANG, of the command SIGLANG HAKBANG, KAD.
b. This position is assumed only from the position of carry sword.
c. The right arm swings naturally across and six inches in front of the body.
d. The sword is centered 45 degrees vertically with the ground pointed to the
left. The left hand grasps the scabbard.

SECTION V
SQUAD DRILL
“The [soldiers] must learn to keep their ranks, to obey words of command, and signals by drum
and trumpet, and to observe good order, whether they halt, advance, retreat, are upon a march,
or engaged with an enemy.” – Niccolo Machiavelli
Formations and Movements
5.1 GENERAL
a. Individual drill movement and the manual of arms are executed (as
previously prescribed) while performing as squad member/s.
b. The squad has four prescribed formations, the line, the column, the
abreast and the file (see illustration).
c. When the squad is in line, squad members are numbered from the left;
when in column, from front to rear.
d. The squad normally marches in column, but for short distances only, it
may march in line.
e. When the squad drills as a separate unit, the squad leader carries his
weapon at sling arms. When the squad is in line formation, the squad leader assumes a
post three steps in front of and centered on a squad; when in a column or columns of
twos, three steps to the left and centered on the squad.
f. If the squad is a part of a larger unit (which is a platoon), the first squad
leader shall take his post on the left side of the platoon sergeant/guide, the second
squad leader shall cover the first squad leader in the same manner as the third squad
Part I / Section V: Squad Drill 59

leader covers the second squad leader. The squad elements, in line formation, shall
take their posts to the left of their respective squad leaders.
5.2 FORMING THE SQUAD
a. The squad normally forms in line formation; however, it may reform in

column when each member can identify his exact position (equipment grounded) in the
formation.
1) To form a normal interval, the squad leader commands HUMANAY.

Coming to position of attention and giving of command TILAP HUMANAY occur
simultaneously.
a) Elements proceed to their respective positions in Port Arms

(AGAP) and in double time.
b) The right flank man positions himself so that when the squad
is formed, it is three steps in front of and centered on the squad leader.
c) The right flank man comes to the position of attention and

raises his left arm laterally at shoulder level, elbow locked, fingers and thumb extended
and joined, palm facing down. He must ensure that the left arm is in line with his body.
d) The man nearer the left of the right flank man comes to the
position of Attention, turns his head and eyes to the right, and raises his left arm in the
same manner as the right flank man. He obtains proper alignment by taking short steps
forward or backward until he is in line with the right flank man. He obtains exact internal
position by taking short steps to the left or right until his shoulder touches the extended
fingertips of the right flank man. As soon as the man to the left obtains normal interval,
each man individually lowers his arm to his side, sharply turns his head and eyes to the
front and assumes the position of attention.
e) The right flank man then sharply turns to the position of

attention.
f) All other members of the squad shall form in the same
manner except the left flank man who does not raise his left arm.
NOTE: The right flank man raises his arm and looks straight to the front unless the squad is to align on
an element to his right.
2) To form at close interval, the formation is completed in the manner

prescribed for normal interval, except that the command is MASINSIN PAGITAN,
HUMANAY. The squad member obtains close interval by placing the palm of his left
hand on the left hip, positioned even with the waist, fingers and thumb joined and
extended downward, with the elbow in line with the body and touching the arm of the
man to the left.

3) To form in column, the squad leader faces the proposed flank of the
column and commands SUNURAN, HUMANAY. On the command of execution
HUMANAY, squad members double time to their original positions (grounded
equipment) in formation and cover the man to their front.
b. When under arms, members fall in at Port Arms. When in position, they
come to Order Arms. For safety, the commands SIYASAT, TA, AGAP, TA and BABA,
TA are given at the initial formation of the day.
5.3 COUNTING OFF
a. The squad may count off in line or column formation. The command is
ISAHANG BILANG, NA.
b. When the squad is in a line formation, the counting is executed from right
to left. The command shall be ISAHANG BILANG, NA. On the preparatory command,
each member, except the right flank man, turns his head 45 degrees to the right. At the
command of execution NA, the right flank man counts off “ISA”, followed by the second
man counting off his number “DALAWA”. The second man shall simultaneously turn
his head to the front. All the other members shall execute count off consecutively in the
same manner until the entire squad has counted off. The last man will shout “HULING
BILANG NA PO” after counting off.
c. When the squad is in column formation, the counting is executed from

front to rear. On the command of execution NA, the soldier at the head of column turns
his head and eyes to the right and counts over his shoulder, "ISA". After counting off his
number, he immediately comes to the position of attention. All other members count
their numbers in sequence in the same manner as the number one man; the last man in
the file does not turn his head and eyes to the right.
5.4 CHANGING INTERVAL WHILE IN LINE
NOTE: To ensure that each member understands the number of steps to be taken, the squad leader
shall command, ISAHANG BILANG, NA before giving any command that may cause the squad to
change interval. Members do not raise their arms when changing interval.
a. To obtain close interval from normal interval, the command is MASINSIN

PAGITAN, TUNTON KANAN, NA. On the command of execution NA, the right flank
man stands fast. Everybody should place palm on hips, fingers joined and pointing
downward, with elbow aligned with the body. All men except the number one man turn
their head 45 degrees to the right and simultaneously execute right side step in a brisk
manner. Once the elements are aligned, the squad leader commands HANDA, RAP.
NOTE: The squad leader takes the correct number of steps to maintain his position of three steps in front
of and centered on the squad.

b. To obtain normal interval from close interval, the command is TUNTON
KANAN, NA. On the command of execution NA, the right flank man stands fast.
Everybody should extend left arm, fingers joined and palms facing downward. All men
to the left of the number one man turn their heads 45 degrees to the right and
simultaneously execute left side step in a brisk manner. Once the elements are aligned,
the squad leader commands HANDA, RAP.
c. To obtain double interval from normal interval, the command is IBAYONG

DALANG, NA. On the command of execution NA, the right flank man stands fast and
raises his left arm. All men to the left of the number one man turn their heads 45
degrees to the right, simultaneously raising both arms. The last man extends his right
arm only. Everybody except the right flank man executes left side step in a brisk
manner. Once the elements are aligned, the squad leader commands HANDA, RAP.
d. To obtain normal interval from double interval, the command is TUNTON

KANAN, NA. On the command of execution NA, the right flank man stands fast and
raises his left arm. All men to the left of the number one man turn their head 45 degrees
to the right, simultaneously raising their left arms except for the last man, then execute
right side step in a brisk manner. Once the elements are aligned, the squad leader
commands HANDA, RAP.
5.5 ALIGNING THE SQUAD
NOTE: The squad leader commands the squad the appropriate interval prior to the giving of the
command for alignment.
a. To align the squad at a normal interval, the commands are TUNTON SA

KANAN, NA, and HANDA, RAP. These commands are given only when armed soldiers
are at Order Arms or Sling Arms. On the command of execution NA, the right flank man
stands fast and raises his left arm laterally at shoulder level. Simultaneously, other
elements to the left of the right flank man extend their left arms laterally at shoulder
level, elbows locked, fingers and thumbs extended and joined, palms facing down.
Likewise, they will turn their heads 45 degrees to the right and align, ensuring that their
left arm is aligned with their body. They align themselves by short steps right or left and
forward or backward until their right shoulders touch the fingertip of the man on their
right. On the command of execution RAP, each member returns sharply to the position
of attention.
NOTE: If the squad leader wants exact alignment, on the command of execution NA, he faces to the half
left marching and marches by the most direct route to a position on line with the squad, halts one step
from the right flank man, and faces down the line. From his position he verifies the alignment of the
squad, directing the men to move forward or backward, as necessary, calling them by name or number:
"Private Cruz, Forward two inches; Number eight backward four inches". The squad leader remains at
attention, taking short steps to the right or left as necessary to see the squad. Having aligned the squad,
he centers himself on the right flank man by taking short steps to the left or right. Perpendicular to the
formation, he faces to the left, and commands HANDA, RAP. These procedures also apply when aligning
the squad at close or double interval.

b. To align the squad at close interval, the commands are MASINSIN
PAGITAN TUNTON SA KANAN and HANDA, RAP. The movement is executed in the
same manner prescribed for alignment at normal interval except that the squad
members obtain close interval.
c. To align the squad at double interval, the commands are, IBAYONG

DALANG, TUNTON SA KANAN, NA and HANDA, RAP. These commands are given
only when the troops are unarmed or at Sling Arms. On the command of execution NA,
each member (except the right flank man) turns his head to the right and aligns himself
with the man on his right. At the same time, each member (except the right and left flank
men) extends both arms and positions himself by short steps right or left until his
fingertips are touching the fingertips of the members on his right and left. (The right
flank man raises his left arm; the left flank man raises his right arm.)
d. To align the squad in column, the command is TUNTON-HARAP. On the

command TUNTON-HARAP, each member (except the number one man) raises his left
arm to a horizontal position, elbow locked, fingers and thumb extended and joined, palm
facing down, and obtains an arm's length plus about six inches (from the fingertips) to
the back of the man to his front. At the same time, each man aligns himself directly
behind the man to his front. To resume the position of Attention, the command MULING
TUMAKIP (RECOVER) is given. On this command, each member sharply returns to the
position of attention.
5.6 MARCHING THE SQUAD
a. For short distances only, the squad may march forward while in line
formation.
b. When marching long distances, the squad is marched in column.
c. To form a column formation from a line formation, the command is

HARAP SA KANAN, RAP.
d. When a column formation is originated from a line formation at close

interval, the squad may march for the short distances at half step less than the correct
distance. To obtain correct distance while marching, the command is PADALANG
KAD. On the command of execution KAD, the number one man takes one more 15-
inch step and then steps off with a 30-inch step. Each squad member begins marching
with a 30-inch step at an approximate point where the number one man steps off, or as
soon as correct distance has been obtained.
5.7 CHANGING THE DIRECTION OF A COLUMN
a. From the halt, the command to start the squad in motion and
simultaneously change the direction of the march by 90 or 45 degrees is LIKO SA
KANAN (KALIWA), KAD or LIKO HATING KANAN (KALIWA). As the command of

execution KAD is given, the lead man faces in the commanded direction and steps off,
marching. All other members march forward and pivot on the ball of the lead foot in the
commanded direction and step off trailing foot. As the members approach the pivot
point, they shorten or lengthen their steps as necessary to pivot at the approximate
point that the lead man pivoted.
b. To change the direction of the march by 90 or 45 degrees when marching,

the preparatory command LIKO SA KANAN (KALIWA) or LIKO HATING KANAN
(HATING KALIWA) is given as the foot in the desired direction strikes the marching
surface. The command of execution KAD is given the next time the foot in the desired
direction strikes the marching surface. On the command of execution KAD, the lead
man takes one additional step, pivots in the commanded direction as the pivot foot
strikes the marching surface, and continues to march in the new direction. Other
members continue to march forward and execute the pivot as prescribed from the halt.
c. To march in the opposite direction, the command is PABALIK, KAD. The

preparatory command PABALIK is given as the right foot strikes the marching surface.
The command of execution KAD is given the next time the right foot strikes the
marching surface. On the command of execution, all members take one more step with
their left foot, pivot on the balls of both feet, turn 180 degrees to the right, and step off in
the new direction. The arms are not allowed to swing outward while turning.
d. To avoid an obstacle in the line of march, the squad leader directs,

PAGAWING KANAN (KALIWA). The lead man inclines around the obstacle and
resumes the original direction. All other members follow the lead man.
5.8 MARCHING TO THE FLANK
a. The squad may be marched to the flank (for short distance only) when
marching in column.
b. The command for this movement is KANANG (KALIWANG) PANIG,

KAD. The preparatory command is given as the foot in the desired direction strikes the
marching surface, and the command of execution is given the next time the foot in the
desired direction strikes the marching surface. On the command of execution KAD, all
members take one more step, pivot 90 degrees in the commanded direction on the ball
of the lead foot, and step off in the new direction with the trailing foot. As the members
begin to march in the new direction, they glance to the right.
5.9 FORMING COLUMNS OF TWOS AND REFORMING
a. Forming of twos from a file is executed only from the halt. The command
is DALAWANG TUDLING PAKANAN (PAKALIWA), KAD. On the preparatory
command, the lead team leader commands MANATILI/WALANG KILOS. The trailing
team leader commands LIKO HATING KANAN (KALIWA). On the command of
execution KAD, the trailing team leader executes a LIKO HATING KANAN (KALIWA),

inclines to the left or right when the correct interval is obtained, and commands
PATAKDA, KAD and PANGKAT, TO so as to halt abreast of lead team leader.
b. Forming a file from columns of twos is executed only from halt. The
command is HARAP SA KANAN, RAP and SUNURAN MULA SA KALIWA, KAD. On
the command execution RAP, both teams face right. On the preparatory command
SUNURAN MULA SA KALIWA, the lead team leader commands PASULONG. The
trailing team leader commands MANATILI. On the command of execution KAD, the
lead team marches forward. The trailing team leader commands LIKO HATING
KALIWA, KAD. The team then marches in half step. When the last man of the lead
team is abreast of the team leader, he commands LIKO HATING KANAN, KAD. His
team then follows the lead team at the correct distance.
5.10 RESTING THE SQUAD
a. The squad member in formation executes the rest formation.
b. When the situation warrants a greater degree of relaxation than the rest
position, the squad leader may command TIWALAG. Squad members may leave their
position in formation, but they must remain in immediate areas. The command
TIWALAG will not be used to terminate a formation.
5.11 DISMISSING THE SQUAD
a. The squad is dismissed with the members at attention.
b. With armed troops, the commands are SIYASAT, TA, AGAP, TA; IBABA
(ISAKBAT), TA; and LUMANSAG.
c. With unarmed troops, the command is LUMANSAG.
d. Unless otherwise stated (by the person in charge in his instructions prior
to the command LUMANSAG), the command LUMANSAG terminates only the
formation not the duty of the day.

Stack and Take Arms
5.12 GENERAL
a. The squad members execute ITUNGKOD SANDATA from their positions

in line formation (at normal interval) from Order Arms.
NOTE: When the squad is part of a larger unit, Stack Arms may be executed in column formation (when
the formation consists of three or more files and squads are not in normal interval). Second or third squad
is designated as the stack squad.
b. When in line formation, the squad leader then commands ISAHANG

BILANG NA and then designates the stack men by number.
5.13 PREPARE SLING
After all stack men are designated, the squad leader commands HANDA and
SAKBAT. On the command of execution SAKBAT, each stack man (or stack squad)
grasps the barrel of his rifle with the right hand and raises the rifle vertically. With his left
hand, he places the rifle butt on his right hip and cradles the rifle in the crook of his right
arm. Using both hands, he adjusts the sling keeper so that there is a 2-inch loop formed
from the sling keeper to the upper sling swivel. As soon as the loop is prepared, he
returns to Order Arms.
5.14 STACK ARMS
a. When the stackmen have returned to Order Arms, the squad leader
commands ITUNGKOD, TA. On the command of execution TA, each stack man grasps
the barrel of his rifle with his right hand and places the rifle directly in front of and
centered on his body with the sights to the rear. The rifle butt is placed on the marching
surface so that the heel of the rifle butt is on the toes of his footgear. The stack man
bends slightly forward at the waist and grasps his rifle with his left hand at the upper
portion of the handguard (keeping the rifle vertical at all time). The first two fingers of the
left hand hold the inner part of the loop against the rifle. The stack man reaches across
the front of the rifle with his right hand, grasps the outer part of the loop and holds it
open for insertion of other rifles.
b. On the command of execution TA, the men to the right and left of the
stack man perform the following movements simultaneously:
1) The man on the stack man's right grasps the barrel of his rifle with
his right hand raises and centers his rifle with the magazine well facing to the front, wrist
held shoulder high, elbow locked. With his left hand, he grasps the handguard
(midway), releases his right hand, and grasps again the rifle at the small portion of the
stock. He lowers both arms with elbows locked (holding the rifle in a horizontal position
with the muzzle to the left and the magazine well to the front).

2) The man on the stack man's left grasps the barrel of his rifle with
his right hand, raises and centers his rifle with the magazine well facing the front, wrist
held shoulder high, elbow locked. With his left hand, he grasps the small portion of the
stock, releases his right hand and grasp again the rifle at the handguard (midway). He
then lowers both arms, with elbows locked (holding the rifle in a horizontal position with
the muzzle to the left and the magazine well to the front.)
c. As soon as the stack man has placed his rifle in position, both men move
their feet nearest (half right or half left) the stackman. The man on the stack man's left
inserts the muzzle of his rifle in the same manner as the other rifle muzzle.
d. Without moving their feet, both stack men swing the butt of their rifles out
and down the marching surface, making the stack tight with the rifle butts in line and
about two feet from the base line. When the stack has been completed, all three men
resume the position at attention.
e. Additional rifles are passed to the nearest stack on the right (right or left is
stacked in column). The men with additional rifle grasp the rifle barrel with the right hand
and raise the rifle vertically with the magazine well to the front, wrist held shoulder high,
elbows locked, and right arm extended to the right. Throughout the pass, the rifle is held
vertically with the magazine well to the front. The man to the left of the stack man then
grasps the rifle midway at the handguard with his left hand. The man passing the
additional rifle then releases the rifle and sharply returns to the position of attention. The
man to the left of the stack man then moves the rifle to the right until it is in the center of
his body, and grasps the rifle barrel with his right hand, wrist held, shoulder high and
elbows locked. He then releases and sharply returns his left hand to the left side as in
the position of attention. He then moves the rifle to his front. The stack man receives the
rifle and centers it in the same manner as previously described. The man to the left of
the stack man sharply returns to the position of Attention after he releases the rifle.
Once he has centered the rifle and grasped the barrel with the right hand, he moves
forward and places the rifle in the stack so as to secure it (without damaging the front
sight assembly). If there are two additional rifles, the second rifle is passed in the same
manner as the first.
5.15 TAKE ARMS
a. To take arms, the command is DAMPOT, TA. On the command of

execution TA, the men return the additional rifle in the same manner as the rifles were
received. The stack man secures the stack and holds the loop in the same manner as
for stacking rifle.
b. The men on the left and right step toward the stackman in the same
manner as when stacking arms. Each man reaches down and regrasps his rifle (one
hand at the small of stock and one hand midway of the handguard) and brings it to

horizontal position. The man on the right frees his rifle first and resumes Order Arms.
The man on the left releases his rifle and resumes Order Arms.
c. The stackman cradles his rifle and adjusts the sling and sling keeper to its
original position and then resumes Order Arms.

SECTION VI
PLATOON DRILL
“If in training soldiers, commands are habitually enforced, the army will be well-disciplined; if
not, its discipline will be bad.” – Sun Tsu, On the Art of War
Formations
6.1 GENERAL
a. Individual drill movements and the manual of arms are executed while
performing as a squad member during the conduct of platoon drill.
b. Platoon drill, for the most part, merely provides the procedures for
executing drill movements in conjunction with other squads formed in the same
formation.
c. The platoon has four prescribed formations: the platoon formation with
squads in line, with squads in column, with squads in file and with squads abreast. (See
illustration)
d. When in a line formation, the elements (squads) of a platoon are

numbered from front to rear; in column formation, from left to right.
e. During all drill and ceremonies, the platoon leader and platoon sergeant
carry their rifle at Sling Arms. When the platoon drills as part of a larger unit, the platoon
leader and platoon sergeant remain at sling during all manual of arms movements
except when executing the hand salute while at sling arms.
f. When the platoon drills as a separate unit, in a line formation, the post for
the platoon leader is six steps in front of and centered on the platoon. When in a column
Part I / Section VI: Platoon Drill 69

formation, the platoon leader is six steps on the left flank of and centered on the
platoon.
g. When the platoon leader commands PABUKANG TALUDTOD;

PAURONG HAKBANG PAKALIWA (PAKANAN), KAD; PASULONG, KAD or causes
the platoon to change interval, he moves at the same time (with the appropriate step) so
as to maintain proper position.
h. When the platoon drills as part of a larger unit in line formation, the post
for the platoon leader is six steps in front of and centered on the platoon. In a column
formation, the platoon leader is at correct distance (one arm's length plus 6 inches) in
front of and centered between the second and third squad leaders. When assuming his
post in column from a line formation, the platoon leader faces to the right while
marching (on command of execution RAP) and marches in the most direct route to his
post, halts perpendicular to the formation, and faces to the right. When in column
formation (company) and the command DALAWANG TUDLING PAKANAN is given,
the platoon leader faces to the right marching, repositions himself in front of and
centered between the squad leader of the third and fourth squads, halts, and faces to
the left. When the unit re-forms into columns of fours, he faces to the left marching and
resumes his original position in the column.
i. When the platoon drills as a separate unit, in line formation, the post for
the platoon sergeant is centered on the platoon at correct distance (one step) to the rear
of the last rank. On the command PABUKANG TALUDTOD, KAD; PAURONG, KAD;
the platoon changes interval in line, and the platoon sergeant moves at the same time
(with the appropriate step) so as to maintain proper position. If a file or columns of twos
is formed, he remains in position until the last file passed, faces to the half left (half
right) in marching, and continues marching, positioning himself behind the last man in
the file or in columns of twos, at the correct distance to the rear of and centered
between the two squad. When re-forming into columns of fours, the platoon sergeant
follows the rear elements and resumes his post in the column when the element has
halted.
j. When the platoon drills as part of a larger formation, in line formation, the
platoon sergeant's post is one step to the rear of and centered on the platoon. In a
column formation, the platoon sergeant is one step behind and centered between the
second and third squads. When assuming his post in column from line formation the
platoon sergeant faces to the left while marching (on the command of execution RAP)
and marches in the most direct route to his post, halts centered on the platoon, and
faces to the left. When the platoon is in column formation (company) and the command
of Column of Twos from the left is given, the platoon sergeant faces to the right
marching, repositions himself behind and centered between the third and fourth squads,
halts, and faces to the left.
NOTE: When the files (columns) are uneven, the platoon sergeant normally directs the men in longer
files to move to another file to balance the formation; or he may fill the vacancy himself as the last man in
the right file.

k. The leader of the first squad serves as the base when the platoon is in a
line formation. The leader of the fourth squad serves as the base when the platoon is in
column formation.
6.2 FORMING THE PLATOON
a. The platoon normally forms in line formation. However, it may reform in

column when each man can identify his exact position (equipment grounded) in the
formation.
b. The platoon forms basically the same as a squad. The platoon sergeant
assumes the position of attention and commands HUMANAY (AT PASINSING
PAGITAN, HUMANAY or in SUNURAN, HUMANAY). On the command HUMANAY
(AT MASINSIN PAGITAN, HUMANAY), the squad leader obtains the correct distance
by estimation. The members of the first squad fall in on their squad leaders as
prescribed for squad drill. Members of the other squads fall in on their squad leader,
assume the position of attention, and turn their heads and eyes to the right. They obtain
correct distance by taking short steps forward or backward and align themselves on the
man to their right. They then sharply turn their heads and eyes to the front in the
position of attention and obtain proper interval by taking short steps to the left and to the
right to cover on the man to their front. Members of all squads, other than the first
squad, shall not raise their left arms unless the man to their immediate left has no one
to his front in formation on which to cover.
c. When armed, members fall in at order arms. For safety, the commands
SIYASAT TA; AGAP TA; IBABA (ISAKBAT) TA are given at the initial formation of the
day and just before the last command, LUMANSAG.
d. When a report is appropriate, the platoon sergeant commands MAG-

ULAT. The squad leaders, in succession from front to rear, turn their heads and eyes
toward the platoon sergeant and salute (holding the salute until returned) then report.
For example:
1) Situation 1. When all squad members are in formation, the report is

"Lahat po'y narito".
2) Situation 2. When the squad members are absent, the soldiers and
reasons for their absence are reported:
Pvt Dela Cruz - CQ runner

Pvt Campos - Sick Call
Pvt Tamayo - AWOL
e. After receiving the report from the squad leaders, the platoon sergeant
faces about and waits for the arrival of the platoon leader. When the platoon leader has

halted to his post, the platoon sergeant salutes and reports, "Ginoo narito pong lahat"
or "Ginoo, napag-alaman pong lahat"; or "Ginoo___________ ang wala". The
platoon leader returns the salute, after which the platoon sergeant faces to the right
while marching, inclines around the squad leaders, halts at his post and, faces to the
right.
f. If the platoon leader is not present for the formation, the platoon sergeant
steps forward three steps (after receiving the squad leader's report) and assumes the
duties of the platoon leader.
g. When appropriate, the platoon may be formed by the platoon leader rather
than by the platoon sergeant. The procedures are the same as previously described
except that the first squad forms six steps in front of and centered on the platoon leader,
and the platoon sergeant forms at his post to the rear of the platoon.
6.3 BREAKING RANKS
a. When the situation requires one or more individuals to leave the formation
or to receive specific instructions from the platoon leader, the platoon leader directs:
"Private Bautista (pause), Private Tamayo."
b. When the individual's name is called, he assumes the position of attention

and replies, "Narito po”. He then takes one (15-inch) step backward, halts, faces to the
right (left) in marching, and exits the formation by marching to the nearest flank. Once
the individual has cleared the formation, he begins to double time and halts two steps
from the center of the platoon leader.
NOTE: When a group of individuals is called from the formation, the group forms centered on the platoon
leader. The platoon leader shall direct (point) the first man into position so that the rank will be centered
when the last man has joined the group.
6.4 COUNTING OFF
a. The platoon counts off in the same manner as the squad.
b. When in a line formation, the squads count in unison from the right to left;
each squad leader sounds off, "ISA".
6.5 CHANGING INTERVAL
a. The platoon changes interval in line formation in the same manner as the
squad.
b. To change interval when the platoon is in a column, the right file stands
fast and serves as the base. All other members (abreast of each other) execute the
movement as previously prescribed. To obtain close interval from normal interval, the
third squad takes one right step, the second squad takes two right steps, and the first

squad takes three right steps. To obtain normal interval, the procedures are the same
except that the squads execute the same number of left steps.
c. To change the interval when the platoon is marching in column, the

preparatory command MASINSIN PAGITAN is given as the right foot strikes the
marching surface, and the command of execution KAD is given as the right foot strikes
the marching surface. On the command of execution KAD, the base squad (right file)
takes one 13-inch step and then executes the halt step. All other men take one more
step, simultaneously execute a column half right, and march until close interval is
obtained. They execute a column half left and assume the half step when abreast of the
corresponding man of the base squad. On the command PASULONG, KAD, all men
resume marching 30-inch step. The commands PATAKDA, KAD, and PULUTONG, TO
may also be given.
d. To resume the marching at normal interval, the preparatory command

LAKAD PADALANG, KAD is given as the left foot strikes the marching surface, and
the command of execution KAD is given as the right foot strikes the marching surface.
On the command of execution KAD, the platoon members obtain normal interval in the
same manner prescribed for close interval except that they each execute column half
left and then column half right.
e. To obtain double interval from normal interval, the procedures are the
same as that of the close interval to normal interval.
f. To obtain normal interval from double interval (closing the formation

column from open ranks), the procedures are the same as obtaining close interval form
normal interval.
6.6 ALIGNING THE PLATOON
a. The platoon is aligned similar to the squad.
b. On the command of execution NA, the first squad leader stands fast and
serves as the base. Other squad leaders obtain correct distance by estimation. The

members of the first squad execute in the same manner as in squad drill to obtain exact
interval. All other squads execute as the first squad, except that each squad members
raise the left arm only for uniformity, actually covering (glancing out the corner of the left
eye) the man in front.
c. If the platoon leader wants exact alignment, he faces to the half left (half
right) marching and marches (on the command of execution NA) the most direct route
to a position on the line with the first squad, halts one step from the squad leader or left
flank man, and faces down the line. From this position he verifies the alignment of the
first squad, directing the men to move forward or backward as necessary, calling them
by name or number: "Tamayo, taas ng dalawang pulgada; Pangwalo, baba ng apat
na pulgada”. The platoon leader remains at attention, taking short steps to the right or
left as necessary, to see down the squad. Having aligned the first squad, he faces to the
left (right) marching taking 2 (3 if at open ranks) short steps to next squad, halts, faces
down the line and aligns the squad in the same manner. After the last squad is aligned
the platoon leader centers himself on the squad leader by taking short steps left or right,
faces to the right (left) marching, returns to his position (centered on the platoon), halts
perpendicular to the formation, faces to the left (right), and commands HANDA, RAP.
NOTE: When the platoon dresses as part of large formation, all squad leaders glance to their right and
align themselves on the unit to their right. The platoon leader aligns the platoon from the left flank rather
that the right flank when his platoon is not formed as the right flank platoon.
d. To align the platoon in column, the commands are TUMAKIP and HANDA
HARAP. On the command TUMAKIP, the fourth squad leader stands fast and serves
as base. The squad leaders with exemption of the left flank squad leader, raise their
arms laterally and turn their heads and eyes to the right. The members of the fourth
squad raise their left arms horizontally to the front (for uniformity only), cover the man in
their front, and, at the same time, glance out of the corner of their right eyes aligning on
the man to their right. To assume the right position of Attention, the command is
HANDA HARAP. On the command, each member sharply turns to the position of
Attention.
NOTE: When the platoon is aligned in column as part of a larger unit but is not the lead platoon, the
squad leader does not raise his arms or turn his heads and eyes but cover the squad to his front. The
platoon leader must wait until the platoon to his front has commanded MULING TUMAKIP (RECOVER)
before he faces about and gives the command TUMAKIP (COVER).
6.7 OPENING AND CLOSING RANK
a. PABUKANG TALUDTOD, KAD is executed from a line formation while at

halt. It may be executed at any of the prescribed intervals. The commands for these
movements are PABUKANG TALUDTOD, KAD and PASINSING TALUDTOD, KAD.
b. On the command of execution KAD, the front rank takes two steps
forward, the second rank takes one step, the third rank stands fast, and the fourth rank
takes two steps backward. If additional ranks are present, the fifth rank takes four steps
backward, and the sixth rank takes six steps backward.

NOTE: After taking the prescribed steps, the men do not raise their arms. If the platoon leader wants
exact interval or alignment, he commands MASINSIN PAGITAN (AT IBAYONG DALANG), TUNTON SA
KANAN, NA.
c. To close the ranks, the command is PASINSING TALUDTOD, KAD. On

the command of execution KAD, the first rank takes four steps backward, the second
rank takes two steps backward, the third rank stands fast, and the fourth rank takes one
step forward.
d. On the command of execution KAD, the platoon leader and the platoon
sergeant take appropriate number of steps to maintain their post.
6.8 RESTING THE PLATOON
The platoon rests in the same manner prescribed for the squad.
6.9 DISMISSING THE PLATOON
a. The procedure for dismissing the platoon is basically the same as

prescribed for the squad.
b. The platoon leader commands TANDIS NG PULUTONG. The platoon

sergeant faces to the right while marching and inclines around the squad leaders, halts
three steps in front of and centered on the platoon, and faces right. The platoon leader
then commands PAMUNUAN ANG INYONG MGA PULUTONG, and salutes are
exchanged. The platoon leader is no longer part of the formation. The platoon sergeant
takes three steps forward, halts, faces about, and carries out the platoon leader's
instruction.
c. If the platoon sergeant so desires, the squad may be released to control of

the squad leaders. The platoon sergeant commands PAMUNUAN ANG INYONG MGA
TILAP and salutes are exchanged. The platoon sergeant is no longer part of the
formation.
NOTE: Without leaving his position, the squad leader then commands TIWALAG, moves to a position in
the immediate area, and commands HUMANAY. Then, he carries out the previous instructions and/or
gives any instructions for actions before the next duty formation.

Movements
6.10 GENERAL
a. The platoon marches in the same manner as the squad.
b. When marching in line, the first squad leader serves as the guide, and as
the platoon is marching in a column, the fourth squad leader serves as a guide.
c. When marching in line, each member of the squad (glancing out of the
corner of his right eye) maintains alignment on the man to his right. When marching in
column, each member of the first, second, and third squads maintains alignment on his
right.
6.11 EYES RIGHT
a. The platoon renders courtesy during ceremonies or when marching past

the Colors by executing eyes right. The commands for this movement are HANDA
TINGIN SA KANAN, NA and HANDA, RAP.
b. At the halt, all men (on the command of execution, NA), while keeping
their shoulders parallel to the front, turn their heads and eyes to the right at 45-degree
angle. They focus on and follow the person passing to the front until they are again
looking in front, at which time their heads and eyes remain fixed to the front. Only the
platoon leader renders the hand salute.
c. When marching, the preparatory command HANDA TINGIN SA KANAN

is given as the right foot strikes the marching surface and the command of execution
NA is given as the next time the right foot strikes the marching surface. On the
command of execution NA, all men, except the file, turn their heads and eyes to the
right and align themselves on the right file while continuing to march. Men in the right
file do not turn their heads and eyes but continue to look straight to the front and
maintain correct distance. Only the platoon leader salutes. To determine the courtesy,
the preparatory command HANDA is given as the left foot strikes the marching surface,
and the command of execution NA is given the next time the left foot strikes the
marching surface. On the command of execution, the men turn their heads and eyes
sharply to the front and the platoon leader terminates the hand salute.
a. The platoon changes the direction of marching basically the same as the
squad.
b. During a column movement, the base element is the squad on the flank in
the direction of the turn.

c. To change the direction 90 degrees, the command is LIKO SA KANAN,
KAD or (LIKO SA KALIWA, KAD). On the command of execution KAD, the base
squad executes the movement as the squad in the drill except that the squad leader
takes one 30-inch step and then takes up the half step. The squad leader continues
marching with a half step until the other squad leaders are abreast. The other squad
leaders, while maintaining correct (offset) alignment (abreast) with the base squad
leader, take up the half step. When all squad leaders are abreast, they step off with 30-
inch step without command. All other platoon members march forward on the command
of execution and execute the column movement at approximately the same location as
their squad leaders in the same manner.
NOTE: When the platoon leader and the platoon sergeant are marching at their posts in column as part of
a larger formation, they execute a column half right (left) rather than a 90 degrees column movement.
After executing the LIKO HATING KANAN (HATING KALIWA), they continue marching in an arc,
inclines as necessary, and resume their correct positions. After sensing that the squad leaders are
abreast of each other, the platoon leader resumes the 30-inch step. At times, the platoon may find it
necessary to shorten or lengthen the step in order to maintain correct distance from the unit to his front.
d. To change the direction 45 degrees, the command is LIKO HATING

KANAN (HATING KALIWA), KAD. On the command of execution KAD, the platoon
executes the movement in the same manner as a 90-degree turn except that the base
squad leader as well as the other squad leaders executes a Column Half Right (Left).
NOTE: When executing a column movement at double time, elements adjust the length of their steps so
that the interval and the distance are maintained through and beyond the pivot foot.
e. The platoon marches in the opposite direction (PABALIK, KAD) and in

the same manner as the squad.
f. The platoon inclines in the same manner as the squad. The squad nearest
the direction of the turn serves as the base. To avoid an obstacle in the path of the
march, the platoon leader directs PAGAWING KALIWA (KANAN).
g. When space is limited and the platoon leader wants to march his unit in
the opposite direction (reverse), with the squad leaders at the head of their squads, he
commands PABALIK, KAD. On the command of execution KAD (at the halt), the first
squad marches forward three steps, executes a Column Right, marches across the front
of the platoon, and execute another Column Right just beyond the fourth squad. The
second squad steps forward one step, executes a Column Right, marches forward, and
executes another Column Right between the third and the fourth squads. The third
squad executes two short Column Lefts from the halt and marches between the
remainder of the third and second squad. The fourth squad marches forward two steps
executes a column left, marches across the front of the platoon, and executes another
Column Left between the first and second squads.
NOTE: When there are only three squads, the first squad takes two steps before executing right.

h. As the third squad leader marches past the last man in the third squad, he
and his squad begin to march at the half step. After marching past the last man in each
file, all other squads incline to the right and left as necessary, obtain normal interval on
the third squad, and begin to march with the half step. When all squads are abreast of
each other, they begin marching with a 30-inch step without command.
i. During the movement, the platoon leader marches alongside the first
squad, and the platoon sergeant marches one step to the rear and centered between
the second and third squads.
j. When marching, the preparatory SALISIHANG HANAY is given as the left

foot strikes the marching surface and the command of execution KAD is given as the
left foot strikes the marching surface. On the command of execution KAD, the platoon
executes the movement basically the same as from the halt, except that the squad
takes one additional step to ensure that the pivot is in the correct position to execute the
movement.
NOTE: When the platoon leader and the platoon sergeant are marching at their post as part of a larger
formation, the platoon leader takes three steps forward and executes a column right, marches across the
front of the platoon, executes another column right (just beyond fourth squad), marches to his post in the
most direct manner, takes up the half step, and then steps off with a 30-inch step when the squad leaders
come to line. The platoon sergeant incline to the right, follows the third squad until the movement is
completed, and then resumes his post.
6.13 MARCHING TO THE FLANKS
The platoon marches to the flank in the same manner as the squad.
6.14 FORMING A FILE AND REFORMING
a. The platoon forms a single file, from the right, left or as designated, only
when the column is at halt. The commands are SUNURAN MULA SA KALIWA
(KANAN), KAD.
b. On the preparatory command, the squad leader of the designated squad

gives the supplementary command PASULONG. The other squad leaders command
MANATILI. On the command of execution KAD, the lead squad marches forward. The
squad leader next to the lead element (or as designated) looks over the shoulder
nearest the moving element and commands Column Half Left (Right) when the second
from the last man is in line with him. The squad leader gives the command of execution
KAD as the right foot of the last man strikes the marching surface when abreast of him.
On the command of execution, the squad leader executes the Column Half Left (Right),
then inclines without command to the right (left), and follows the last man of the
preceding squad at the correct distance. Other members of the squad march forward
and execute the same movement as the squad leader. The remaining squad forms the
file in the same manner as the squad immediately behind the lead element.

c. The platoon may form a file and execute a column movement
simultaneously from a column formation. The command for this movement is
SUNURAN MULA SA KALIWA (KANAN), LIKO SA KALIWA (KANAN), KAD.
Following the platoon leader's preparatory command, the squad leader of the lead
element commands MANATILI. On the platoon leaders’ command of execution KAD,
the lead squad executes the column left (right). The other squad leaders command
MANATILI. On the platoon leader's command of execution KAD, the lead squad
executes the column left (right). The other squad leaders command LIKO SA KANAN
(KALIWA) at the appropriate time as stated in sub-paragraph b. They give the
command of execution KAD as the right foot strikes the marching surface at the pivot
(column left), or the first time the last man's right foot strikes the marching surface after
the pivot (column right). Although the command is LIKO SA KALIWA (KANAN), the
outside squads (fourth or first) execute Column Half Left (Right).
d. The platoon reforms to the original column formation only from the halt.
The command is APATANG TUDLING PAKANAN (PAKALIWA), KAD.
NOTE: To reform the platoon to its original column formation when file was formed on the command in
sequence___________, KAD, the command TIWALAG and HUMANAY must be given.
On the preparatory command, the squad leader of the base squad commands
MANATILI. All other squad leaders command LIKO HATING-KANAN (KALIWA). On
the platoon leader's command of execution KAD, the base squad stands fast; all other
squads execute the Column Right (Left) simultaneously. As the moving squad leaders
reach a point (line) that ensures correct interval on the element to their left (right), they
automatically incline to the left (right) and command PATAKDA, KAD and TILAP,
HINTO so that their squads are abreast of the base (other) squad as halted.
a. The platoon forms columns of twos from the right or left when in columns
of fours at the halt. The command is DALAWANG TUDLING MULA SA KANAN
(KALIWA), KAD.
b. On the preparatory command, the squad leader of the designated squad

gives the supplementary command PASULONG. The other squad leaders command
MANATILI. On the command of execution KAD, the two lead squads march forward.
The squad leader (second or third) next to the lead element gives the command start
both to the remaining squads in motion. Looking over the shoulder nearest the moving
elements, the squad leader gives the preparatory command LIKO SA KALIWA
(KANAN) when the second from the last man is abreast of him; then gives the
command of execution KAD as the right foot of the last man strikes the marching
surface. On the platoon leaders’ command of execution, both the squad leaders
execute the Column Half Left (Right), incline to the right (left) without command, and
follow the last men of the preceding squads at the correct distance. (Do not close the
space if the files of the two leading squads are not even). Other members of the

remaining squads march forward and execute the same movements as their squad
leaders.
c. The platoon may form a file and execute a column movement

simultaneously from a column formation. The command for this movement is
DALAWANG TUDLING MULA SA KALIWA (KANAN), LIKO SA KALIWA (KANAN),
KAD. The squad leader of the lead squad commands LIKO SA KANAN (KALIWA)
instead of forward. The squad leader of the second (third) squad gives the command
MANATILI. On the platoon leaders’ command of execution KAD, the lead squad
executes Column Left (Right). The other squad leaders command MANATILI. On the
platoon leader's command of execution KAD, the lead squad executes Column Left
(Right). The other squad leader of the second (third looking over the shoulder nearest
the moving elements), gives the preparatory command LIKO SA KALIWA (KANAN)
when the second from the last man is abreast of him, then gives the command of
execution KAD as the right foot of the last man strikes the marching surface at the pivot
(Column Left) or the first time the last man's foot strikes the marching surface after the
pivot (Column Right). Although the command is LIKO SA KALIWA (KANAN), the
outside squads (fourth or first) execute Column Half Left (Right).
d. The platoon reforms to the original column formation only from the halt.
The command is APATANG TUDLING PAKANAN (PAKALIWA), KAD. On the
preparatory command, the squad leaders of the base squad commands TULUYANG
LAKAD. The trailing squad leaders command LIKO HATING-KANAN (KALIWA). On
the platoon leaders’ command of execution KAD, the base squad stands fast. The
trailing squad leaders execute slightly more than the Column Half Right (Left)
simultaneously. As the trailing squad leaders reach a point (line) that will ensure correct
interval on the element to their left (right), they automatically incline to the right (left).
The squad leader nearest the stationary squads (second or third) commands
PATAKDA, KAD and TILAP, TO.

PLATOON FORMATIONS

SECTION VII
COMPANY DRILL
“ The fundamentals of drill are established daily…If these maneuvers are accurately observed
and practiced every day then the army will remain virtually undefeatable and always awe
inspiring…” – Frederick the Great
Procedure and Personnel
7.1 GENERAL
a. Individual drill movements, manual of arms, and squad and platoon drills
are executed (as previously described) while conducting company drill.
b. For the most part, company drill provides the procedure for executing
platoon drill in conducting with other platoons in the same formation.
c. For drill purposes, company headquarters personnel are attached to the

platoon to equalize platoon strength without interfering with the permanent squad
organization. However, the commander may form the headquarters personnel into a
separate platoon at either flank of the company. When the headquarters personnel form
as a separate element, the Senior Sergeant serves as the platoon sergeant, and the
Company Executive Officer serves as the platoon leader.
d. When in a line or mass formation, the right platoon serves as the base;
when in column formation, the lead platoon serves as the base.
e. The First Sergeant assumes the position of Company Commander, if

there are no officers present.
f. When the Company Commander directs the company to open or close

ranks, align, stack or take arms, extend march, close on the leading platoon, or prepare
Part I / Section VII: Company Drill 82

for inspection, the movements are executed on the command of the platoon leaders and
not on the directives of the Company Commander. The platoon leaders command the
movement in sequence beginning from the base platoon.
g. During all drills and ceremonies, the First Sergeants and the Executive
Officer carry their weapons at Sling Arms. They remain at Sling Arms during all Manual
of Arms movements except when they execute the Hand Salute while at Sling Arms.
h. The members of the company break rank in the same manner as in

platoon drill except that the individuals are called from the formation by the commander
rather than by the platoon leader.
i. The company marches, rests, executes eyes right in the same manner as
the platoon.
j. The company has the following prescribed formations: company in line

with platoons in line, company in column with platoons in column, company in column
with platoon (used primarily for ceremonies), and company mass formation. However,
the company may be formed into column of twos in the same manner as the platoon.
7.2 POST FOR KEY PERSONNEL
a. Company Commander
When the company is in line formation or in column with the platoons in line, the
post for the company commander is 12 steps (from the front rank troops) to the front of
and centered on the company. As part of a larger unit, when the company is in column
with the platoons in column and when in mass formation, his post is six steps from the
front rank of the troops to the front of and centered on the company. As a separate unit,
when the company is in column with the platoons in column, his post is 12 steps from
and centered on the left flank.
b. Guidon Bearer
The Guidon Bearer's post is two 15-inch steps to the rear, and two 15-inch steps
to the left of the Company Commander.
NOTE: The Company Commander should inconspicuously direct the Guidon Bearer to remain in position
and move with the commander when the company is to be faced to the right and marched for only a short
distance.
c. Executive Officer
The Executive Officer's post is two 15-inch steps to the rear and two 15-inch
steps to the right of the Company Commander.
d. First Sergeant

When the Company Commander is in line formation, the First Sergeant's post is
three steps to the rear of the last rank and centered on the company. In a column or
mass formation, he is three steps to the rear of the last rank and off center (one 15-inch
step to the left) of the company.

Formation and Movements
7.3 GENERAL
a. The company normally forms in a line formation; however, it may reform in

column when each man can identify his exact position (equipment grounded) in the
formation.
b. The company forms basically the same as the platoon. On the command
HUMANAY (at close interval), the platoons form in line, centered on and facing the
person forming the unit, with five steps interval between platoons.
c. When armed, members fall in at BABA (SAKBAT) TA. For safety, the
person forming the unit commands SIYASAT, TA; AGAP, TA; BABA (SAKBAT) TA at
the initial formation of the day or when the last command is LUMANSAG.
d. The company may be formed by the First Sergeant (platoon sergeants) or

by the Company Commander (platoon leaders). When possible, the platoons assemble
near the formation site before the arrival of the First Sergeant or the Company
Commander. If the company is formed by the non-commissioned officers, the platoon
leaders normally observe the procedure from a position to the rear of their platoons.
1) Forming with non-commissioned officers.
a) When the company is formed by non-commissioned officers,

the First Sergeant posts himself nine steps in front of (center) and facing the line where
the front rank of each platoon is formed. He then commands HUMANAY; (PASINSING
PAGITAN), HUMANAY.
b) On the command of execution, the platoons form in the

same manner prescribed in platoon drill. Each platoon sergeant faces his platoon while
the platoons are forming, and directs his platoon to adjust (if necessary) and align on

the platoon to the right at the correct interval. Once the platoon is formed, the platoon
sergeants face about.
NOTE: If the command PASINSING PAGITAN, HUMANAY is given, the members of the platoon form at
close interval; however, the five-step interval between platoons is maintained.
c) When all the platoon sergeants are facing to the front, the
First Sergeant commands (if appropriate) SIYASAT TA; AGAP TA; BABA (ISAKBAT),
TA. He then directs (if appropriate) TANGGAPIN ANG ULAT. The platoon sergeants
face about and command MAG-ULAT. The squad leaders report as previously
described in Section 6 paragraph 6.2.d. After receiving the report, the platoon sergeants
face about. When all the platoon sergeants are facing to the front, the First Sergeant
commands MAG-ULAT. The platoon sergeants salute and report (as described in
paragraph 6-2e) in succession from the right to left. The First Sergeant returns each
salute individually. Having received the report from the platoon sergeants, the First
Sergeant faces about and awaits the arrival of the company commander.
NOTE: If the Company Commander is not scheduled to receive the company, the First Sergeant
commands SUMALUNAN. On the command, the platoon sergeants and the Guidon Bearer step forward
three steps. Simultaneously, the First Sergeant faces about, steps forward three steps, and occupies the
position of the commander.
d) When the Company Commander has halted at his post, the

First Sergeant salutes and reports. "Ginoo, narito pong lahat," or "Ginoo, napag-
alaman pong lahat", or salutes and commands SUMALUNAN. The First Sergeant
faces about and marches three steps forward. The platoon sergeants face to the right in
marching and assume their post beside the first squad leader (if the platoon leader is
not present, they step forward three steps). The platoon leaders march around the left
flank of their platoon and assume their post by inclining and halting, already facing the
front.
2) Forming with officer
When the company is formed by the Company Commander, the

procedures are the same as forming with the non-commissioned officers except that the
platoon leaders form their platoons and the First Sergeant, platoon sergeants, and
Guidon Bearer fall in their post. The command SUMALUNAN is not necessary.
7.4 CHANGING INTERVAL
a. The company changes interval in the same manner as prescribed for the
platoon.
b. When the Company Commander wants the company to obtain close

interval in line formation while maintaining a five-step interval, he directs LAPIT SA
UNANG PULUTONG MASINSING PAGITAN. The platoon leaders face about and
command ISAHANG BILANG, NA. After the platoons have counted off the platoon

leaders command MASINSING PAGITAN, KAD. The second, third, and fourth platoon
leaders command HARAP SA KANAN, NA, and in succession command HATING
HAKBANG, KAD. They halt at five-step interval and face the platoon to the left. If the
directive "LAPIT SA IKATLONG PULUTONG MASINSING PAGITAN" is given, the
platoon leaders on the right of the designated platoon to the left, march (half step)
forward until the five-step interval is obtained, and then halt and face their platoons to
the right.
NOTE: When the company is at close interval (line formation), the commander may march the company
(in column with less than correct distance) at the half step for short distances. If he wants to march with
30-inch step while marching with less than correct distance, he directs "IDALANG ANG INYONG
PULUTONG". The first platoon leader commands PADALANG, KAD. The remaining platoons execute
the directive in the same manner as the second platoon.
c. When the Company Commander wants the company to obtain normal

interval from close interval in line formation while maintaining five-step interval, he
directs "PADALANG SA UNANG PULUTONG GAWING PAGITAN". The platoon
leaders face about and march (half step) their platoons to a position that ensures the
five-step interval between platoons to the left, then the platoon leaders command
ISAHANG BILANG, NA. The platoon leaders then command GAWING PAGITAN,
KAD.
7.5 ALIGNING THE COMPANY
a. To align the company in a line formation, the Company Commander

directs "TUNTON SA KANAN". On the directive, all platoon leaders face about. The
right flank platoon leader commands TUNTON KANAN, NA and aligns his platoon as
prescribed in platoon drill. When the alignment of the first rank of the right platoon has
been verified (the platoon leaders has stepped off to align the second rank), the platoon
leader to the left commands TUNTON KANAN, NA. He then faces to the half right in
marching, moves to a position on line with and one step to the left of the left flank man
of the first rank, and face (left face) down the line. After aligning the first rank, the
platoon leader centers himself on the first rank, faces to the right in marching, takes two
short steps, halts, executes left face, and aligns the second rank. The third and fourth
rank are aligned in the same manner as the second rank. After aligning the fourth rank,
the platoon leader faces to the left in marching; halts and faces perpendicular to the
platoon, one step forward from the platoon, commands HANDA, RAP, and proceeds to
his post. All platoon leaders to the left of the first take the same actions as the first
platoon leader.
NOTE: If necessary, the platoon leaders to the left of the base platoon commands AYUSIN ANG
PAGITAN before commanding TUNTON KANAN, NA. On the command AYUSIN ANG PAGITAN, the
base (squad leader of the first squad) faces to the right in marching and moves to the left flank member
(first squad) of the platoon to the right, halts, faces about, steps forward five steps, halts, faces to the
right, and aligns himself on the element to his right.
b. To align the company in column, the company commander directs

TUNTON HARAP. On this direction, the platoon leader faces about and commands

TUMAKIP. The other platoon leader commands MANATILI. The first platoon covers as
in platoon drill. The other platoon then execute the movement in succession as soon as
the platoon to their front has completed the movement.
7.6 OPENING AND CLOSING RANKS
a. To open ranks, the company commander directs "IBUKANG TALUDTOD

ANG INYONG MGA PULUTONG". On the directive, all platoon leaders face about. The
right flank platoon leader commands PABUKANG TALUDTOD, KAD. When the
platoon has completed the movement, it automatically dresses and aligns as in platoon
drill. When the first rank of the right platoon has been aligned, the platoon leader to the
left commands PABUKANG TALUDTOD, KAD and then aligns his platoon. All platoon
leaders to the left of the second platoon take the same actions as the second platoon
leader.
NOTE: When clearing grounded equipment, the company may march in column (right face) from open
ranks (double interval) for short distances. Having cleared the equipment, the commander commands
GAWING PAGITAN, KAD. When returning to the equipment while marching at normal interval, the
command DALAWANG PAGITAN, KAD, is given. If the company is marching in reverse order, the
command TIWALAG and HUMANAY is given.
b. To close rank, the commander directs "IBUKANG TALUDTOD ANG

INYONG MGA PULUTONG". On the directive, all platoon leaders face about. The right
flank platoon leader commands PASINSING PAGITAN, KAD. The platoons execute the
movement the same as platoon drill. After the platoons have completed the movement,
the platoon leaders face about.
a. The company changes the direction of march basically the same as the
squad and platoon. The commands are LIKO SA KANAN (KALIWA), LIKO HATING
KANAN (KALIWA), KAD.
b. The base element during a column movement is the lead platoon and the
squad on the flank, in the direction of turn.
c. When at the halt, the leading platoon leader repeats the Company
Commander's preparatory command. Succeeding platoon leaders give the
supplementary command PASULONG. On the command of execution KAD the leading
platoon execute the movement as described in platoon drill; succeeding platoons
executes the movement on their platoon leaders' command at approximately the same
location.
d. While marching, the movement is executed as described from the halt

except that the succeeding platoon leaders give the supplementary command TULOY
ANG LAKAD rather than PASULONG.

e. The company executes rear march and inclines in the same manner as
the platoon.
f. When executing Counter Column March from the halt, the leading platoon
leader repeats the preparatory command. Succeeding platoon leaders give the
supplementary command PASULONG. On the command of execution KAD, the leading
platoon executes the movement as described in platoon drill, and marches though the
other platoons. Succeeding platoons execute the movement on their platoon leaders’
command at approximately the same location. When the movement is executed while
marching, the command of execution is given as the left foot strikes the marching
surface. The movement is executed basically the same as from the halt except that the
succeeding platoon leaders give the supplementary command to continue to march
rather than forward. The Guidon Bearer faces left in marching from the halt or executes
a column left in marching, marches by the most direct route outside of the formation,
and repositions himself in front of the lead platoon as it clears the rear of the company.
If the Company Commander gives the command from his post in a separate unit, he
moves in the most convenient manner to his new position at the left flank of the unit. If
he gives the command while at the head of the company, he moves in the same
direction as the Guidon Bearer.
7.8 CORRECTING DISTANCE BETWEEN PLATOONS
a. To obtain correct distance when the company is marching in column or is

in column halt, the Company Commander directs "LAPIT SA UNANG PULUTONG".
b. When at the halt, on the directive "LAPIT SA UNANG PULUTONG", the

platoon leader of the leading platoon commands (over the right shoulder) MANATILI.
The succeeding platoon leaders command (over the shoulder) PASULONG, KAD and
then command PATAKDA, KAD, and PULUTONG, TO when the correct distance is
obtained.
c. While marching, on the directive "LAPIT SA UNANG PULUTONG", the

platoon leader of the leading platoon commands (over the right shoulder) HATING
HAKBANG, KAD. The succeeding platoon leaders command (over the shoulder)
TULOY ANG LAKAD and then command HATING HAKBANG, KAD as soon as the
correct distance is obtained.
d. The Company Commander commands PASULONG, KAD; (TO) as soon

as all platoons have obtained the correct distance and are marching at half step.
a. The company forms columns of twos basically the same as the platoon.
The Company Commander must allow sufficient time for the platoon leaders, and squad
leader of the lead platoon, to give their supplementary commands before giving the
command of execution. The command for this movement is DALAWANG TUDLING

MULA SA KALIWA (KANAN), KAD. The leading platoon leader repeats the
preparatory command. Other platoon leaders give the supplementary command. On the
Company Commander's command of execution KAD, the leading platoon executes the
movement as in platoon drill. Other platoons execute the movement on their platoon
leaders’ command. Succeeding platoon leaders give their command so as to follow the
prescribed five-step distance between platoons.
7.10 FORMING A COMPANY MASS
a. The company form in mass and in column (platoons in column) when

halted or while marching. The company must be at close interval (Close Interval, March)
before the command BALANGAY, MAGTIPON SA KALIWA, KAD is given.
b. When the preparatory command BALANGAY, MAGTIPON SA KALIWA

is given at the halt, the leading platoon commands, MANATILI. The platoon leader of
the succeeding platoons command LIKO HATING-KALIWA. On the command of
execution KAD, the leading platoon stands fast. The other platoons execute the column
half left and then execute a column half right on the command of their platoon leaders to
a point (line) that ensures the platoons to be at close interval with the platoon to their
right when halted. As the platoons come abreast of the base platoon, the platoon
leaders command PATAKDA, KAD. While the platoon is in marking time, the members
adjust their positions to ensure alignment with the man to their right. The platoon
leaders allow their platoon to mark time for about eight counts and then command
PULUTONG, TO.
NOTE: On the command of execution KAD, the Company Commander and the Guidon Bearer face to the
right (left) in marching and reposition themselves centered on the company.
c. On the preparatory command, BALANGAY MAGTIPON SA KALIWA

while marching, given as the left foot strikes the marching surface, the leading platoon
leader gives the supplementary command PATAKDA. The succeeding platoon leaders
command LIKO HATING-KALIWA. On the command of execution KAD, the leading
platoon begins to march in place. After marking time at about eight counts, the lead
platoon leader commands PULUTONG, TO. The other platoons form in the same
manner as from the halt.
NOTE: On the command of execution KAD, the Company Commander and the Guidon Bearer halt and
immediately face to the right (left) in marching and reposition themselves centered on the company.
7.11 ALIGNING A COMPANY MASS
a. As soon as the company has formed in mass, the Company Commander

gives the command BABA, TA (if appropriate) and then commands MASINSIN
PAGITAN, TUNTON KANAN, NA.
b. On the command of execution NA, the platoon leader of the right platoon
marches by the most direct route to the right flank and verifies the alignment of as many

ranks as necessary to ensure proper alignment in the same manner as aligning the
platoon. When he has finished the verification, the platoon leader turns to a position one
step in front of and centered on the third squad, halts, and faces to the right. When the
platoon leader has returned to his position, the Company Commander commands
HANDA, RAP.
NOTE: On the command of execution NA, the platoon leaders and platoon sergeants position themselves
in line with the third squad of their platoon by one 15-inch step to the right.
7.12 CHANGING THE DIRECTION OF MARCH OF A MASS FORMATION
a. The company changes the direction of march in mass basically the same
as a platoon column movement. When executed from the halt, the commander has the
unit execute KANAN BALIKAT, TA (if appropriate), and faces toward the desired
direction of march, turns head toward the formation, and commands PIHIT SA KANAN
(KALIWA), KAD. On the command of execution KAD the platoon leaders face to the
HATING KALIWA (KANAN) in marching and continue to march in an arc until parallel
to the new direction of march. Then they begin marching with the half step, dressing on
the right (left) flank platoon leader until the command PASULONG, KAD is given. The
right (left) guide (the base squad leader in the direction of turn) faces to the right (left) in
marching and immediately takes up the half step. All other squad leaders (front rank)
face to the half right (left) in marching and continue to march in an arc until they come in
line with the guide. At this time, they begin marching with the half step and dress
(glancing out of the corner of the eye) in the direction of the turn until the command
PASULONG, KAD is given. After the company has completed the turn, the commander
faces about, commands PASULONG, KAD and again faces about.
7.13 FORMING A COLUMN FROM A COMPANY MASS
a. To form a company in column from company mass halt, the command is

SUNURAN NG MGA PULUTONG, KANAN PULUTONG, LIKO SA KANAN (LIKO
HATING KANAN), KAD. The right platoon leader gives the supplementary command
PASULONG (LIKO SA KANAN or LIKO HATING KANAN) and the other platoon
leaders command MANATILI. On the command of execution NA, the right platoon
marches in the direction indicated. All other platoons (in sequence) in column, execute
Column Half Right and Column Half Left on the command of their platoon leaders.
b. To execute the movement when marching, the Company Commander

commands, AGAP, TA (unless at Sling Arms), and then commands SUNURAN NG
MGA PULUTONG, KANAN PULUTONG, TAKBONG HAKBANG, KAD. On the
preparatory command, the right platoon leader gives the supplementary command
TAKBONG HAKBANG, and then the other platoon leaders gives the supplementary
command TULOY ANG LAKAD. On the command of execution KAD, the right platoon
marches in double time. Other platoon leaders (in sequence) command LIKO HATING
KANAN, TAKBONG HAKBANG, KAD and LIKO HATING KALIWA, KAD to bring the
succeeding platoons in column with the leading platoon.

c. The platoon leader and the platoon sergeant position themselves after the
supplementary command but before the command of execution.
7.14 FORMING A COMPANY IN COLUMN WITH PLATOONS IN LINE AND

REFORMED
a. To form a company in column with platoons in line from a column

formation at the halt, the command is HUMANAY NG MGA PULUTONG, KAD. The
platoon leader of the leading platoon commands MANATILI. The second platoon leader
commands LIKO SA KANAN. All other platoon leaders command PASULONG. On the
command of execution KAD, the leading platoon stands fast, and the second platoon
executes a LIKO SA KANAN, marches 12 steps past the right file of the first platoon,
and executes LIKO SA KALIWA. As they come on line with the base platoon, the
platoon leaders command PATAKDA, KAD. After the platoon has marched in place for
eight counts, the platoon leader commands PULUTONG TO. The succeeding platoons
execute LIKO SA KANAN at approximately the same location as the platoon to their
front and execute LIKO SA KALIWA and halt in the same manner as the second
platoon. When the platoons have halted in position, the Company Commander
commands HARAP SA KALIWA, NA. On that command, the platoon leaders and
platoon sergeants face in marching and assume their post.
b. When executed while marching, the movements are basically the same as
from the halt except that the commander gives the command of execution as the right
foot strikes the marching surface. The leading platoon leader commands PATAKDA,
KAD. On the preparatory command, the second platoon leader commands LIKO SA
KANAN, and the succeeding platoon leaders command TULOY ANG LAKAD. On the
command of execution KAD, the leading platoon executes mark time and marches in
place (approximately eight counts) until the platoon leader commands PULUTONG,
HINTO. The other platoons execute the movement in the same manner as from the halt.
c. To reform in column with platoons in column, the Company Commander

commands HARAP SA KANAN, RAP; SUNURAN NG MGA PULUTONG, KALIWANG
PULUTONG, KAD. On the command HARAP SA KALIWA, RAP, the platoon leader
and platoon sergeants face in marching and resume their post in column. On the
preparatory command SUNURAN NG MGA PULUTONG, KALIWANG PULUTONG,
the left platoon leader commands PASULONG, LIKO SA KALIWA (HATING KALIWA),
all other platoon leaders command LIKO HATING KALIWA. On the command of
execution KAD, the left platoon executes the movement. The other platoon leaders give
the appropriate commands so as to follow the lead platoon at the correct distance.
NOTE: If necessary, the platoons following the second platoon automatically adjust the length of their
steps to ensure correct distance from the platoon to their front.
7.15 DISMISSING THE COMPANY
a. The company is dismissed while at attention. It may be dismissed by the

First Sergeant.

b. When the company is dismissed by the First Sergeant, the Company
Commander commands TANDIS NG BALANGAY. The First Sergeant marches by the
most direct route to a position three steps from and directly in front of the Company
Commander. After the First Sergeant halted, the Company Commander commands
LANSAGIN ANG BALANGAY. Salutes are exchanged. Upon termination of the
salutes, the platoon leaders and the Executive Officer leave the formation. The platoon
sergeants face to the right in marching and take their posts (platoon leader's position)
six steps in front of and centered on the platoon by marching around the right flank of
the platoon, inclining and halting when already facing to the front. The First Sergeant
steps forward three steps and faces about. When all the platoon sergeants are at their
posts, the First Sergeant commands LANSAGIN ANG INYONG PULUTONG. The
platoon sergeants salute. The First Sergeant and the Guidon Bearer leave the
formation. The platoon sergeants then dismiss their platoons as in platoon drill.
c. When the company is dismissed by the Company Commander, he

commands LANSAGIN ANG INYONG PULUTONG. The platoon leaders salute. The
Company Commander returns all salutes with one salute. After the salutes are
exchanged the Company Commander, the Guidon Bearer, First Sergeant, and the
Executive Officer leave the formation. The platoon leader(s) face(s) about and
command(s) SARHENTO NG PULUTONG. The platoon sergeant faces to the right in
marching and marches (inclines) around the squad leader (s), halts three steps in front
of and centered on the platoon leader, and faces to the right. Each platoon leader then
directs LANSAGIN ANG PULUTONG. Salutes are exchanged. The platoon leaders
leave the formation. The platoon sergeants step forward three steps, face about, and
dismiss the platoon as in platoon drill.

Inspections
7.16 GENERAL
a. The company has one prescribed formation for inspecting personnel and
equipment in ranks - company in line with platoons in line. When inspecting crew-served
weapon and vehicles, the personnel are normally positioned to the rear of the formation
with the operator (gunner) standing by his vehicle (weapon).
b. The commander may conduct an in-quarters (barracks) inspection to

include personnel appearance, individual weapons, field equipment, displays,
maintenance and sanitary conditions.
c. When the field equipment is to be inspected, it should be displayed.

Additional equipment not shown or different models of the equipment should be
arranged on sanitary conditions.
7.17 IN-RANKS INSPECTION (LINE FORMATIONS)
a. When the company is in formation, the Company Commander directs

"HUMANDA SA PAGSISIYASAT". On that directive, the platoon leaders face about,
open ranks, and align the company. The platoon leaders take their position one step in
the front of the first squad leader.
b. The Company Commander begins the inspection by stepping forward and

inspecting the Guidon Bearer. He then faces to the half left in marching and proceeds to
the right of the line. When the Company Commander has halted directly in front of him,
he salute and reports, "Ginoo, pulutong, Tinyente dela Cruz namumuno, handa na
po sa pagsisiyasat". The Company Commander returns the salute and inspects the
platoon leader. The Company Commander then directs the platoon leader to lead him
through the inspection, faces to the half left in marching, and halts directly in front of the
squad leader of the first squad. As the Company Commander faces to the half left in
marching, the platoon leader faces to the right in marching, inclines, and halts directly in
front of the second man in the first squad and on line and at normal interval (close
interval) to the right of the Company Commander.
NOTE: As soon as the platoon leader and Company Commander have halted in front of the first two men,
the second squad leader commands TIKAS PAHINGA. When moving from man to man during the
inspection, the Company Commander and the platoon leader (Executive Officer and First Sergeant)
simultaneously face right in marching, take two short steps (one step if the company is at close interval),
halt, and face to the left. After the Company Commander has inspected the last man in the front rank, the
platoon leader hesitates momentarily and allows the Company Commander to precede him as he
inspects the front rank to the rear. As the Company Commander begins to inspect the next rank, the next
squad leader commands his squad HUMANDA. As they begin to inspect the next rank, the squad leader
of the last rank inspected commands TIKAS PAHINGA. Normally, when inspecting the rear of each rank,
the Company Commander conducts a walking inspection. As the Company Commander inspects the rear

of the last man in each rank, he turns and halts directly in front of the second man. The Executive Officer
and the First Sergeant march past (behind) the Company Commander and assume their post to his left.
c. As the Company Commander halts directly in front of and facing the

individual being inspected, the individual executes Inspection Arms. If the Company
Commander wants to inspect the individual's weapon, he will inspect the weapon first,
then the individual's uniform and appearance. As soon as the Company Commander
grasps the weapon, the individual releases the weapon and resumes the position of
Attention. When the Company Commander has finished inspecting the weapon, he
returns it in the same manner as it was received. The individual receives the weapon by
grasping the center of the hand guard just forward of the slip ring with the left and the
small of stock with the right hand. He then executes Ready, Port Arms, Order Arms.
NOTE: In the event the Company Commander does not want to inspect the weapon, the individual
remains at Inspection Arms until the Company Commander has halted in front of and facing the next
man. The individual then executes AGAP, TA and BABA,TA. As the Company Commander moves to the
rear of the rank being inspected, each man, as the commander approaches, unfastens the snap of his
scabbard with the left hand, and moves the point slightly forward. The scabbard is held in position until
the bayonet has been replaced or, if the bayonet is not inspected, until the Company Commander has
moved to the next man. At that time, the securing straps are fastened and the position of Attention is
resumed.
d. The correct method in manipulating a rifle for inspection is as follows:
1) When receiving the rifle from the inspected individual, reach

forward and grasp the rifle at the upper portion of the hand guard with the right hand.
Lower the rifle diagonally to the left, twist the rifle slightly, insert the tip of the little finger
of the left hand into the ejection port (do not twist the rifle but insert the thumb into the
receiver of the M16 series rifle), and look into the barrel. The fingers reflect sufficient
light for the inspection of the barrel.
2) Grasp the small of the stock with the left hand and raise the rifle to
a horizontal position (sight up) with the muzzle to the right. The rifle is centered to the
body with the forearms horizontal and the palms up. Move the rifle horizontally to the left
and inspect the upper portion of the rifle beginning with the flash suppressor. Move the
rifle slowly to the right inspecting the butt. Return the rifle to the center of the body.
3) Keeping the rifle horizontal, rotate it 180 degrees (sight toward the
body) so that the sights point toward the marching surface. Move the rifle horizontal to
the left and inspect the muzzle. Move the rifle slowly to the right and inspect the butt.
When moving the rifle across the body, twist the rifle as necessary and inspect the
movable parts on the sides of the receiver. Having completed the inspection of the
lower parts of the rifle, return it to the center of the body.
4) Keeping the rifle horizontal, rotate the rifle 180 degrees (sights
away from the body) so that the sights are up. Release the left hand and return the rifle
in the same manner as received.

5) When inspecting a weapon other than a rifle, the inspecting officer
receives the weapon with his right hand and inspects it in the most convenient manner.
Having completed the inspection, the weapon is returned with the right hand in the
same manner as received.
e. When the Company Commander has completed the inspection of the

platoon sergeant, the platoon leader commands the platoon HUMANDA and overtakes
the Company Commander en route back to the front of the platoon. The platoon leader
halts facing to the front (six steps in front and centered on his platoon) and exchanges
salutes with the Company Commander. The Company Commander (Executive Officer
and First Sergeant) faces to the right in marching and moves to the next platoon. As
soon as the Company Commander has cleared the first platoon, the platoon leader
faces about and commands PASINSIN PAGITAN, KAD and PALUWAG and then
faces about and executes At Ease. When the Company Commander has completed
(exchanged salutes with the platoon leader) the inspection of the last platoon, he
returns to his post at the center of the company and commands the company
HUMANDA. He then dismisses the company, as previously described.
f. When the company is inspected by an officer of a higher command, on the

approach of the inspecting officer, the Company Commander commands BALANGAY
HUMANDA. He then faces about salutes, and reports "Ginoo, 'A' Balangay, Kapitan
Depayso namumuno, handa na po sa pagsisiyasat." The inspection is conducted as
previously described except the Company Commander takes a position immediately to
the left of the inspecting officer. The inspection is terminated by the Company
Commander in the same manner prescribed for a platoon leader.
7.18 IN-QUARTERS INSPECTION (STAND BY)
a. When the Company Commander wants to conduct an in-quarters

inspection the members are positioned in line with their equipment or as near as
possible. The platoon leader positions himself in the path of the inspecting officer, at
the point near his area of responsibility. At the approach of the inspecting officer, the
platoon leader commands PULUTONG, HUMANDA, salutes, and reports, "Ginoo,
unang pulutong Tenyente dela Cruz namumuno, handa na po sa pagsisiyasat”.
NOTE: When the situation dictates, the platoon leader may report to the inspecting officer outside of the
quarters. A designated individual commands the members HUMANDA as the inspecting officer enters the
quarters (bay).
b. The platoon leader then guides the inspecting officer along a route
dictated by the physical arrangement of the personnel and equipment. Upon entering
the quarters (bay), the inspecting officer commands PALUWAG. As the inspecting
officer approaches each individual or his equipment, the individual automatically
assumes the position of Attention. When the inspecting officer has moved to the next
man, the last inspected resumes the position of At Ease. As the inspecting officer
begins to exit the quarters (bay), after completing the inspection, HUMANDA is
commanded. The platoon leader and the inspecting officer exchange salutes.

NOTE: When inspecting soldier's rooms, Attention is not commanded. The individuals automatically
assume the position of Attention as the inspector enters the room. The inspector then commands
PALUWAG. As the inspector approaches each soldier, the soldier assumes the position of Attention and
resumes At Ease after he has been inspected.

SECTION VIII
BATTALION AND BRIGADE FORMATION

“ The exterior splendor, the regularity of movements, the adroitness and at the same time
firmness of the mass – all this gives the individual soldier the safe and calming conviction that
nothing can withstand his particular regiment or battalion.” – Colmar von der Goltz
Battalion Formations
8.1 GENERAL
a. For the most part, battalion drill merely provides the procedures for
executing company drill in conjunction with other companies in the same formation.
b. For drill purposes, a battalion consists of a headquarters (staff), Colors,

and two or more companies. The right flank unit serves as base when in a line
formation; the leading element is the base when in column.
c. To facilitate the forming of a larger unit, the commander normally alerts

the component units as to the desired formation, time, place, route, uniform, and the
sequence in which the units will form. Unless the right guide’s position at the formation
site has been previously marked, the guides report to the site and receive instructions
prior to the arrival of the troops.
d. The commissioned staff forms in one rank, at normal interval and centered
on the Commander. Staff members are normally arranged in their numerical order from
right to left. When enlisted staff personnel form as part of the other staff, they form two
steps to the rear of their respective staff officer. The Command Sergeant Major forms
one step to the rear of the commissioned staff and centered on the Commander, or one
step to the rear and centered on the Colors when they are carried to the rear (battalion
mass) of the staff.
Part I / Section VIII: Battalion and Brigade Formation 98

8.2 FORMATIONS
a. The battalion has two basic formations – a line and a column. There are
several variations as to how the separate elements are arranged within either formation;
the battalion may be formed in line with the companies in line with platoons in line, or
battalion in line with companies in column with platoons in line. From those formations,
the battalion may be positioned in a battalion in column with companies in column, or
companies in mass, or companies in column with platoons in line.
b. When the battalion participates as a separate element of a larger

formation, or when space is limited, it is normally formed in a mass formation in the
same manner as forming a company mass.
8.3 FORMING AND DISMISSING THE BATTALION
a. The Adjutant is responsible for the formation of troops. He takes a position

at the right flank of the line on which the units are to form and faces down the line. He

remains facing down the line until all units are formed and then marches to his post
midway between the line of troops and the proposed position of the Commander.
NOTE: If guides are used, the Adjutant takes his post as soon as the guides have been aligned
b. As the Commander and his staff approaches, the Adjutant commands

(directs) the units HUMANDA, faces the commander, salutes, and reports, “Ginoo,
handa na po ang talupad.”
c. The Commander acknowledges the salute and commands SUMALUNAN

KA. The Adjutant marches (TROTS) forward, passes to the Commander’s right, and
takes his post at the right flank staff officer. The Commander then commands or directs
such actions, as he desires, (KALUPUNAN) SUMALIKOD KO, KAD.
d. Normally, the Colors are positioned at the center of the battalion when
formed in line or column, and four (4) steps to the rear of the staff when formed in mass.
e. To dismiss the Battalion Commander directs PAMUNUAN ANG INYONG

MGA BALANGAY. The Company Commanders render salutes then the Battalion
Commander returns all salutes with one salute. He then dismisses his staff and
commands KALUPUNAN LUMANSAG.
NOTE: In a battalion mass formation, the platoon leaders form as the first rank of troops. The right flank
platoon leader serves as the guide.
8.4 INSPECTING THE BATTALION
a. When the battalion is to be inspected, the Adjutant forms the battalion in

line with companies in line and platoons in line.
b. The Adjutant forms the troops, reports, and takes his position with the
staff. When the adjutant has joined the staff, the Battalion Commander directs
“HUMANDA SA PAGSISIYASAT”. Unit commanders face about and give the same
directive. The platoon leaders prepare their platoons for inspection in the same manner
as in company drill. When all of the platoons in each company have completed Open
Ranks and Dress Right, the Company Commander faces the Battalion Commander.
NOTE: Because of the time involved in inspecting a battalion, the Battalion Commander normally directs
his staff to inspect the companies while he inspects the Colors and makes a general inspection at the
Battalion. The Color guards do not execute Inspection Arms.
c. As the Battalion Commander (or his designated staff officer) approaches

the company, the Company Commander salutes and reports, “Ginoo, handa na po
ang balangay”. The inspecting officer then proceeds to the first platoon to be
inspected. The Company Commander takes a position to the left of the inspecting
officer. The platoons are inspected in the same manner as explained in company drill.
In the event a platoon has already been inspected, the platoon leader proceeds first to

the inspecting officer and commands his platoon to Attention and renders salute as the
inspecting officer approaches.
d. When the Battalion Commander has returned to the front of the formation
and all staff officers have completed their inspection, the Battalion Commander
commands TALUPAD, HUMANDA and dismisses the battalion. After the inspecting
officer leaves, the platoon leader commands his platoon, LAPITANG TALUDTUD KAD,
steps about three (3) steps forward and commands HARAP SA LIKOD NA and
TATLONG HAKBANG PASULONG KAD to occupy its former position.
e. If the battalion is being inspected by a higher commander and his staff, the
Battalion Commander reports to the inspecting officer in the same manner as the
company commanders. The Battalion Commander’s staff takes a position to the left of
the higher inspecting staff and escort them to the unit. The Battalion Commander
escorts the higher commander.
BRIGADE FORMATION
8.5 GENERAL
a. The brigade, like the battalion has two basic formations – a line and a
column. There are several variations as to how the brigades are arranged within their
formation: the brigade may be formed with battalions in mass, or battalions in line with
companies in mass. From those formations, the brigade may be positioned in column
with battalions in mass, companies in mass, or battalion in column with companies in
column.
b. The formation selected is normally dictated by the space available and the
desire of the commander.
8.6 FORMING AND DISMISSING THE BRIGADE
a. The brigade is formed and dismissed in the same manner as the battalion.
b. Normally, the brigade Color is positioned at the center of the brigade.

Subordinate color-bearer organizations position their Colors to the center of their
formation when in a line or column formation, or four steps to the rear of their staff when
in a mass formation.

SECTION IX
MOUNTED DRILL
9.1 GENERAL
a. This contains the procedure for the orderly formation and movement of
vehicles during drill and ceremonies for motorized and mechanized units. When
necessary, the procedures may be modified to conform to local conditions.
b. Motorized and mechanized units, when dismounted, conduct drill and

ceremonies in the same manner as prescribed for infantry units.
c. When mounted in vehicles, visible troops sit at attention. Those armed

with rifle place the butt of the weapon alongside the right foot in the same manner as
Order Arms, with the weapon vertical and parallel to the calf of the leg. Grasp the
weapon with the right hand so that the right forearm is horizontal. Visible troops not
armed with rifle, fold their arms (right over left) and raise their elbows so that the upper
arms are horizontal.
d. When marching units and motorized and/or mechanized units take part in
the same ceremony, the units form dismounted (in a formation corresponding to the
marching units) from their vehicles to the rear. On the directive PASA MASID , the
commander faces about and directs SA INYONG SASAKYAN, HUMANAY or SAKAY.
Subordinate commanders and leaders, in sequence from right to left, relay the
command and all vehicle members double time to their vehicles. On the signal to
mount, they mount their vehicles. Drivers observe their commander or leader for the
signal to start engines.
9.2 FORMATIONS
Part I / Section IX: Mounted Drill 102

a. The formations for motorized and mechanized units are basically the
same as for infantry units. The interval between vehicles is about five steps. The
distance is about ten steps between vehicles one behind the other.
1) Column. In this formation, the vehicles are placed one behind the
other, and the right edges of the vehicles are aligned.
2) Line. In this formation, vehicles are abreast, and the two edges of
the vehicles are aligned.
3) Mass. A unit formed with two or more columns abreast constitutes

a mass. Masses may be grouped as follows:
a) LINE OF MASSES. Masses abreast with ten-step interval.

(Figure D-1)
b) COLUMN OF MASSES. Masses are placed one behind

another with ten-step intervals between companies. (Figure D-2)
c) LINE OF BATTALIONS IN LINE OF MASSES. Battalions in

line of masses abreast with 20-step intervals between battalions.
d) LINE OF BATTALIONS IN COLUMN OF MASSES.

Battalions in column of masses abreast with 20-step interval battalions.
e) COLUMNS OF BATTALIONS IN LINE OF MASSES.

Battalions in line of masses placed one behind another, with 20-step intervals between
battalions.
f) COLUMNS OF BATTALIONS IN COLUMNS OF MASSES.

Battalions in column of masses placed one behind another, with 20-step intervals
between battalions.
b. Mass formation may be used for ceremonies or instruction by companies

or larger units.
9.3 FORMATION AT VEHICLES
a. To form at the vehicles from any position, the command is SA INYONG

SASAKYAN, HUMANAY. At the command HUMANAY, the men move (double time) to
their assigned vehicles and form (as shown in Figure D-3). When there are more than
five men, they form two or three ranks with normal distance. When there are more than
15 men, the number of men per rank may be increased. (Artillery sections form as
prescribed in service-of-the-piece manuals.)

b. To load, the command is SAKAY. On the command of execution NA,
each man doubles time and forms at his vehicle (as previously discussed).
9.4 MOVEMENT OF VEHICLES
a. To move forward, the commander gives the warning signal PASULONG,

and his vehicles move out. The other vehicles move forward at the designated distance.
They are aligned on the base vehicle (right).
b. To halt, the commander signals HINTO. The driver then slows down and
halts the commander’s vehicles. The other vehicles close to the prescribed distance and
halt.
c. To change the direction of travel of mass formation, the commander gives

the appropriate signal. On the commander’s signal, the base vehicle turns 90 degrees
and slows. Other vehicles turn about 45-degrees and continue travelling in an arc at
normal speed until on line, the base vehicle accelerates as necessary to maintain
correct distance on the commander.
d. To change a line formation to a column formation, the commander signals

for a column. The base vehicle and those directly behind it, moves forward. Other
vehicles move at a 45-degree angle until in line with the lead vehicle and then execute a
45-degree turn.
e. To change a column formation to a line formation, the commander signals

a line formation. The base (right flank vehicle) stops and all other vehicles turn at a 45-
degree angle, turn again at a 45-degree angle when the prescribed interval is obtained,
and then halt when on line with the base vehicle.
9.5 MOUNTED REVIEWS
a. Motorized and mechanized units conduct ceremonies as close as possible

to the procedures prescribed for other units. They may participate (exactly as prescribed
for marching units) as a dismounted unit, and on the directive PASS IN REVIEW, mount
their vehicles and Pass in Review mounted.
b. When desired, motorized and mechanized units may position their

vehicles in a prescribed formation and remain mounted throughout the ceremony.

PART II
CEREMONIES
Part II: Ceremonies 106

SECTION I
REVIEWS
1.1 DEFINITION
A review is an inspection of troops by a high officer or honored guest as a way of

showing its troops’ unit strength, state of discipline and preparedness.
1.2 HISTORICAL BACKGROUND
Reviews in the Armed Forces of the Philippines were patterned after the United
States Army’s. This is due to the fact that the Americans greatly influenced the
Philippine government’s educational system and the military during their occupation of
the country right after the Spanish regime.
US military reviews were outlined in the Regulations for the Order and Discipline
of the troops of the United States commonly known as the Blue Book written in 1779 by
Baron Friedrich von Steuben, a former Prussian Officer under Frederick the Great. He
was commissioned by General George Washington to develop the revolutionary forces
into a well-organized and highly disciplined army.
The origin of military reviews may be traced back to as early as the Middle Ages
when rulers were likely to have military ceremonies as a way of showing strength.
At the turn of the century, armies all over the world began adopting the
regimental system. Regiments were assigned a specific color or number for easy
identification and positioning on the battlefield. In battle, the color (flag) party marched in
front and center of its unit as a point for the unit to dress on. Since victories in those
days were expressed in terms of the number of enemy colors captured, the color party
was the logical priority target and thus suffered heavy casualties.
Part II / Section I: Reviews 107

In the US Army, the Colors have been historically placed in the center of the
formation and considered to be part of the company on the immediate right of the
Colors. This company is still called the Color Unit.
Musical elements (usually drums and fifes, and sometimes a band) were used
during actual battle and marched 12 to 15 paces to the rear of the formation. By 1892,
US infantry drill regulation posted bands and field music on the right of the formation or
at the head of the formation when it moved in column.
Today, the presence of the Colors at the center of the formation represents their
presence in the old days at the forefront of the unit during the heat of battle. On the
other hand, the presence of the band represents the significant role that the drum, fife
and other musical instruments have played throughout military history for signaling in
camp or on the battlefield.
1.3 PURPOSE
Reviews are often mistaken to be the same as parades. While features are
similar, these are two distinct ceremonies although the combination of the two is
normally practiced. A review is a military ceremony used to:
a. Honor a visiting high-ranking commander, officials, or dignitary and/or

permit them to observe the state of training of a unit.
b. Present decorations and awards.
c. Honor or recognize unit or individual achievements.
d. Commemorate events.
It is more fitting therefore to entitle a program “ A Review in Honor of ________”

or “A Review in Commemoration of _______” instead of calling it a parade and review
when actually what would be done is only a review.
1.4 GENERAL
Normally, a review is conducted with a battalion-size or larger troop unit.

However, a composite or representative element consisting of two or more platoons
may serve the same purpose. A review consists of the following steps in sequence:
a. Formation of troops.
b. Presentation of Command and Honors.
c. Inspection.

d. Honors to the Nation.
e. Remarks.
f. Pass-in-Review.
g. Conclusion.
Note: The review stage may be omitted for decorations, awards, or individual recognition ceremonies.
Other ceremonial activities or combinations thereof, those maybe incorporated

within a framework of review are:
a. Review with decorations, awards and individual recognition ceremonies.
b. Review with change of command, activation, or de-activation of units.
c. Review with retreat.
d. Review with retreat and retirement, decorations, and awards.
e. Review with retreat and change of command, activation, or de-activation

of units.
f. Review and parade with all of the above combinations.
To enable himself to review his own command with a visiting Reviewing Officer
(RO), a commander normally designates an Officer of his command as Troop
Commander (TC). The TC is responsible for the preparation of the troops for the review.
Any of the formations described for the Battalion or Brigade may be used. The
following are the three recommended formations for conducting a review:
a. Battalion Formation with Companies in Line (Figure 1). The

Battalion is composed of a minimum of two (2) Companies with three (3) Platoons per
Company.

Figure 1: Battalion Formation with Companies in Line
Note: Arrow points from the last element to the guide of the next platoon
b. Brigade Formation with Battalions in Line (Figure 2). The

Brigade is composed of a minimum of two (2) Battalions with three (3) Companies each.
However, a minimum of two (2) Companies per Battalion is recommended, provided
that the Companies are always composed of three (3) Platoons each.
Figure 2: Brigade Formation with Battalions in Line
c. Division Formation with Brigades in Line, Battalions in Mass

(Figure 3). The same composition as in Figure 2. The participation of the saluting
battery should be considered as part of the formation whenever possible by the space
available.

Figure 3: Division Formation with Brigades in Line, Battalions in Mass
The formation selected is determined by the space available and other desires of
the commander. Commanders may alter the formation or prescribed distances to meet
local situations. Each unit should be sized uniformly with the tallest men in front and on
the right. Commanders should not cause the leaders to change positions because of
their size. Officers and other key non-commissioned officers, including squad leaders
and other equivalent by virtue of their rank and time in service, should participate in their
deserved positions of dignity.
If possible, the Distinguished Guest/Reviewing Officer (DG/RO) should arrive at

his post (Figure 4) after the staff of the TC has reversed and the TC has faced the
reviewing stand. Upon arrival, the DG/RO shall immediately take his post and refrain
from greeting distinguished spectators until after the review has terminated.
The DG/RO, Military Host (MH), and distinguished persons invited to attend the
review (but not themselves receiving the review), take position facing the troops (Figure
4).

Figure 4: Reviewing Officer Party
When a ceremony is conducted for an individual junior in rank to the MH, the
junior takes a position to the left of the MH unless the MH yields the post of honor to
him. Normally, the honor position is the position on the right and is the DG/RO’s post,
The MH gives the appropriate directive to the TC: IHANDOG AND PAMUNUAN
(PRESENT THE TROOPS) to start the conduct of the review. (This arrangement will not
hold true if the guests and host are seated at the grandstand. The protocol on seating
arrangement shall be followed).
When a civilian or foreign dignitary receives the review, he takes the honor
position to the right of the MH. The MH returns all salutes when, in his judgment, it
would be more appropriate. As a courtesy, the MH should cue the dignitary and
inconspicuously explain the procedures during the conduct of the ceremony. The
position in which the flags are displayed at the rear of the reviewing party corresponds
to the position taken by the individual in the front rank of the reviewing party.
When a ceremony is conducted honoring a foreign official or dignitary entitled to

honors, equivalent honors (salutes) are rendered.
NOTE: If the honors of the dignitary include his or her nation’s anthem, the honors are played in the
following order: four ruffles and flourishes, the foreign anthem, an approximate three-second drum rolls,
and the Philippine National Anthem.
When the ceremony includes decorations, awards, or retirements, the MH should

be senior in rank or position to the highest-ranking individual being honored.
An officer from local staff (usually SGS or OG3) is designated to escort and brief
the members of the reviewing party and to show them their positions.

Since all situations or eventualities relative to various services or units (military
academies, special honor guards, regular AFP units, reserve components, Reserve
Officer Training Corps, and training commands/ centers cannot be foreseen)
commanders can make minor changes to stated procedures. However, with a view
towards preserving the AFP tradition and maintaining consistency, “THEY SHOULD
NOT ALTER NOR MODIFY THE SEQUENCE OF EVENTS OTHER THAN STATED”.
1.5 SEQUENCE OF EVENTS AND INDIVIDUAL ACTIONS
a. REVIEW (STANDARD)
1) FORMATION OF TROOPS.
a) As soon as the troops are ready, the Troop Adjutant (TA)

(from his position near the band) directs IHUDYAT ANG PAGHANDA. The band
immediately sounds ATTENTION CALL to signal the start of the ceremony.
b) Upon hearing the ATTENTION CALL, all Battalion

Commanders (BCs) face about, bring their units to attention and right shoulder arms,
then face front.
c) The TA again directs IHUDYAT ANG TAWAG

ADYUTANTE. The band sounds the ADJUTANT’S CALL, immediately followed by
March music.
d) The BCs give PASULONG, KAD, the troops follow the route
in Figure 5.
e) When the Companies are already perpendicular with their

markers, the BCs command KALIWANG PANIG, KAD. Platoon guides go to Port
Arms then move in front of their respective markers in double time facing the Adjutant.
Upon reaching their position, they halt at predetermined number of steps then execute
Order Arms. When the platoons are already at their markers, BCs command
TALUPAD, TO.

Figure 5: Preparation for Review
(Note: Entrance of troops is optional. The review may start with the troops already in position in front of
the Reviewing Officer. In which case, Attention Call shall be sounded to signal the start of the ceremony.
The Troop Adjutant commands MGA GABAY SUMAHANAY NA, then follow the sequence starting from
f).
f) The TA designates the Alpha Company as the base
company “A” BALANGAY then positions himself midway between the line of troops
and the TC.
g) At the last note of “A” Balangay, the BCs simultaneously

order: TUNTON SA KANAN. This means that all Companies will align with the base
company.
h) The Company Commanders (CC) simultaneously face about

then order: TUNTON SA KANAN.
i) The Platoon Leaders (PL) simultaneously face about and

command: TUNTON SA KANAN, NA. After which, they face to the half left (except the
last PL who faces to the half right) and march directly and align at the right of the first
Squad Leader (last element of the first squad, for the last PL) counting thirteen (13)
steps (close with the 14th step).
j) The PLs align facing the TA former position then face about
immediately after closing on the 14th step, except the last PL who remains facing the
TA’s former position.
k) Immediately, the first PL orders: TATAG, followed by the

second PL up to the last PL who prolongs the word. The PL aligns the platoon by taking
short steps to the right or left as necessary to see down the squad.

l) After giving the prolonged order TATAG, the last PL
executes two (2) left steps as visual reference for the other PLs. Continuously, he will
return to his former position by executing two (2) right steps.
m) After the last PL has executed the two (2) right steps, the
other PLs simultaneously execute left face (right face for the last PL) and march five (5)
half steps (closes on the sixth half step) then face the second squad.
n) Immediately, the first PL orders: TATAG, followed by the

second PL up to the last PL who prolongs the word.
o) After the prolonged order TATAG, all PLs simultaneously

execute left face (right face for the last PL) and march five (5) half steps (closes on the
sixth half step) then face the last squad.
p) Immediately, the first PL orders: TATAG, followed by the

second PL up to the last PL who prolongs the word.
q) After giving the prolonged order TATAG, the last PL

executes two (2) right steps as visual reference for the other PLs. Continuously, he will
return to his former position by executing two (2) left steps
r) After the last PL has executed the two (2) left steps, the
other PLs simultaneously execute right face (left face for the last PL) and march five (5)
steps (close on the sixth step) toward the front edge of the platoon, approximately two
(2) steps forward of the platoon, then face down the line
s) Simultaneously, all PLs command: HANDA, RAP, then

march forward toward the center of the platoon counting five (5) steps and execute right
turn towards his position closing on the fourteenth step (approximately six steps from
the elements).
t) The CC followed by the BC then faces front.
u) The TA now directs: MGA GABAY SUMALUNAN.
v) The BC commands: MGA GABAY SUMALUNAN, KAD,

then faces front.
w) TA reports to TC: Ginoo, handa na po ang talupad.
x) TC acknowledges the salute and says: “SUMALUNAN KA”.
y) As soon as the TA is posted, the TC commands:

“KALUPUNAN SUMALIKOD KO, KAD”.

2) PRESENTATION OF COMMAND AND HONORS.
a) When the DG/RO has halted at his post, the TC faces about
and directs TANGHAL SANDATA.
b) The BCs face about and command: TANGHAL, TA, face the
front and salute together with their respective staff.
c) When the units have completed this movement, the TC

faces about and executes with his staff: PUGAY KAMAY, NA.
d) Upon completion of the presentation and/or honors, the TC

commands his staff: BABA KAMAY, NA, faces about and directs: BABA SANDATA.
e) The BCs and staff terminate their salutes, the BCs face
about and command: BABA, TA. They then face the front.
f) The TC faces to the front.
3) INSPECTION
a) When the TC has faced the reviewing stand, the DG/RO and
MH move forward and halt three steps in front of the TC. Staffs, aides-de-camp, and
orderlies do not normally accompany the inspecting party. However, if the DG/RO is
mounted during the inspection, his personal Color and aide-de-camp should be on
another vehicle.
b) The TC salutes and reports: Ginoo, handa na po ang mga

talupad upang siyasatin (Sir, the troops are ready for inspection). The band begins
to play march music on the first left step of the DG/RO and continues to play until the
DG/RO has returned to his post.
c) The DG/RO acknowledges the salute and the TC escorts the

DG/RO (to be at the center), the MH (to be at the left of the DG/RO) for the inspection of
troops. As they approach the first element of the band, the MH will position at the right
of the TC so that the DG/RO will be nearest the troops. After the last element of the
troops, the MH will position at the left of the DG/RO. When riding a vehicle, the
reviewing party passes between the line of Battalion Commanders and Company
Commanders. When marching, the reviewing party passes between the front rank of the
troops and the Platoon Leaders when companies are in line formation.
d) When the inspection is made by motor vehicle, the

inspecting party enters the vehicle in front of the reviewing stand. The DG/RO enters
first and occupies the left rear position. The vehicle approaching from the left of the TC,

proceeds to the post of the TC and stops. The TC salutes and enters the vehicle,
occupying the right front position.
e) Upon the departure of the inspecting party, the senior staff

officer commands the staff to PAHINGA. After the inspection has been completed, the
senior staff officer commands HUMANDA before the return of the TC.
f) When the reviewing party marches while trooping the line

and is about to pass, the Platoon Leader faces about and commands: HANDA TINGIN
SA KANAN, NA. The elements turn their heads to the right and see the honoree as
they pass by. The Platoon Leader executes eyes left then faces front after the
inspecting party has passed the platoon. Simultaneously, the Battalion and Company
Commander faces front and commands: KALUPUNAN, SUMALIKOD KO, KAD; and
MGA GABAY SUMALIKOD KO, KAD respectively, to witness the inspecting party.
However, if the inspecting party are riding for the trooping the line, the Company
Commander and staff stay put and just execute eyes right. More so, the Platoon Leader
faces front after giving the command HANDA TINGIN SA KANAN, NA.
g) As the inspecting party approaches the Colors, the TC

inconspicuously commands GINOO, ANG MGA WATAWAT, PUGAY KAMAY, NA
(Sir, the Colors, Present Arms) six steps to the Colors and BABA KAMAY, NA
(Ready Front) immediately after the Colors.
h) Upon reaching the last element of the troops, the inspecting

party return to their respective positions using the most direct route.
4) HONORS TO THE NATION
a) When the inspecting party has returned to its post, the TC

faces about and directs TANGHAL SANDATA. The BCs face about and command:
TANGHAL, TA. Each commander then faces front and salutes. When all units have
completed these movements, the TC faces front and commands: PUGAY KAMAY, NA
for himself and his staff. On the execution of the Hand Salute by the TC, the band
begins to play the National Anthem.
b) The inspecting party and all military spectators salute while

the National Anthem is being played.
c) Upon completion of the National Anthem, the TC and staff

terminate their salutes on his command: BABA KAMAY, NA. He then faces about and
directs BABA SANDATA.
d) The BCs terminate their salutes, face about, and command:

BABA, TA then face front.
5) PASS-IN-REVIEW

a) The TC brings his staff behind him, KALUPUNAN,
SUMALIKOD KO, KAD. When the staff has reversed its position, the TC directs PASA
MASID. The band moves to march position.
b) The DG/RO moves forward to acknowledge the salute of the

troops passing before the grandstand.
c) When the Colors pass before the reviewing stand, the band
interrupts the music and plays four ruffles and flourishes. The spectators execute
Hand Salute or the equivalent salute for the civilians.
d) The band continuously plays until the last parade elements

leave the parade ground.
e) When all the troops and floats have cleared the parade
ground, the TC and staff move forward facing the grandstand and halt ten steps in front
of the honoree. The TC salutes and the honoree acknowledges the salute. He may or
may not thank or congratulate the TC and staff.
b. OTHER TYPES OF REVIEW
1) REVIEW WITH DECORATIONS, AWARDS, AND INDIVIDUAL

RETIREMENT.
a) If the inspection is omitted, the TC (following order arms

after the presentation and/or honor) shall command: ANG MGA TAONG
PARARANGALAN AT MGA WATAWAT, PUMAGITNA, KAD. The ceremony then
continues.
b) The procedures mentioned below provide latitude for

recognition of one or a group of retirees of various ranks. However, the local
commanders should consider it appropriate to cause the review to be conducted in the
retiree’s honor when only one distinguished individual is retiring and allow that individual

to participate as the reviewing officer. When the Colors are marched forward the
reviewing officer (retiree) would position himself in front and center of the Colors. After
remarks by the host, the retiree returns to the reviewing officer’s post.
(1) The procedures for the formation of troops,

presentation and honors, and inspection remain the same as previously mentioned.
(2) When the reviewing officer has completed the

inspection and has returned to his post, the TC faces about and directs, ANG MGA
TAONG PARARANGALAN AT MGA WATAWAT PUMAGITNA, KAD.
(3) The persons to be decorated and retirees are formed

initially at the ready line at normal distance behind the last rank of the Color unit. (An
alternate position for these personnel may be six steps to the left and in line with the
reviewing officer. They then join the detachment after the Colors are brought forward.)
They line up from left to right according to the rank of the decoration to be received.
Those persons receiving decorations of the same rank will take positions according to
their military rank. On the command PUMAGITNA, the persons to be decorated shall
execute a Left Face. On the command KAD, they march forward to clear the left rear of
the unit they have joined. They then execute a Column Right, march six steps and
execute a Column Left, halt in a position centered on the Colors, and execute a Right
Face. The last man in the file gives the commands Halt and Right Face.
(4) When unit Colors or Guidons are to be decorated,

they are accompanied by their commanders and shall be positioned in a single rank five
steps in front of the persons to be decorated according to the rank of the decorations to
be bestowed, the highest ranking decoration on the right. The senior staff officer (for the
battalion) or platoon leader (for the company) assumes command in the absence of the
commander.
(5) The staff of the TC on the command PUMAGITNA

executes a Right Face. On the command KAD, the staff marches forward far enough to
provide clearance for the Colors and persons to be honored. The staff then halts and
executes Left Face on command of the rear staff officer.
(6) The TC marches forward and takes his post five steps
in front of, and centered on, the leading element. He faces front and commands:
DESTAKAMENTO PASULONG, KAD. On the command KAD, the band begins to play
march music and continuous playing until the detachment is halted in front of the
reviewing officer. The TC, persons to be honored, and Colors march forward. The TC
commands: DESTAKAMENTO, TO, when he is approximately six steps from the
reviewing officer. He then salutes and reports: Ginoo, narito na po ang mga taong
pararangalan at mga watawat. The reviewing officer returns the salute. The host (local
commander) directs: IHANDOG AND PAMUNUAN.

(7) The TC faces to the right while marching, passes
around the right flank of the persons being honored, and proceeds directly to his post,
two steps in front of and centered on his staff. He then directs: TANGHAL SANDATA.
Unit commanders face about and command: TANGHAL, TA. They then face about and
execute the Hand Salute. The TC then faces front and commands: PUGAY KAMAY,
NA. The TC and his staff come to present arms with the detachment.
(8) Honors to the Nation shall be rendered at this time.

At the last note of the National Anthem, the TC commands (for himself, his staff and
detachment), BABA KAMAY, NA. He then faces about and directs: BABA SANDATA.
Unit commanders terminate their salutes, face about, and command: BABA, TA. The
TC again directs TIKAS PAHINGA. In turn, unit commanders command: TIKAS,
NGA . They then face the front as with the TC.
(9) The reviewing officer accompanied by the MH,

advances by the most direct route to the right front of the line of persons to be honored.
The (command) sergeant major (carrying the awards or certificates) positions himself
one step to the rear and one 15-inch step to the left of the MH. After the citation is read,
the sergeant major immediately steps forward and gives the award to the MH who in
turn gives it to the reviewing officer. After the award has been secured, the sergeant
major returns to his original position to the rear of the MH. The sergeant major moves
with the reviewing officer down the line of the awardees. As soon as the reviewing party
has halted in front of the first awardee, a narrator reads the citation. The narrator
pauses between citations to permit the reviewing officer time to pin the medal on the
person being decorated and move to the next man, or to fasten the streamer on the
staff of the guidon or Colors. As the reviewing officer approaches the Guidon to be
decorated, the bearer executes Present Guidon so the reviewing officer may fasten the
streamer. Color bearer lowers the Color to be decorated far enough for the reviewing
officer to fasten the streamer. The color bearer gathers the Color around the staff so it
won’t touch the ground. He resumes the Carry position after the streamer has been
attached.
(10) When the last award has been presented, the

reviewing officer and his party return to their post. The TC commands his staff to
attention, faces about and directs: TALUPAD HUMANDA. Unit commanders face about

and command: BALANGAY, DA and then face front. The TC faces front and
commands: (loud enough for the band to hear) MGA WATAWAT SUMALUNAN, KAD.
On the command SUMALUNAN, the persons being honored execute Right Face. On
the command KAD, they march forward executing two Column Lefts, halt on line six
steps to the left of the reviewing officer, and execute a Left Face. The last man in file
gives the commands Halt and Left Face. In some cases, the awardees may be given
seats at the grandstand. Also on the command SUMALUNAN, the Colors execute
reverse march. On the command KAD, they return to their original post.
(11) On the command KAD, the band plays marching

drum beats until the Colors are back to their initial position.
c) Retirement Program
(1) Invocation
(2) Reading of Retirement Orders by the Unit Adjutant
(3) Remarks are made at this time. If the honoree

(retiree) is senior, the host (local commander) gives the remarks first then introduces
the honoree (retiree). The TC may be requested to give TIKAS PAHINGA.
(4) After the remarks, the host (local commander) directs,

PASA MASID.
(5) The procedures from this point on are the same as

previously described.
2) REVIEW WITH CHANGE OF COMMAND
(See Section VI: Change of Command)
3) REVIEW WITH RETREAT
a) The Formation of Troops, Presentation of Command and

Honors, Inspection, and Honors To The Nation are the same as previously described.
b) At the completion of the Honors To The Nation, the TC

commands his staff to Order Arms, faces about, and directs: BABA SANDATA. Unit
commanders face about and command: BABA, TA. After its execution, TC directs:
TIKAS PAHINGA. Unit commanders face about and command: TIKAS, NGA. Unit
commanders then face front and assume the Parade Rest position. The TC then
directs: IHUDYAT AND PAGSILONG, faces front, and commands his staff TIKAS
PAHINGA. As soon as the TC and his staff are at parade rest, the band sounds
Retreat. At the conclusion of Retreat, the TC commands his staff to attention, faces the
troops, and directs: MGA TALUPAD HUMANDA. Unit commanders face about and

command: TALUPAD, DA. When the troops are at attention, the TC directs: TANGHAL
SANDATA. Unit commanders face about and command: TANGHAL, TA. When the
units have completed these movements, the TC then faces the reviewing officer and
commands his staff: PUGAY KAMAY, NA. This is the signal for the band to play TO
THE COLORS.
c) When the ceremony is held on a military post, the cannon is

fired once (when applicable and/ or appropriate) after the retreat, and immediately after
the command TANGHAL, TA. While the TO THE COLORS is being played, the flag is
lowered.
d) The reviewing officer, his staff and military spectators stand

at the position of Attention during the sounding of retreat. On the first note of TO THE
COLORS, they salute and hold their salute until the last note is played.
e) On the last note of music, the TC commands: BABA,

KAMAY, NA for himself and his staff, faces about, and directs: BABA SANDATA. As
soon as the troops have executed order arms, the TC directs: PASA MASID.
f) The procedures from this point on are the same as

previously described.

SECTION II
PARADE
2.1 DEFINITION
A parade is a military ceremony wherein a body of troops is formed before its

Commanding Officer or other high-ranking officer for the display of its condition,
members, equipment and proficiency. It includes exercise in the manual of arms, the
report on the members of the various units present or accounted for, the publication of
orders, etc. and ends with a pass in review.
2.2 DISTINCTIVE FEATURES
The preparation and organization of troops for a parade are similar to those for a
review. However, in a parade, since the commander is also the reviewing officer, the
distance between the troops and the commander is greater than that for a review. Other
features are: the band conducts sound off; the inspection is omitted; reports are
rendered; orders are published; and the officers and guidons are marched forward and
centered on the commander. If retreat is scheduled, it is conducted in lieu of Honors To
The Nation. This means that the Retreat is already the HONORS TO THE NATION.
2.3 TYPES OF PARADES AND THEIR SEQUENCE
a. CEREMONIAL BATTALION PARADE
1) Formation of Troops
a) Units are moved to their position on the ready line in the

most convenient manner. The commander prescribes the assembly area, the routes,
sequence, and time of arrival on the line. He and his staff take their post prior to
Adjutant’s call.
Part II / Section II: Parade 123

b) The procedure for moving from the ready line to the final line
is the same as that for a review.
2) Sound Off
a) After the battalion has been formed, aligned, and given

parade rest on the final line, the Adjutant directs: IHUDYAT and assumes the position of
parade rest. He remains facing the formation.
b) At the directive IHUDYAT, the band plays three sound off

chords. At the conclusion of the third chord, the band moves forward playing a march in
quick time. The band executes a left turn to march across the front of the troops. At the
left of the line of the troops, the band countermarches and returns over the same
ground to the right of the line. After passing beyond the right of the line of troops, the
band executes a right turn, countermarches again, and halts in its original position.
When the band has halted, it ceases playing at the next convenient place in the music
and will again play three sound-off chords. (Trooping the line by the band may be
eliminated when ceremonies are conducted indoors during inclement weather and when
space is limited).
Note: Retreat, when scheduled, is integrated at this point. Upon completion of the IHUDYAT chords, the
Adjutant directs: IHUDYAT ANG PAGSILONG and goes back to parade rest. The band plays Retreat (by
the trumpet section). Upon completion of Retreat, the Adjutant comes to Attention and directs, MGA
BALANGAY HUMANDA, then TANGHAL SANDATA. The Adjutant faces about and salutes. The band
plays TO THE COLOR or THE NATIONAL ANTHEM. At the conclusion of To the Color or the National
Anthem, the Adjutant comes to order and faces about and directs: BABA SANDATA. After the last unit
comes to order arms, the Adjutant faces front. The commander and his staff assume PARADE REST,
ATTENTION, PRESENT ARMS, and ORDER ARMS with the Adjutant. The Adjutant’s salute is the signal
for the band to play TO THE COLOR or THE NATIONAL ANTHEM.
3) Honors to the Nation
a) If Retreat is not conducted, the Adjutant (after the band has

completed sound off) assumes the position of attention and directs: MGA BALANGAY
HUMANDA at TANGHAL SANDATA.
b) Unit commanders assume the position of attention, face

about, and command in succession: BALANGAY, DA then TANGHAL, TA. They face
front and salute.
c) When all units are in TANGHAL TA, the Adjutant faces front
and salutes. Band plays the NATIONAL ANTHEM.
d) The Battalion Commander and his staff execute on his

command: PUGAY KAMAY, NA on the first note of the music.
e) Military spectators rise and execute hand salute and its

equivalent for the civilians.

4) Presentation
a) Upon completion of the National Anthem, the Battalion

Commander and his staff execute on his command: BABA KAMAY, NA. The Adjutant
terminates his salute, faces about, and directs: BABA SANDATA.
b) Unit commanders terminate their salute, face about, and

command: BABA, TA, then face front.
c) When all units are at Order Arms, the Adjutant faces about,
salutes and reports: ”Ginoo, handa na po ang patikas”.
d) The Battalion Commander returns the salute and

commands: SUMALUNAN KA. The Adjutant trots forward, passes by the Battalion
Commander’s right, and takes his post as the right flank member of the staff.
5) Manual of Arms
a) After the Adjutant has joined the staff, the Battalion

Commander commands such movements in the manual of arms as he may desire.
b) The commander directs: ”HUMANDA SA PAGSASANAY

SA PAGHAWAK NG SANDATA”. He then in sequence, commands: SA KANANG
BALIKAT, TA; KALIWANG BALIKAT, TA; AGAP, TA; BABA, TA; SIYASAT, TA; and
BABA, TA.
6) Report
a) When the manual of arms has been completed, the Battalion

Commander then directs: TANGGAPIN ANG ULAT.
b) The Adjutant trots forward, halts to his position at the center

of the command and directs: MAG-ULAT. Unit commanders in succession, from right to
left, salute and report: “Ginoo __________ balangay, narito na po lahat o napag-
alaman”. The Adjutant returns each commander’s salute.
c) After receiving the reports, the Adjutant faces front, salutes,

and reports: “Ginoo, narito po lahat o napag-alaman”.
7) Publishing of Orders
a) The Battalion Commander returns the salute and directs:

IPAHAYAG ANG KAUTUSAN .

b) The Adjutant faces about and gives the orders: MAKINIG
SA KAUTUSAN, ANG MGA NAKATALAGA NGAYON, PUNONG PANLARANGAN
(NAME OF OFFICER), PUNONG TAGAPANGALAGA (NAME OF OFFICER), SA
UTOS NI (NAME OF OFFICER), MGA PINUNO, HUMARAP AT PUMAGITNA, KAD.
8) Officers Center March
a) At the last note of PUMAGITNA, all officers from the

Company Commanders to Platoon Leaders including Guidon Bearers, execute Center
Face. After the command of execution of KAD is given, the Officers and Guidon
Bearers march off to the center and halt at predetermined number of steps upon
reaching their designated markers. The senior Company Commander then commands:
MGA PINUNO, RAP, KAD. At the last note of RAP, the Officers and Guidon Bearers
face toward the Battalion Commander’s position and shoves off at the command KAD.
b) When they are approximately 12 paces in front of the

Battalion Commander, the senior Company Commander commands: MGA PINUNO,
TO. At TO, they count silently. At the count of four, they execute the salute and bring
their hands down at seven (Guidon Bearers start to execute the equivalent salute at the
count of three and return same starting at the count of six). The Battalion Commander
acknowledges the salute, then commands: MGA PINUNO, SUMALUNAN, KAD.
c) The group of officers executes about face and shoves off

towards the center of the troops. As they approach the line of their respective positions,
the senior Company Commander commands: MGA PINUNO, TO, RAP, KAD. At the
command TO, they halt, and almost simultaneous with RAP, they face their respective
positions and shove off with the command KAD. At a predetermined number of steps,
they halt to occupy their respective positions and face front at the same time.
9) Pass in Review
a) When all officers have returned to their posts and the band
has stopped playing, the Battalion Commander directs: PASA MASID.
b) The battalion passes in review in the same manner as

prescribed for a review except that the units render honors when they are six steps to
the left of the Troop Commander and staff, and terminate honors when the units are six
steps to the right of the commander of troops and staff. The Troop Commander and
staff then assume the role of the reviewing party at their location on the field.
c) When the last elements of troops have passed the reviewing

stand and executed ready front, the band stops playing.
d) Spectators may rise and applause after the parade is

completed.

b. CEREMONIAL BRIGADE PARADE
1) The brigade is ordinarily formed in line with battalions in mass

formations. The parade is the same as the ceremonial battalion parade with the
following exceptions:
a) The Brigade Commander is substituted for Battalion

Commander, and brigade for battalion, in the description.
b) Across the front of the brigade, the band passes in front of

the line of Battalion Commanders during the sound off.
2) The battalions execute present arms, order arms, parade rest, and
come to attention on the command of execution of their respective commanders.
Reports are made by the Battalion Commanders instead of Company Commanders.
3) At the command of execution KAD, of MGA PINUNO,

PUMAGITNA, KAD the Battalion Commanders, their staff, and Colors close on the line
of Battalion Commanders and staffs. The Company Commanders face to the half right
or half left in marching and close on a line four steps to the rear of the battalion color.
The Guidon Bearers face half right of half left in marching and close on a line four steps
to the back of the Company Commanders. The other officers face the Guidon Bearers.
4) When the officers, Guidon Bearers, and Colors have closed and
faced to the front, the senior battalion commander commands PASULONG, KAD. The
center officer of the leading rank is the guide. On the command of the senior Battalion
Commander, the officers, Guidon Bearers, and Colors halt with the leading ranks six
steps from the Brigade Commander. The commands TANGHAL, TA and HANDA,
RAP are given by the senior Battalion Commander.
5) The Brigade Commander commands MGA PINUNO,

SUMALUNAN (pause), KAD. On the command SUMALUNAN, the Colors execute
reverse march. All others execute about face. On the command of execution KAD, the
officers, Colors, and Guidon Bearers march forward. The senior battalion commander
commands MGA PINUNO, TO so that the rank of Battalion Commanders is on line with
its original position. The senior Battalion Commander then commands SUMALUNAN
(pause), KAD. On the command SUMALUNAN, the Battalion Commanders and staff
face outward, the battalion Color guard executes wheeling movements, and on the
command of execution KAD the color guard marches back to its original position. The
Company Commanders, Guidon Bearers, and other officers face to the half right or half
left in marching and move back to their original positions.
c. STREET PARADE
1) For street parade, troops are formed and marched in the most
convenient manner. Street parade may include military vehicles. Towed or transported

weapons add to the drama of a street parade. Cargo vehicles are included only when it
is desired to increase the size of the display.
2) Practical formations for street parades are:
a) Columns of threes and fours.
b) Two or more columns of threes and fours abreast.
c) Mass formation.
3) The vehicles move in single column of twos, threes, or fours

abreast, as the width of the street permits.
4) In order to keep military units in the same cadence, units should not
march between two bands.
d. EVENING PARADE
1) Organization
The Ceremonial elements shall be composed of the following:
a) One brigade of two battalions (two companies of two

platoons each).
b) Band of not less than 30 members with a band conductor.
c) Two color bearers for the National and unit colors, and two
color guards.

SECTION III
MILITARY HONORS
3.1 GENERAL
a. In the Continental Army, honor guards were used as protective measures

and as a means of showing the improvement in discipline in the newly formed army.
They were probably selected specifically for their sizes and strengths and maybe their
proven prowess in combat. Today, the honor guard formation is considered to be a
special courtesy to visiting dignitaries.
b. Members of the guard are selected for their soldierly appearance and
superior discipline. An Honor Guard consists of a band, Colors, salute battery (when
available and appropriate) and a formation of troops. Honor guards render personal
honors to persons with high military or civilian rank or position upon arrival or departure
from a military command. Honor guards are not a substitute for those ceremonies
appropriate in a review or parade.
c. An Honor Guard should not be so large so as to compromise the

exceptional standards required of honor guards. The minimum size of the company
honor guard should be two (2) platoons and the battalion honor guard should be two (2)
companies. Uniforms will be those prescribed by the Commander of the receiving unit.
d. There shall be a designated military host who will take part in the
ceremony. He briefs the honoree of the sequence of events and advises him of actions
that will take place during the conduct of honors.
e. Prior to the arrival of the person(s) to be honored, the honor guard

commander positions the band, the troops, and salute battery from right to left, in that
order. The troops are formed in line of companies or platoons with the Colors positioned
at the center. When conditions dictate, the salute battery may be located separately but
its control and purpose must not be impaired.
Part II / Section III: Military Honors 130

3.2 DEFINITION OF TERMS
a. Cordon Honors – a type of honors rendered to a guest in lieu of or in

addition to full military honors. This may be in the form of foyer, ramp/plane side,
concourse and side boys honors.
b. Dais – an elevated platform where the honoree and the military host stand
to give distinction and prominence.
c. Honoree – A high-ranking local/foreign military officer or civilian to whom

honors are accorded.
d. Honor Guard – consists of a band, Colors, salute battery (when available

and appropriate) and a formation of troops tasked to render personal honors to persons
entitled upon arrival/departure from a military command or saluting base/station.
e. Honors – ceremonies rendered to local/foreign military officers and

civilian dignitaries as a gesture of courtesy and a tribute to his rank and/or position.
f. Inspection – the close examination or observance of honor guard by

honoree.
g. Military Host – an officer designated to escort and receive the honoree

and advise him of actions that will take place during the conduct of honors.
h. Ruffle and Flourish – a ruffling drumbeat and funfare played in honor of a

high official at a ceremonial reception.
i. Saluting Station – camps, posts, stations, national shrines and other

places where firing of gun salute is authorized.
j. Two-man Guard - a type of honors consisting of two soldiers and an

officer given to civilian or military dignitaries for practical purposes.
3.3 POLICIES
a. Personal Honors
1) Military Officers
a) Only AFP general or flag rank officers in the active service

are entitled to military honors unless otherwise directed by the CSAFP.
b) A retired general/flag officer making an official visit shall

likewise be accorded with appropriate honors.

c) Newly-promoted generals will only be rendered with full
military honors at GHQ, their respective Major Service camps and their own
headquarters.
d) Full military honors will no longer be given to commanders

going to another place/unit located within their headquarters in the same camp/station.
Instead, cordon honors will be appropriate for the occasion.
2) Civilian dignitaries making official visits shall be accorded

appropriate honors during arrival and departure from military installation/station.
3) When two or more persons entitled to honors arrive at or depart

from military installation/station at the same time, each in turn shall be honored if they
arrived successively. However, in cases when the most senior guest has been accorded
honors, no honors shall be accorded to newly arrived junior guests.
4) Should a person entitled to honors arrive at a military installation /

station at the time when honors have already begun, the ceremony shall continue but
the senior officer shall receive departure honors.
5) If the honoree has a personal flag with him, the flag bearer shall be
positioned three steps behind the honoree and shall follow the honoree during the
inspection of troops and return to his original position thereafter.
6) If the honoree is a President or a Head of State, the honoree must

be positioned at least six inches right forward of the host dais.
7) No honors shall be rendered by troops in trenches.
8) Honors shall not be rendered by troops directly engaged in war

campaigns, exercises and disaster relief operations.
9) During personal honors at the same place and in compliment to the

same person, whether civilian or military, guns shall never be fired more than once in a
calendar year, except for a President or Head of State or when International Protocol
requires.
10) In all cases, the national flag must be at full staff when honors are
being accorded.
11) No military honors will be accorded during a national holiday except

for a President or Head of State or when International Protocol requires.

12) No honors will be accorded after the flag retreat and before flag
raising except honors for the President or his designated representative.
13) Philippine National Police and Philippine Coast Guard are not
entitled to military honors.
b. Unit Honors
1) Local Deployment
a) A ceremony shall be conducted to welcome/send off units

arriving/departing for deployment outside unit AOR for a period of not less than six
months.
b) The Commander or his representative (at least two-levels

up) shall be responsible in welcoming/sending off units under his jurisdiction.
2) Foreign Deployment
a) Major Service concerned shall be responsible for the

ceremony in honor of units arriving/departing from/for overseas deployment.
b) The Major Service Commander shall welcome/send off

arriving/departing units of his command.
c) Spouses/parents of deployed personnel shall be invited to

send off or present leis to the officers and men of the departing / arriving unit.
d) The Chief of Staff, AFP or a civilian dignitary may be invited

to welcome/send off units arriving/departing from/for overseas duty.
c. Gun Salute
1) Gun salute shall be under the direction of a commissioned officer.
2) The National Flag shall always be at full staff at the time the salute
is rendered.
3) Gun salute shall only be fired during the conduct of arrival /

departure honors at the following saluting stations / bases:
a) Military Camps / Bases
1) Camp General Emilio Aguinaldo
- GHQ, AFP

2) Fort Andres Bonifacio
-Headquarters Philippine Army

-Headquarters Philippine Marines
3) Villamor Air Base
-Headquarters Philippine Air Force

-Kalayaan Lounge
4) Fort Abad
-Headquarters Philippine Navy
5) AFP Unified Command Headquarters
6) Fort Del Pilar
-Headquarters PMA
7) National Shrines
-Rizal Park
-Libingan ng mga Bayani
-Aguinaldo Shrine
-Corrigidor National Shrine
-Dambana ng Kagitingan
-Capas National Shrine
-Los Veteranos National Shrine
8) Other Places
-Malacañan Palace
-Philippine International Airports\
as directed by CSAFP.
4) The national salute is done by firing 21 guns successively. This

salute is rendered in honor of: the National Flag; the President of the Philippines; Heads
of State; and Former Presidents. During National Heroes Day, the National Flag shall
be displayed at half-staff from reveille to midday at all posts, camps, bases and stations.
Prior to the rendering of honors the band of field music will be played.
d. How Honors Are Rendered
1. The President

a) The President shall be received at the salute base or at the
building where he shall be entertained.
b) A 21–gun salute shall be fired during the arrival/departure

honors.
c) In a situation wherein honors will be rendered to the

President outside of military camps and without military units present in the area, a two-
man Honor Guard shall be present at the bottom steps of the aircraft to render honors.
They shall be led by the most senior military commander in the area. When the
President steps down from the plane, the honor guards are positioned facing each other
and welcome the President by a salute. The left man commands PUGAY KAMAY, NA
(if without arms) or TANGHAL, TA (if with arms) as the President approaches and
commands BABA KAMAY, NA (if without arms) or BABA, TA (if with arms) after the
President passed by them.
d) In case the President was already given full military honors

at the point of disembarkation, the President shall no longer be given full military honors
at the area where the President will be going.
e) In case the President will be rendered full military honors in

the place of engagement, the President will be given cordon honors at the point of
disembarkation.
ARRIVAL HONORS
f) In case the President arrived in front of the troops already

massed and assembled for parade and review in honor of the President, the full military
honors shall be waived to avoid redundancy in rendering honors. Instead, cordon
honors will be appropriate. If the parade and review is to be rendered in another place
of engagement, military honors will be given.

g) Unless otherwise military honors or cordon honors will be
given to the President, a two-man honor guard will always be present at the bottom of
the aircraft and render salute as the President steps down or boards the plane.
h) During the presidential official visit in both Houses of

Congress like in the State of the Nation Address, the President will be accorded cordon
honors before entering the house.
i) During Independence Day celebration, the President will be

accorded full military honors in front of the grandstand.
ARRIVAL HONORS
j) In case the President or Head of State arrives from the

aircraft and exits by the tube of the terminal, a cordon honors will be positioned to
render honor to the President or Head of State.
2) To certain dignitaries – A president of a foreign republic or a

foreign sovereign shall be rendered the honors prescribed in paragraph (a) above
except that the national anthem of his country shall be played first to be followed by the
Philippine National Anthem.
3) To Ex-Presidents and Vice Presidents – The Ex-President and

Vice President of the Philippines shall be rendered the honors prescribed for the
President, except that the flourishes shall be followed by a march in lieu of the National
Anthem and the Vice President shall receive a salute of 19 guns. If no band is present,
the bugles shall sound To the Colors after the ruffles and flourishes.
4) To Ambassadors – Foreign Ambassadors will be given one

military honors during their stay in the country. This will be done during their
presentation of credentials at the Malacañan Palace.
e. Civilian and military dignitaries hereunder shall be rendered salutes

and honors with music (which is considered an inseparable part of the salute and
will immediately follow the ruffles and flourishes without pause):

1) Civilian Dignitaries
RFLS &
RANK GUN SALUTE FLRS MUSIC SIZE
ARRIVAL DEPARTURE
President 21 21 4 Nat’l Anthem Bn
President-elect 21 21 4 Nat’l Anthem Bn
Ex-President 21 21 4 March Bn
A sovereign or head 21 21 4 Nat’l anthem Bn

of state of a foreign
country:
Head of Gov’t 19 19 4 March Bn
Vice President 19 19 4 March Bn
Chief Justice 19 19 4 March Bn
Senate President 19 19 4 March Bn
Speaker of the 19 19 4 March Bn

House of
Representatives
Secretary of National 19 19 4 March Bn
Defense
Undersecretary of 17 17 4 March Coy
National Defense
Note: Provincial governor/municipal mayor hosting military camps will no longer be given
arrival/departure honors during his visit to the camp/base by the unit concerned.
2) Military Officers
RFLS &
RANK GUN SALUTE FLRS MUSIC SIZE
ARRIVAL DEPARTURE
Chief of Staff 19 19 4 Gen March Bn
Vice Chief of Staff 19 19 4 Gen March Bn
General 17 17 4 Gen March Bn
Lt General 15 15 3 Gen March Bn
Major Svc Comdr 15 15 3 Gen March Bn
Major General 13 - 2 Gen March Coy
Brigadier General 11 - 1 Gen March Coy
3.4 PROCEDURES

a. Arrival and Departure Honors (Individual)
1) Full Military Honors
Initially, the honor guard battalion shall be at parade rest. The

Honor Guard Commander (HGC) brings the unit to attention as soon as the honoree
arrives. The honoree is met by the military host, who escorts him in front of the honor
guard battalion and leads him to the dais.
FULL MILITARY HONORS 1
The HGC faces about and commands TANGHAL, TA then faces

about and presents sword together with his staff, while the honoree and military host
execute hand salute.
Appropriate number of ruffles and flourishes shall be played by the

band to be followed by an appropriate music, General’s March or National Anthem as
the case maybe. Gun salute, if any, shall commence with the first note of the ruffles and
shall be evenly distributed until the last note of the music.
After the last note of the music, the HGC carries sword with the
staff then faces about and commands BABA, TA. He faces about and salutes the
honoree, saying “Handa na po and tanod pandangal upang libutin”.
The honoree acknowledges the salute and the HGC carries his
sword and escorts him and the military host for the inspection of the honor guards. As
they approach the Colors, six paces before it, the HGC commands TANGHAL, TA. The
HGC presents sword while honoree and military host execute hand salute for the
Colors. Three steps after the Colors, HGC commands BABA, TA. The HGC executes
carry sword while the honoree and the military host drop their hand salute. They
continue marching toward the last elements. The HGC continues marching with the
honoree and host up to the point where he reels off from the two personages and
proceeds to his position in front of his staff. The honoree and military host march directly
back to their original positions at the dais.

At this point, the HGC faces the honor guard battalion and
commands TANGHAL, TA. He then faces about and executes present sword together
with his staff. The honoree acknowledges the salute and HGC and staff execute carry
sword. The HGC faces about and commands BABA, TA. The HGC executes about
face and salutes the honoree, saying “Tapos na po ang parangal”.
In case the honoree is more than one, the most senior honoree will
be the one at the dais. In case all are of the same rank or category, one will occupy the
dais and the rest will align beside the honoree to be bestowed with honors. During the
inspection they can join the inspection of the troops. They will follow at the back of the
main honoree for the period of the inspection.
During inclement weather, arrival and departure honors will be

waived, except honors to be accorded for the President and Head of State. They will be
accorded with cordon honors, if practicable.
2) Cordon Honors /Honor Guard

In addition to a scheduled honor guard ceremony, a honor cordon
ceremonies will be used during the arrival or departure of the President and certain
dignitaries: welcoming or bidding farewell to distinguished visitors and visiting military
camps. The ceremony consists of a select group of soldiers with characteristics
associated with honor guards, designated to honor and provide security at the
immediate arrival and departure site. This type of honors may also be used for other
government and military officials, and foreign dignitaries, if practicable.
The honor cordon normally consists of two squads, a cordon

commander and a host. The size of the squad is equal to the number of gun salute the
honoree is entitled to. When deemed appropriate, the commander may designate a
band, colors and distinguishing flags.
ARRIVAL HONORS (HONOR CORDON)
a) Arrival
Upon arrival of the craft or vehicle, the cordon is marched at

a position near the exit (ramp) in two columns, centered to the exit, faced to the center
and dressed with about three steps distance between the ranks. As the honored guest
and greeting party depart the immediate vicinity of the exit, and approach within three
steps of the host, the cordon commander commands TANGHAL, TA (if with arms) or
PUGAY KAMAY, NA (if with arms) and the cordon members salute simultaneously.

After the honored guest and all greeting party members have cleared the formation, the
cordon commander commands BABA, TA (if with arms) or BABA KAMAY, NA (if
without arms) and the cordon members come to order arms simultaneously.
b) Departure
The formation for the honor cordon upon departure is

basically the same as that described during arrival. At the approach (about three steps)
of the honored guest and host, the cordon commander commands TANGHAL, TA and
the cordon executes present arms. When the honored guest has entered the
conveyance, the cordon commander commands BABA, TA and remains in place until
the conveyance has departed. If it is an aircraft, the honor cordon exits as soon as the
honoree has boarded the aircraft.
When a band and Colors are part of the arrival or departure

ceremonies, they are positioned accordingly. The band plays appropriate music during
the ceremony. The organizational color is dipped in salute when the honored guest
approaches to within six steps. After he passes, it is returned to the carry positions. As
soon as the guest enters the conveyance ceremony, the colors and distinguishing flags
depart the area with the honor cordon.
b. Arrival and Departure Honors (Unit)
Initially, the unit is formed in mass in front of the grandstand. When the
Guest of Honor / Speaker (GOH) or his designated representative arrives at the
grandstand, the Unit Commander (UC) brings his troops to attention. When the GOH
has taken his seat, the UC brings his troops to present arms and present his troops to
the GOH. The GOH acknowledges the presentation. At this point, the band plays
appropriate march music (everybody in the grandstand should likewise stand). After the
last note of the march music, the UC brings back his troops to attention. The Chaplain
proceeds to the lectern to lead the invocation, afterwards, he returns to his position
(everybody takes his seat after the invocation).
1) Awarding:
The emcee formally announces the start of the awarding. The UC

and unit colors move forward at a predetermined point and halt while the GOH goes
down the grandstand assisted by the host to present the award. The adjutant reads the
citation of the award before it is presented to the UC. The GOH and the host return to
the grandstand after the presentation of award. The UC and unit color proceed back to
their former positions.
2) Speeches:

The GOH is introduced by the host before he proceeds to the
lectern to deliver a welcome address. If previously ordered to bring his troop to parade
rest, the UC brings his unit to attention after the address of the GOH.
3) Recessional:
The UC and his troops sing Pilipinas Kong Mahal. Appropriate

music shall be played by the band thereafter for the recessional.
At this juncture, the spouses/parents proceed toward the troops to

present leis to the officers and enlisted men of the unit. Parent/spouses join their
respective relatives for the dismissal.
Note: Procedures for the send-off ceremony of unit departing for overseas deployment/duty shall be the
same as the welcome ceremony except that the awarding and presentation of leis are omitted in the
program. Likewise, the National Anthem is played by the band instead of a march music during the
presentation of troops.

SECTION IV
COLORS
4.1 DEFINITIONS
a. Colors - The term Colors means the national and positional or

organizational colors.
b. Color - When used singularly, the term Color refers to the National Color
(National Flag).
4.2 THE COLORS AND COLOR
THE COLORS AND COLOR
a. Only the National Color is entitled to a salute by individuals or units.
b. In garrison, the Colors are normally kept at the office or headquarters of

the commanding officer. They are escorted to and from the headquarters or office by
the Color Guard. In the field, the Colors are normally displayed from reveille to retreat in
front of the commanding officer’s tent or command post. During inclement weather, they
are cased and placed in the commanding officer’s office, headquarters, or tent.
Part II / Section IV: Colors 143

c. Individuals or units render honors when passing or are being passed by
uncased Colors. When not part of a formation, individuals salute at a six step distance
from the Colors and hold the salute until they have passed six steps beyond the Colors.
The individual in charge of a formation calls the formation to HUMANDA and
TANGHAL, TA.
d. The Colors may be carried in any formation wherein two or more

companies, honor guards, or representative elements of a command participate.
e. Traditionally, the command Sergeant Major is responsible for the

safeguarding, care, and display of the organizational color. He is also responsible for
the selection, training, and performance of the Color bearers and Color guards.
f. The regulation for individual flags and distinguishing flags for general
officers and other dignitaries is the same as that for organizational colors.
g. During a review, parade, or honor guard ceremony, only one National

Color should be present. The National Color is given the honor position and is carried
on marching, at the right of positional and organizational colors. The organizational
color of the senior headquarters sponsoring the ceremony is carried to the left of the
Major Service flag. The Colors belonging to the headquarters conducting the
ceremonies are positioned in line with and centered on the command. Subordinate
Color-bearing organizations ordinarily carry only their organizational colors (four steps
to the rear of their staff).
h. When the formation of the Colors is en masse, the National Color is

placed in front and at the center of the Color guards. The organizational colors are
placed immediately behind the National Color and arranged according to the seniority of
the units participating in the ceremony.
4.3 SALUTES
a. The National Color renders no salute (dip).
b. The organizational color salutes (dips) in all military ceremonies while the
National Anthem, To the Color, or a foreign national anthem is being played, and
when rendering honors to the organizational commander, an individual of higher grade
including foreign dignitaries of higher grade, and in other cases specified.
c. When marching, organizational colors salute six steps before the person
entitled to the salute. They are returned to the carry position six steps after the person.
4.4 COLOR GUARD

a. The Color Guard consists of two sergeants and two privates. To be
selected as a member of the Color Guard is an honor. The Senior (Color) Sergeant
carries the National Color and commands the Color Guard. He gives the necessary
commands for the movements and for rendering honors.
b. When battalions or brigades carry their organizational colors in a

ceremony as part of a larger command, the battalion or brigade color is carried four
steps to the rear of the staff. A sergeant acts as Color bearer and two experienced
privates, selected by the battalion or brigade command Sergeant Major, act as
members of the Color Guard.
c. The Color guards are formed and marched in one rank at close interval,
the bearer in the center. They do not execute Rear March or About Face. The Color
guards march at the Right Shoulder Arms and execute facing movements by wheeling
to the right or left. The command for a facing movement is, IKOT SA KANAN
(KALIWA), NA. To execute a wheeling movement, the guard nearest the direction of
the turn serves as the pivot point and executes the movement by marching in place and
simultaneously turning in the new direction. Other members shorten their steps and turn
in an arc keeping abreast of each other to maintain alignment. When the movement has
been completed, each member automatically marches in place until the command
TILAP, TO or PASULONG, KAD is given.
d. When passing in review, the Color guards execute Eyes Right at the
prescribed saluting distance on the command of the Color sergeant. The commands are
HANDA TINGIN SA KANAN, NA and HANDA RAP. The organizational color salutes at
the command NA, and resumes the carry position at the command RAP. The guard on
the right flank of the Color Guard does not execute Eyes Right.
e. During ceremonies, the color guards remain at Right Shoulder Arms

except when presenting arms.
f. When not participating in a ceremony and a situation that warrants a

salute by the organizational color occurs, the Color Sergeant commands PUGAY,
WATAWAT. The return to the carry is made at the command HANDA DALA,
WATAWAT.
g. When in formation with the Color Company, and not during a ceremony,
the Color bearers execute at ease and rest, keeping the staff of the Colors vertical. The
Color guards execute the Right Shoulder, Order Arms, and Present Arms with the Color
company. During ceremonies when the Colors are not forward and remarks are to be
made, the Color guards and Color bearers execute Order Arms and Parade Rest on
command of the Color Company Commander. During any ceremony when the units are
At Ease, the Color guards and Color bearers are at Parade Rest.
h. The uniform for color guards should be the same as that of the prescribed
for participating troops.

4.5 RECEIVING OR DISMISSING THE COLORS BY THE COLOR GUARD
a. When receiving uncased Colors on display in the commander’s office, the

Color Sergeant commands TANGHAL, TA and HANDA, RAP. Upon completion of
Order Arms, the Color bearers (without command) secure the Colors. The Color Guard
files outside (guard, National Color, organizational color, guard) and reforms in a line
formation. The Color guards execute Right Shoulder Arms and the Color bearers
assume the carry position.
b. To dismiss the Colors, the procedures are basically the same except that
the Colors are placed back in their stands before executing Present Arms.
MANUAL FOR THE COLOR BEARER/GUARD
4.6 ORGANIZATIONAL
The Color Guard consists of five men. The most senior man is the Color
Sergeant (officer) who commands the guards. The next two senior men are the color
bearers, and the two other men, junior to the color bearers, are the color guards. The
two color bearers are unarmed, and the color guards carry either pistols or rifles. The
senior color bearer carries the National Colors, and the junior color bearer carries the
organizational colors. When only the National Colors is carried, the Color Guard will
have one-color bearer. When organizational colors are carried with the National Colors,
extra color bearers are added in order of color precedence: PHIL ARMY, PHIL AIR
FORCE, PHIL NAVY, PHIL MARINE CORPS.
4.7 FORMATION
The Color guards are formed and marched in one rank at close interval. The
National Color bearer is ALWAYS ON THE RIGHT, with the organizational color bearer
to his left, and the color guard on each side. The Color Guard does not execute to the
Rear March, facing movements, flanking or color movement, or fix bayonets. When any
such commands are executed by the unit to which the Color Guard is attached, except
fix bayonets, the senior color bearer orders an appropriate movement to bring his guard
to proper position.
The Color Guard then executes PALUWAG and PAHINGA with the Color
Company (battalion). However there is no prescribed position of At Ease or Rest for the
Color Guard. When such commands are given to the Color Company (Battalion), the
Color Guard executes TIKAS, PAHINGA.
4.8 MANUAL OF THE COLORS

a. Order Color - At Order color, the lower ferrule rest on the deck, touching
the outside edge of your shoes just opposite your little toe. The staff is grasped in the
“V” formed by the thumb and fingers of your right hands, back of the hand to the right
front. Your right elbow should be close to your side so the forearm will help support the
staff. The staff rests in the hollow of your right shoulder in a vertical position. The flat
side of the spearhead is toward the front. The rest of your body is at attention. Color
guards armed with the rifle are at Order Arms (both rifles at the right side) when the
Colors are at the order.
b. Carry Color from Order Color - The command is HANDA DALA,

WATAWAT. On the command, HANDA DALA, change the grasp on the staff so as to
grasp it from the rear between the thumb and fingers of the right hand, fingers joined
and wrapped around the staff. On the command of execution, WATAWAT, raise the
staff smartly with your right hand to a point where the lower ferrule is just above the
sling socket. Grasp the staff just above the lower ferrule with your left hand to steady it.
Seat the lower ferrule in the sling socket. As the ferrule is seated, allow the right hand to
slide down the staff to a point where your thumb is directly in front of your chin. Grasp
the staff firmly with the right hand and return the left hand to the left side. The right arm
should be parallel to the deck, with the staff inclined slightly forward. Color Guards
armed with rifles execute Right and Left Shoulder Arms on the command WATAWAT
so that the rifles are on the outboard shoulder.
c. Order Color from Carry Color - The command is BABA, WATAWAT.

On the preparatory command, BABA, grasp the staff just above the sling socket and
remove the ferrule. On the command of execution, WATAWAT, lower the ferrule to a
point above the deck along the outside of the right shoe, releasing the left hand and
regrasping above the right. Relax the right hand so the staff will slide down between the
thumb and fingers. Then change the position of the color and right hand as it is held at
order color and smartly return the left hand to the left side.
d. Present Color from Order Color - The command is TANGHAL,

WATAWAT. On the preparatory command, TANGHAL, change the grasp of the right
hand on the staff so as to grasp it firmly from the rear between the thumb and fingers
joined and wrapped around the staff. At the same time, the National Color bearer will
raise the staff smartly with the right hand to a point where the lower ferrule is just above
the sling socket. Grasp the staff with the left hand just above the lower ferrule to steady
it. Seat the lower ferrule in the sling socket, allowing the right hand to slide down the
staff so the right thumb is in front of the chin, and grasp the staff firmly with the right
hand. The right arm is parallel to the deck, staff inclined slightly forward. On the
command of execution, TA, the organizational color bearer will execute the same
movements as the National Color bearer. Both color bearers will then return their left
hand to the left side. The Color guards execute Present Arms (Hand Salute if armed
with the pistol) on the command of TANGHAL, TA.
e. Dipping of the Organizational Colors while at Present Arms -

Organizational Colors are dipped during the playing of the National Anthem, morning

and evening colors, ruffles and flourishes, General or Admiral’s March and gun salutes.
THE NATIONAL COLOR DOES NOT DIP. Dipping the color is executed on the first
note of the music by smartly extending the arm(s) to the front, lowering the staff. It is
terminated on the last note of the music or following the last round of the gun salute by
smartly raising the staff so the right thumb is directly in front of the chin and the staff is
inclined slightly to the front.
f. Order Color from Present Color - The command is BABA, WATAWAT.

On the command of execution, WATAWAT, come to the position of Order Color as
previously described. The color guards execute arms on the command of Order Arms.
g. Rests With the Color - The color bearer and color guards utilize the
position of Parade Rest in lieu of At Ease or Rest. The command is given only when at
Order Color, given by the senior color bearer or the Commander of the Color Company
(battalion). It is executed in one count. On the command of execution PAHINGA,
smartly place the left foot twelve inches to the left of the right foot, heels on line, legs
straight without stiffness, weight on both legs. At the same time, place your left hand at
the small of the back, just below the belt. The fingers are extended and joined. The
thumb is along the hand and the palm is to the rear. The elbow will be on line with your
body. Color guards execute Parade Rest as prescribed for the manner in which they are
armed. On the command of execution, HUMANDA, they will resume the position of
Order Color (Order Arms for the Color Guard).
h. Eyes Right (Left) from Order or Carry Colors - The command is

HANDA KANAN (KALIWA) TINGIN, NA. It is executed only when halted at Order Color
or marching at Carry Color. The right (left) man in the Color Guard or the National Color
bearer, does not execute this command.
1. While Halted at Order Color - On the command of execution,

TINGIN, smartly turn the head and eyes to the right (left) 45 degrees.
2. While Marching at Carry Color -Both the preparatory command

and the command of execution will be given as the right (left) foot strikes the deck. On
the command of execution, TINGIN, turn the head and eyes to the right (left) 45
degrees as the left (right) foot strikes the deck. If the person being saluted is entitled to
a salute by the organizational color, the organizational color bearer also lowers the staff
smartly to the front by straightening the right arm.
i. Order or Carry Colors from Eyes Right (Left)
1. While Halted at Order Color- During a review, when the reviewing

officer troops the line, the command, HANDA, RAP, is not given. Each member of the
Color Guard executing Eyes Right (Left) will follow the progress of the reviewing officer
with his head and eyes until they are at the front, at which time the movement is
terminated.

2. While Marching at Carry Color - The command is HANDA RAP.
Both the preparatory command and the command of execution will be given as the left
(right) foot strikes the deck. On the command of execution, RAP, smartly turn the head
and eyes to the front as the right (left) foot strikes the deck. If the organizational color
bearer lowered the organizational color he will smartly raise the staff up as he turns his
head to the front.
4.9 MOVEMENT OF COLOR GUARD
To face the color guard to the right or left, the command is PIHIT SA KANAN
(KALIWA), KAD. It may be executed while halted, marking time or marching. On the
command of execution, KAD, with the right (left) flank man acting as a stationary pivot,
the Color Guard inclines to the right (left) until they face the new direction. To face the
Color Guard to the rear, the command is WATAWAT, PALIT LUNAN, and KAD. It may
be given while halted, marking time or marching. When marking time or marching, the
command is given as the left foot strikes the deck. The Color Guard then takes one
more step at mark time, or forward, and then executes the following movements:
1. The right flank color guard takes two steps forward, faces to the left
marching, taking one full step and three half steps, faces to the left marching, and takes
two steps in the new direction. He marks time until all are abreast.
2. The senior color bearer faces to the left marching, taking one full step, and
faces to the left while marking time. He marks time until all are abreast.
3. The junior color bearer takes one step forward, faces to the right
marching, takes one full step and one step that places the left foot directly beside the
right, faces to the right marching and takes one step in the new direction with the right
foot. He then marks time until all are abreast.
4. The left flank color guard takes one step forward, faces to the right as in
marching, taking one full step and three half steps, faces to the right marching, and
takes one step in the new direction. He marks time until all are abreast.
5. Upon completion of movement by the color guards, they mark time until
the senior color bearer commands, WATAWAT, HINTO or PASULONG, KAD.
4.10 RECEIVING THE COLORS
1. The company is marched to the front of the Battalion Headquarters, in

column, and the Company Commander commands, BALANGAY, HINTO; BABA, TA;
HARAP SA KALIWA, RAP.
2. The Company Commander commands the Color Guard TANGGAPIN

ANG MGA WATAWAT.

3. The Color Guard marches within three paces from the Battalion Adjutant
and Sergeant Major, halts, and executes Order Arms upon the command of the senior
color bearer.
4. When the Adjutant is ready to deliver the Colors, the senior color bearer
orders TANGHAL, TA. On the command of execution, TA, the color bearers execute
Hand Salute.
5. The Adjutant steps to his left oblique and transfers the National Color to
the senior color bearer, who terminates his salute in time to receive the Color at the
position of Carry Color. The Adjutant then steps back to his original position and
salutes.
6. Upon the Adjutant’s salute, the Sergeant Major steps to his right oblique
and transfers the organizational color to the junior color bearer who has terminated his
salute with the senior color bearer. The junior color bearer receives the Color at the
position of Carry Color. The Sergeant Major then steps back to his original position and
salutes.
7. When the Sergeant Major salutes, the senior color bearer commands
BABA, TA. The Adjutant and Sergeant Major terminate their salutes as the Color Guard
executes Order Arms.
8. The Color Guard executes Carry Colors, and the senior color bearer then
marches the Color Guard to the Color Company.
9. The Color Guard approaches and halts 10 paces in front of and facing the
Company Commander. It then executes Order Color.
10. The Company Commander faces about and orders TANGHAL, TA, faces
about again, and salutes. The Color Guard executes TANGHAL, TA (Hand Salute if
armed with pistols) with the Company then the color bearer executes Carry Color.
11. The Company Commander terminates his salute, faces about and
commands BABA, TA; the Color Guard executes Order Color as the Company
terminates its Present Arms.
12. The Company Commander faces about and orders MGA WATAWAT,
SUMALUNAN. When the Color Company is in column, the post of the guard is six
paces behind it.
13. When the Color Company joins the battalion, the Color Guard takes its
appropriate post in the battalion formation. When the Color Battalion joins the regiment,
the Color Guard takes its appropriate post in the regimental formation.

14. When in formation, the Color Guard executes At Ease and rests with the
Color Company.
4.11 RETURNING THE COLORS
1. The company is halted in front of the Battalion Headquarters in line. The

company commander commands, BABA, TA; HARAP SA KALIWA, RAP.
2. The Company Commander gives the command, IRETIRO ANG MGA

WATAWAT.
3. The guard marches from his post and halts 10 paces in front facing the
Company Commander. They then execute Order Arms.
4. The company then executes Present Arms in the same manner previously
described.
5. The senior color bearer marches and halts the guard three paces in front
of the Adjutant and Sergeant Major, who have taken positions near the office or
quarters of the organizational commander in time to receive the colors. The guards
remain at Carry Colors.
6. When the Color Guard halts, the Adjutant and Sergeant Major salute. The
Sergeant Major steps to his right oblique and receives the organizational color from the
junior color bearer. He then steps back to his original position.
7. When the Sergeant Major is back in his position, the adjutant step to his
left oblique and receives the National Color from the senior color bearer. He then steps
back to his original position.
8. When the Adjutant is in position, the senior color bearer commands,

TANGHAL, TA. On the command of execution, TA, the Adjutant and Sergeant Major
face about and march to the office or quarter of the Commanding Officer, where they
deposit the colors without further ceremony.
9. When the colors are out of sight or six paces away, the senior color bearer
commands BABA, TA and marches them back to the Color Company. The Company
Commander marches the company back to its area.

SECTION V
GUARD MOUNTING
CEREMONIAL GUARD MOUNTING
5.1 INFORMAL
5.1.1 SEQUENCE OF ACTIVITIES
a. The Sergeant of the Guard forms the guard by commanding HUMANAY.

The Relief Commander falls in so that the guard is three steps in front and centered on
the Sergeant of the Guard. Each relief forms at normal interval to the left of its
respective commander, sentinels form in the order of their assigned post (one, two,
three, etc.), the Sergeant of the Guard orders inspection of arms by the commands
SIYASAT TA, AGAP TA, BABA TA (Fig 2).
b. If an officer has been detailed as Commander of the Guard, the Sergeant

of the Guard faces about and reports “Nandito na pong lahat.” Salutes are exchanged.
After completing the report, the Sergeant of the Guard faces about, faces half right in
marching, and marches by the most direct route to a position directly behind the
Commander of the Third Relief at normal distance (Fig 2).
c. If an officer has not been detailed as Commander of the Guard, the

Sergeant of the Guard takes three steps forward and assumes the position of the
Commander of the Guard (Fig 2).
d. When the Officer of the Day arrives, the Commander of the Guard reports
“Narito na pong lahat.” They exchange salutes.
Part II / Section V: Guard Mounting 152

Fig 1: Legend for Formation of Guards Fig 2: Formation for Informal Guard Mounting
e. Marching to Center
The Officer of the Day commands PINUNO AT MGA KAWAL

PUMAGITNA, KAD. On the command PUMAGITNA the Non-Commissioned Officer
(NCO) farthest to the rear commands the other NCOs SA KANANG BALIKAT, TA. On
the command KAD, the Commander of the Guard marches forward and halts three
steps in front of the Officer of the Day. The NCOs march forward and execute column
left without command when on a line three steps to the rear of the Commander of the
Guard. The NCO in the rear commands the other NCOs to halt and face to the right (at
Right Shoulder Arms) when they are centered on the Commander of the Guard (Fig 3).
Fig 3: Marching to Center
f. After the Commander of the Guard and the NCOs halt and are in position,
the Officer of the Day marches forward, halts at normal distance in front of the
Commander of the Guard and designates PINUNO NG TANOD. He then faces half right

in marching and marches around and to the rear of the Commander of the Guard. He
halts at normal distance in front of the right flank NCO and designates SARHENTO NG
TANOD. He then faces half right in marching and marches around and to the rear of the
Commander of the Guard. He faces to the right in marching, takes two steps, halts,
executes a left face, and designates PINUNO, PANGATLONG PAMALIT. He moves to
the remaining NCOs in the same manner and designates PINUNO PANGALAWANG
PAMALIT and PINUNO UNANG PAMALIT. He then faces about, marches by the most
direct route to his post, halts and faces about again (Fig 4). If an officer is not present as
commander of the guard, the Officer of the Day designates the right flank NCO,
PINUNO NG TANOD.
Fig 4: Designation of Personnel
g. Return to Post
The Officer of the Day commands SUMALUNAN. At this command, the

Commander of the Guard and NCO face about, march to their designated post, and halt
without command. The Sergeant of the Guard commands the relief commander to
BABA, TA and HARAP SA LIKOD, RAP. If an officer has not been detailed as
Commander of the Guard, the First Relief Commander gives these commands (Fig 5).

Fig 5: Return to Posts
h. Inspecting the Guard
1) The Officer of the Day commands HUMANDA SA PAGSISIYASAT. At

this command, the Commander of the Guard, without saluting, faces about and
commands PABUKANG TALUDTOD, NA. Ranks are opened and dressed. When the
Commander of the Guard has taken his post, the Officer of the Day inspects the guard.
2) The Officer of the Day orders sentinels who are not presentable for
guard to fall out and return to quarters. Supernumeraries, if any, replace the men who
have fallen out.
3) After inspecting the guard, the Officer of the Day resumes his
original position and commands DALHIN ANG MGA TANOD SA BAHAY TANURAN.
Salutes are exchanged. The Commander of the Guard faces to the left and commands
LAPIT TALUDTOD, KAD. He then moves to his position six steps in front of and
centered on the guard, faces the guard and commands HARAP SA KANAN, RAP;
KANANG BALIKAT, TA. He positions himself at the head of the left file at normal
distance and marches the guard to the guardhouse.
i. Relieving the Old Guard
Before the new guard arrives at the guardhouse, the old guard is formed
in a line formation with two or more reliefs. The Commander of the Old Guard positions
himself six steps in front of and centered on the guard. When the new guard is six steps
from the left flank of the old guard, the Commander of the New Guard commands
HANDA, TINGIN SA KANAN, NA. He faces back to the front and renders the proper
salutes. When the new guard has cleared the right flank of the old guard, the
commander of the new guard commands HANDA, RAP. The Commander of the Old
Guard faces about, commands BABA, TA and faces back to the front.

j. Formation of the Old Guard and the New Guard at the Guardhouse.
After the new guard executes HANDA, RAP, the Commander of the
Guard commands KANANG PANIG, KAD. At the command KAD he positions himself
six steps in the rear of and centered on his guard. He halts the new guard when it is in
line with and six steps to the right of the old guard. Then he commands BABA, TA;
HARAP SA LIKOD, RAP. The left flank man, first relief, verifies six steps interval, dress
left dress. He aligns his guard as shown in Fig 6a.
Fig 6.a : Formation of the Guard at the Guard House
k. Presenting the New and the Old Guard
When the new guard is in position, the commander of both guards face
about and commands TANGHAL, TA. Then they face each other and exchange
salutes, face toward their respective guards, command BABA, TA, and face back to the
front.
l. Presenting the Guards to the Officer of the Day
a. After the new guard has been presented to the old guard, the new
and old Officers of the Day take their positions 18 steps in front of and centered on their
respective guards. Commanders of both guards face about, command TANGHAL, TA;
face back to the front and salute their respective officers of the day.
b. After exchanging salutes, both commanders face about, command

BABA, TA and face back to the front. When both have faced back to the front, the
officers of the day face each other and the New Officer of the Day salutes the Old
Officer of the Day. After saluting each other, both officers of the day face their
respective guards.

m. Disposition of the New and Old Guards
a. After both officers of the day have faced their guards, the New
Officer of the Day commands ISALUNAN ANG UNANG PAMALIT. The new
commander salutes the Officer of the Day, faces about, and commands TIWALAG. The
guard reports to the guardhouse and the Commander of the Guard for instruction on
posting his relief.
b. The Old Officer of the Day commands TIWALAG ANG MGA

TANOD. The old commander salutes the Old Officer of the Day, faces about and
commands PAHINGA. He then contacts the new commander and conveys any
instruction and others.
(a) If the old guard was furnished from one company, the
Commander of the Old Guard marches the guard to the company area and dismisses it
by commanding SIYASAT, TA; AGAP, TA; TIWALAG.
(b) If the guard was furnished from more than one company, the
commander of the old guard marches the guard detail to the company area and
dismisses it, in accordance with the above.
(c) After relieving the third relief of the old guard, the
Commander of the Relief reports to the Commander of the Guard. The commander of
the new guard inspects the relief and orders the Relief Commander to march the relief
to the company area and dismiss it. Salutes are exchanged. The relief is dismissed in
accordance with the above.

5.2 Formal
5.2.1 SEQUENCE OF ACTIVITIES
a. Assembly of Band
The band takes its place on the parade ground at a point where its left
flank 12 steps to the right of where the right flank of the guard will be. When the
Adjutant is sure that the guard is ready to march onto the parade ground, he signals the
band to sound the Adjutant’s Call.
b. Assembly and Forming the Guard
1) The Guard Details are formed as prescribed in paragraph 5.1.b of

Informal Guard Mounting. When assembly sounds, each guard detail is marched to the
point of assembly of the parade ground and reports to the Sergeant of the Guard.
2) The Guard Details are assembled and formed into a platoon. If

there are more than 14 men per rank, the guard is divided into two platoons.
3) The Assistant Sergeant of the Guard takes his post three steps in
front and centered on the second. The remaining NCOs, if any, form on the left flank to
equalize the number of men in each rank. After the platoons are formed, the Sergeant
of the Guard faces the guard to the right.
c. Marching the Guard to the Parade Ground
Fig 6.b : Marching the Guard to the Parade Ground
1) Upon the Adjutant’s Call, the band plays march music. The
Adjutant, with the Sergeant Major on his left, marches forward on the first note of the
music.

2) The Sergeant of the Guard takes his post three steps to the left of
the left file and centered on the guard. He commands KANANG BALIKAT, TA at the
first note of the Adjutant’s Call and marches the guard in column onto the parade
ground. He approaches the parade ground from a direction near to the final line which
the guard will form. He halts the guard when the head of the column is 12 steps from
the left flank of the band and centered on the Sergeant major. At this time, the band
stops playing. The Sergeant of the Guard faces to the right and, if appropriate
commands BABA, TA; HARAP SA KALIWA, RAP.
d. Dressing the Guard
The Sergeant of the Guard and the Assistant Sergeant of the Guard, if
there are two platoons, dress the guard.
e. Sergeant of the Guard
1) When the Sergeant of the Guard commands HANDA, HARAP, the

Commander of the Guards positions himself six steps in the rear of the right flank man
of the rear flank. (If there are two platoons, the Assistant Commander of the Guard
takes his post behind the second platoon in the same position as prescribed for the
Commander of the Guard.) The Sergeant of the Guard faces about and reports to the
Sergeant major, “Lahat po’y narito” or”__________ ang wala.” Salutes are
exchanged and the Sergeant Major commands SUMALUNAN. The Sergeant of the
Guard faces about, faces half right in marching, and marches to his post. He halts at
normal distance directly behind the Commander of the Third Relief.
2) If an Assistant Sergeant of the Guard is present, he executes the

movement cited above at the command SUMALUNAN, and posts himself directly
behind the Commander of the Third Relief. The Sergeant of the Guard positions himself
behind the Assistant Sergeant of the Guard at a normal distance (Fig 7).
Fig 7: Formation of Two Platoons

f. Sergeant Major’s Report
1) After commanding SUMALUNAN, the Sergeant Major faces about

and reports to the Adjutant, “Lahat na po’y narito” or “______________ ang wala”.
They exchange salutes. The Sergeant Major faces about, marches to his post and halts
at normal interval to the left of left flank men of the first rank of the second platoon.
2) When the Sergeant Major has finished his report and has faced
about, the Commander of the Guard marches from his position in the rear of the guard
around its right flank to his post six steps in front of and centered on the guard. If there
are two platoons, the Assistant Commander of the Guard, if present, takes his post in
front of the second platoon (Fig 7).
g. Marching to Center
1) The Adjutant commands PINUNO (MGA PINUNO) AT PINUNONG

HINDI HIRANG, NA. The procedures for marching to center is the same as in
paragraph 5.1.e of Informal Guard Mounting except that when there are two
commanders of the guard, the senior is designated “Punong Tanod” and the junior
“Pangalawang Punong Tanod.”
2) If there are two Sergeants of the Guard, the senior is designated

TANDES NG TANOD and the junior PANGALAWANG TANDES NG TANOD. The post
of the Assistant Sergeant of the Guard is the position of the guide for the second
platoon.
h. Return to Post
After returning to his post, the Adjutant commands SUMALUNAN. Posts

are taken as directed in paragraph 5.1.g of Informal Guard Mounting (Fig 8).
Fig 8: RETURN TO POSTS
i. Inspecting the Guard

1) During Formal Guard Mounting, the Adjutant, instead of the Officer
of the Day, inspects the guard.
2) After the Officer(s) and NCOs have taken their posts, the Adjutant
commands HUMANDA SA PAGSISIYASAT.
3) During the inspection, he selects the orderlies and color sentinels

and orders men who are not prepared for guard to fall out and return to their
organization. Substitutes for men who have fallen out report to the commander of the
guard at the guardhouse.
a. The band plays during the inspection.
Fig 9: OFFICERS AND NON-COMMISSIONED OFFICERS TAKING THEIR POSTS
j. Closing Ranks
1) After the inspection, the Commander of the Guard orders the guard
to close ranks and returns to his original post. If there is an assistant commander of the
guard, he orders the second platoon to close ranks after it has been inspected. Then he
returns to his post in front of the second platoon.
2) The Adjutant takes his post 35 steps in front of, centered on, and
facing the guard.
3) The New Officer of the Day posts himself 36 steps to the rear of the
Adjutant.
4) The Old Officer of the Day posts himself three steps to the right of
the New Officer of the Day.
k. Sound Off

1) The Adjutant commands TANOD, HANDA; TIKAS PAHINGA;
IHUDYAT. Then he executes Tikas Pahinga. (The Commander of the Guard and
Assistant Commander of the Guard, shall not repeat any preparatory commands given
by the Adjutant at this time).
2) At the command IHUDYAT the band plays the sound off, then
moves forward playing. It passes to the left of the line between the commanders of the
guard, the Adjutant and then back to its post on the right where it halts and plays the
sound off again (Fig 10A, Fig 10B).
Fig 10A: SOUND OFF
3) While the band is sounding off, the Officers of the Day stand at
attention.
Fig 10B: SOUND OFF
l. Adjutant’s Report
The Adjutant commands TANGHAL, TA, faces about toward the New
Officer of the Day, salutes, and reports “Ang Tanod Ay Nakahanay Na Po.”
m. Marching In Review
1) The New Officer of the Day returns the salute and directs the
Adjutant PASA MASID. The Adjutant faces about and commands BABA, TA; HARAP
SA KANAN. At the command RAP the guard executes the movement. The band faces

to the right, marches to a position where its rear rank is approximately 24 steps in front
of the leading platoon, and faces to the leader of the first platoon who is the
Commander of the Guard. The Sergeant Major maintains his position behind the men in
the left file when there is one platoon (Fig 11A) and behind the rear left file of the
second platoon when there are two platoons (Fig 11B).
Fig 11A: March in Review, One Platoon
Fig 11B: March in Review, Two Platoons
2) The Adjutant commands KANANG BALIKAT, TA; PASULONG,

KAD.
3) When the playing band and the guard march past the Officer of the
Day (Fig 11), the guide of the first platoon halts 24 steps behind the band during the
march in review.

4) When the Adjutant is six steps from the Officer of the day, he
commands HANDA, TINGIN SA KANAN, NA.
a) When there is only one platoon, the Officer of the Guard, the
Adjutant, and the Sergeant Major execute the Hand Salute on the command NA and
hold it until the Sergeant Major passes six steps beyond the Officer of the Day. Then the
Adjutant commands HANDA, RAP.
b) When there are two platoons (Fig 11B), the Adjutant

commands HANDA, TINGIN SA KANAN, NA, for the first platoon. He commands
HANDA, RAP to the first platoon when the last rank is six steps beyond the officer of
the day. The Assistant Commander of the Guards commands HANDA, TINGIN SA
KANAN, NA for the second platoon. He commands HANDA, RAP, when the last rank
of the platoon is six steps beyond the Officer of the Day. The Adjutant and the
Commander of the Guard salute with the first platoon; the Assistant Commander of the
Guard and the Sergeant Major salutes with the second platoon.
5) While the guard is marching in review, the Officer of the Day stands
at Attention.
a) The New Officer of the Day returns the salutes of the

Adjutant and the Commander of the Guard. He salutes only once because the adjutant
and the Commander of the Guard salute together.
b) When there are two platoons, the Officer of the Day does not
return the salute of the Commander of the Guard.
6) After the band passes the Officer of the Day, it turns out of column
to the left and positions itself in front of and facing the Officer of the Day 18 steps from
where the left flank of the guard passes. It continues to play until the guard leaves the
parade ground.
7) The Adjutant steps out of column and halts when he is 25 steps

beyond the Officer of the Day. The Sergeant Major steps out of column and halts
abreast of the Adjutant and three steps to the left. The Adjutant and Sergeant Major
then face each other, salute, and leave.
8) The Commander of the Guard marches the guard to the

guardhouse without changing his position in the formation.
9) If the guard consists of two platoons, the commander of the guard

halts it and forms it into one platoon. The Assistant Commander of the Guard marches
behind the last man in the left file. The Assistant Sergeant of the Guard marches in the
rear of the right file.

10) The Officer of the Day face each other and salute. The Old Officer
of the Day gives his orders to the New Officer of the Day.
n. Formation of the New and Old Guard at the Guardhouse
1) The Old Guard is formed at the guardhouse as prescribed in Fig

12A. If field music has been authorized, it forms three steps to the right of the old guard.
The field music of the new guard forms three steps to the right of the new guard (Fig
12B).
2) Relieving the old guard at the guardhouse is in accordance with

paragraphs 5.1.1 of Informal Guard Mounting.
Fig 12.A: Formation of Guards
Fig 12.B: Formation of Guards

5.3 NORMAL GUARD MOUNTING
5.3.1 GENERAL
Guard mounting ceremony has been a tradition in military organizations that

formalize the relieving of the outgoing and the incoming guards for the day. Proper
accounting, punctuality and inspection of the incoming and outgoing guards are
observed to see to it that they are ready to take and leave their post respectively.
5.3.2 ORGANIZATION
The ceremony is composed of the following elements:
a. Outgoing Officer of the Day

b. Incoming Officer of the Day
c. Outgoing Commander of the Guard
d. Incoming Commander of the Guard
e. Assistant Commanders of the Guard
f. Outgoing Sergeant of the Guards.
g. Incoming Sergeant of the Guards
5.3.3 FORMATION
Initially, there are two platoons in line formation. The first platoon consists of the
incoming guards. The second platoon, the outgoing guards. The second platoon forms
three paces from the left flank of the first platoon. At the right flank of each platoon are
the Sergeants of the Guards covering each other. The Assistant Commanders of the
Guards position themselves three paces to the front from the center of their respective
platoons. Commanders of the Guards form six paces to the front from the center of their
respective platoons. Six paces to the front from the center of the Commanders of the
Guards is the Outgoing Officer of the day, and three paces to the front of the outgoing
Officer of the day is the position of the Incoming Officer of the day. (See illustration)
5.3.4 PROCEDURE
a. Before the Guard Mounting ceremony, the incoming guards reports to

their respective relieves for proper dissemination and instructions. As soon as the
incoming and outgoing guards are through, the Outgoing Officer of the day calls for the
guards to fall in. The command is: HUMANAY.
b. When the guards are in proper formation as prescribed in par 5.3-3, the
Assistant Commanders of the Guards of each platoon face about to account for their
respective platoons. After which, they face about, execute Hand Salute and report to
their respective Commanders of the Guards, “Pinuno, narito na po lahat” or “Pinuno,
name of unaccounted guards, wala di napag-alaman”. The Commanders of the
Guards acknowledge the salute and direct their assistants to take post, SUMALUNAN

KA. The Assistant Commanders of the Guards then position themselves behind the
Sergeants of the Guards of the last squads of each platoon, respectively. (See
Illustration)
c. As soon as the Assistant Commanders of the Guards have taken their

posts, the Commanders of the Guards face about. The Incoming Commander of the
Guard executes Hand Salute and reports to the Officer of the Day, “Pinuno, narito na
po lahat” or “Pinuno, name of unaccounted guards, wala di napag-alaman”. The
Outgoing Officer of the Day acknowledges the salute. After acknowledging the salute,
the Outgoing Commander of the Guard renders his report in the same way as the
Incoming Commander of the Guard did and will be acknowledged by the Outgoing
Officer of the day.
d. The Outgoing Officer of the Day directs the Commanders of the Guards to
prepare the platoons for inspection, HUMANDA SA PAGSISIYASAT. After the
command, the commanders of the guards face about and bring the platoon to open
ranks, PABUKANG TALUDTOD KAD. The commanders of the guards proceed in front
of the sergeant of the guard of the first squad of each platoon respectively, face about
and wait for the inspecting officer.
e. The inspecting Officer then proceeds in front of the Commander of the

Guard (The inspecting Officer may be the Incoming or Outgoing Officer of the Day. To
minimize time, the Incoming and Outgoing Officer of the Day may inspect each platoon
at the same time). The Commander of the Guard executes Hand Slute and reports,
“Ginoo tanod pulutong, name of commander of the guard namumuno, handa na
po sa pagsisiyasat”. When acknowledged, he comes to attention and prepare for
inspection. After his turn, he assists the inspecting officer in inspecting the platoon.
f. After the inspection, the inspecting Officer orders the commanders of the
guard to report all violations for appropriate action then proceeds to his original position.
The Commander of the Guard then brings the platoon to close ranks, PASARANG
TALUDTOD, KAD. After his command, he proceeds six paces at the center in front of
his platoon.
g. After the inspection, the Outgoing Officer of the Day commands, ANG
MGA PINUNO NG TANOD PUMAGITNA, KAD. After the preparatory command, the
Assistant Commander of the Guards and the Sergeants of the Guards of the first and
second platoon march four steps forward and after which they face the center with the
Commander of the Guard. At the command of execution, they march to their respective
positions at the center and mark time. The Outgoing Commander of the Guard
commands, MGA PINUNO, TO. They shall quit marching and simultaneously face the
Outgoing Officer of the day.
h. The Outgoing Commander of the Guard then executes Hand Salute and
says, “Ginoo humihingi ng pahintulot para sa palitan”. The Outgoing Officer of the
day acknowledges the salute and commands: MAGPALITAN.

i. As soon as the permission is granted, the Outgoing Officer of the Guard
commands: MGA PINUNO HARAP SA GITNA, RAP. The Incoming and the Outgoing
Assistant Commanders of the Guards, Sergeants of the Guards and Commanders of
the Guards then face the center. Then the Outgoing Commander of the Guard
commands: MGA PAPALITANG TANOD PUGAY KAMAY, NA. The outgoing guards
execute Hand Salute and report to their respective relieves: “Ginoo ako ang dating
position as guard handa na po upang mapalitan”. The incoming guards challenge
the outgoing guards if they have disseminated all orders and instructions from
competent authorities: “Iyo bang naisalin ang lahat ng utos na nanggaling sa
tamang katungkulan?” The outgoing guards should answer the challenge, the answer
is: “opo” for yes and “hindi po” for no. (No relieving will take place if the answer is no)
The incoming guards acknowledge the salute and say: “Ikaw na ay papalitan”. The
Incoming Commander of the Guards commands: MGA PAPALIT NA TANOD PUGAY
KAMAY, NA. The incoming guards then execute Hand Salute and say: “Ginoo ako
ang papalit na position as guard handa na pong pumalit”. In the same manner the
outgoing guards challenge the incoming guards if they have received the all orders and
instructions coming from competent authorities: “Iyo bang natanggap ang lahat ng
utos na nanggaling sa tamang katungkulan?” The incoming guards will answer
“opo” if yes and “hindi po” if no. (No relieving will take place if the answer is no). The
outgoing guards acknowledge the salute and say: “Ikaw na ay pumalit”. The Incoming
Commander of the Guard commands: MGA PINUNO NG TANOD PUGAY KAMAY,
NA. The guards then execute Hand salute and say: “Ginoo tapos na po ang palitan”.
The Outgoing Officer of the Day acknowledges the salute and commands:
SUMALUNAN. The Incoming Commander of the Guard then brings the guards to their
original positions: MGA PINUNO NG TANOD SUMALUNAN, KAD. On the preparatory
command, the incoming guards execute Right Face and the outgoing guards execute
Left Face. At the command of execution, they march to their original positions. The
Commanders of the Guards mark time when they reach their positions. The Incoming
and Outgoing Assistant Commanders of the Guards and the Sergeants of the Guards
continue marching and mark time when they reach the position one step to the right of
the right flank of their respective platoons. The Incoming Commander of the Guard
commands: PINUNO, TO, RAP, KAD. At the command of execution TO, all guards quit
marching, at the command of execution RAP, the incoming guards execute Right Face
while the outgoing guards execute Left Face. At the command of execution KAD, the
incoming and outgoing guards except the Commanders of the Guards march forward
and proceed to their positions. As soon as the Incoming and Outgoing Commanders of
the Guard and Sergeants of the Guards reach their positions they shall come to mark
time. The Incoming Commander of the Guard commands: MGA PINUNO, TO. At the
command of execution, the Commanders of the Guards, Assistant Commanders of the
Guards and Sergeants of the Guards quit marching and automatically execute About
Face.
j. As soon as the Commanders of the Guards, Assistant Commanders of the

Guards and Sergeants of the Guards are in proper positions, the Outgoing Officer of the
Day faces about, salutes the Incoming Officer of the day and says: GINOO AKO ANG

DATING position as guard HANDA NA PO UPANG MAPALITAN The Incoming
Officer of the Day challenges the outgoing Officer of the day if he has disseminated all
orders and instructions from competent authorities: IYO BANG NAISALIN ANG LAHAT
NG UTOS NA NANGGALING SA TAMANG KATUNGKULAN? The Outgoing Officer
of the day should answer the challenge, the answer is: OPO for yes and HINDI PO for
no. (No relieving will take place if the answer is no) The incoming Officer of the day
acknowledges the salute and says: IKAW NA AY PAPALITAN. The Incoming Officer of
the day then executes Hand Salute and says: GINOO AKO ANG PAPALIT NA
position as guard HANDA NA PONG PUMALIT. In the same manner, the Outgoing
Officer of the day challenges the incoming Officer of the day if he has received all
orders and instructions coming from competent authorities: IYO BANG NATANGGAP
ANG LAHAT NG UTOS NA NANGGALING SA TAMANG KATUNGKULAN? The
Incoming Officer of the day answers OPO if yes and HINDI PO if no. (No relieving will
take place if the answer is no). The Outgoing Officer of the day acknowledges the salute
and says: IKAW NA AY PUMALIT.
k. The Outgoing Officer of the day executes about face and falls out from the
formation. At the same time, the Incoming Officer of the Day takes the position of the
Outgoing Officer of the Day. At this point the New Officer of the day may give some
announcements, after which, he shall direct the Commanders of the Guards to take
charge of their platoons and proceed to their respective duties.
Illustration:

SECTION VI
CHANGE OF COMMAND
6.1 GENERAL INFORMATION
A change of command is a ceremony held for the relinquishment and assumption

of a command.
For a change of command of a major AFP service command (Philippine Army,

Philippine Navy, Philippine Air Force), either the Secretary of National Defense or the
AFP Chief of Staff shall be invited as the presiding officer. However, in their absence,
any military officer or civilian VIP duly designated shall act in their behalf.
The change of command of a major service command unit is normally attended

by its commanding general or his duly designated representative as Presiding Officer.
On the other hand, that of a subordinate unit is attended by the commanding general or
representative of the next higher unit.
Invited personalities entitled to arrival/departure honors shall receive appropriate

honors.
6.2 SEQUENCE OF ACTIVITIES
a. Change of Command (Indoor)
1) Processional
2) Entry of Official Party
3) Entry of Colors
4) National Anthem
5) Invocation
6) Presentation of Award
7) Reading of Relief/Designation Orders
8) Remarks/Relinquishment of Command (Outgoing)
Part II / Section VI: Change of Command 170

9) Assumption of Command (Incoming)
10) Turnover of Command Symbol
11) Remarks and Introduction of the Presiding Officer (New
Commander)
12) Inspirational Talk (Presiding Officer)
13) Mass Singing of “Pilipinas Kong Mahal” or Unit’s Song
14) Exit of Colors
15) Exit of Official Party
16) Recessional
b. Change of Command in a Review
1) Entry and Formation of Troops

2) Presentation and Honors
3) Inspection
4) Presentation of Awards
Commander)
11) March-in-Review
c. Change of Command With a Review
1) Entry and Formation of Troops

2) Presentation and Honors
3) Inspection
4) March-in-Review
5) Mass Formation (in front of the grandstand)
6) Presentation of Awards
Commander)

CHANGE OF COMMAND WITH A REVIEW
6.3 CHANGE OF COMMAND PROPER
a. The EMCEE announces “We now begin the change of command

ceremony”.
b. The Adjutant proceeds to the left podium and reads the relief and
designation orders.
c. The Outgoing Commander proceeds to the right podium to make his

remarks. He gives the troops TIKAS PAHINGA after the troop commander (TC) faces
about.
d. At the end of his remarks, the Outgoing Commander shall say, “I will now
read my relinquishment orders", then pauses for a few seconds. (At this point, the TC
and his staff execute attention.) The TC faces the troop and commands MGA
TALUPAD as soon as the troops are at attention. The Outgoing Commander reads his
relinquishment orders and signs, then says, "I am ready to be relieved.” He stays where
he is.
e. The Outgoing Commander proceeds to the left podium and reads the
orders for his assumption of office and signs. He pauses for a few seconds, then says,
“I am ready to relieve you, sir.”
f. The Outgoing Commander and the Incoming Commander face each

other. Both commanders proceed to the center of the grandstand, halt and face the
Presiding Officer. The Presiding Officer stands and takes the center position in front of
the two commanders.
g. The Outgoing Commander salutes the Presiding Officer saying, “Sir, I

have relinquished the command of……………….. effective this date.”
h. The Presiding Officer acknowledges the salute and says, “Congratulations

and well done.” They shake hands.

i. The Incoming Commander salutes and says “Sir, I have assumed the
command of ……………… effective this date.
j. The Presiding Officer acknowledges the salute, then congratulates him,

saying, “Congratulations, take your post.”
k. At this point, the Sergeant Major/Senior Command Chief of Petty Officer

moves forward with the office command symbol and hands it over to the Outgoing
Commander. After handing over the command symbol, the Sergeant Major moves to
the other side near the Incoming Commander.
l. The Outgoing Commander passes on the command symbol to the

Presiding Officer.
m. The Presiding Officer receives the command symbol and passes it on to

the Incoming Commander.
n. The Incoming Commander receives it and gives it back to the Sergeant

Major/Senior Command Chief Petty Officer.
o. The Sergeant Major/Senior Command Chief Petty Officer moves forward,

takes hold of the command symbol then exits.
p. The New Commander and the Former commander face each other. The
New Commander salutes the Former Commander. The latter acknowledges the salute.
(At this point, the audience may give a round of applause).
q. The Presiding Officer and the Former Commander take their seats, with
the Former Commander taking the seat of the New Commander. The New Commander
goes to the right podium and delivers his speech. (He may direct the troops to TIKAS
PAHINGA). The New Commander ends his speech with the statement “…………All
orders and instructions shall remain undisturbed until they are rescinded or amended”.
He pauses. (The troop commander commands HUMANDA.)
r. The Commander introduces the Presiding Officer.
s. The Presiding Officer delivers his remarks. (He may order the troops to
TIKAS PAHINGA.)
t. After the remarks, the band plays recessional pieces. The ceremony ends.

SECTION VII
FLAG RAISING / RETREAT and

REVEILLE CEREMONIES
7.1 FLAG RAISING
Flag raising is a ceremony in which the unit honors the Philippine flag when it is
raised every Monday morning. The ceremony is conducted at the direction of the unit
commander. The commander sets the time for the flag raising. All members of the unit
to include civilian employees shall be present during the conduct of the ceremony.
FLAG RAISING
A. SEQUENCE OF EVENTS
1. Formation of Troops
Thirty minutes before the scheduled flag raising time, the units with
the Troop Commander (TC) are formed in line formation at parade rest.
Part II / Section VII: Flag Raising/Retreat and Reveille Ceremonies 174

FORMATION OF TROOPS
2. Start of Ceremony
a. The Reviewing Officer (RO) shall announce “HUMANDA SA

PAGPUPUGAY SA WATAWAT”. The Troop Commander (TC) faces about and
commands the troops: “HUMANDA SA PAGPUPUGAY SA WATAWAT”.
HUMANDA SA PAGPUPUGAY SA WATAWAT
b. The band plays ATTENTION CALL. The TC commands:

“TALUPAD, DA”, then faces about.
c. The band plays DRUM ROLLS.
d. Color details with flag and marches toward their designated

position.
e. The band stops playing as soon as the National Flag is

hooked into the riser of the flagpole or as soon as the color details have reached their
position if carrying the Colors in staff. The siren will be sounded for thirty seconds.
f. As the siren fades out, the TC faces about and commands:

“TANGHAL, TA”. After the troops have executed present arms, he faces about and
commands: “KALUPUNAN, MGA PINUNO AT KAWAL, PUGAY KAMAY, NA”.

g. The band plays TO THE COLOR after the TC and his staffs
have executed present arms (hand salute). The National Flag is raised simultaneously.
h. The TC and his staff execute order arms after the playing of
TO THE COLOR. The TC commands: “KALUPUNAN, MGA PINUNO AT KAWAL,
BABA KAMAY, NA”
i. The TC faces about and commands: “BABA, TA”. He then

faces about again.
j. Mass singing of National Anthem follows, led by a

designated member of the unit saying: “AWITIN PO NATIN ANG PAMBANSANG
AWIT NG PILIPINAS”. All civilian employees shall place their right palm on their left
breast.
k. After the mass singing of the National Anthem, the Chaplain

proceeds to the lectern for the invocation. Solemn accompaniment (preferably flute)
may be played during the invocation.
l. After the invocation, the Sergeant Major proceeds to the

lectern. The TC faces about and commands the troops: “TAAS KANANG KAMAY,
NA”, faces about and orders his staff with his command: “KALUPUNAN, MGA
PINUNO AT KAWAL, TAAS KANANG KAMAY, NA”.
m. The Sergeant Major announces MANGYARING SUMUNOD

SA AKING BIBIGKASIN PARA SA PANUNUMPA NG KATAPATAN SA WATAWAT.
After the Panunumpa, the TC commands: “KALUPUNAN, MGA PINUNO AT KAWAL,
BABA KAMAY, NA”, faces about and commands the troops: “BABA KAMAY, NA”,
then faces about. Any announcement/speech shall be done after the PANUNUMPA.
n. A designated member of the unit announces the mass

singing of PILIPINAS KONG MAHAL and everybody sings the song with the
accompaniment of the band or a lead singer.
NOTE: Other officers, EPs and civilian employees will take cue from the command of the TC:
“KALUPUNAN, MGA PINUNO AT KAWAL . . ..”
3. Pass-in-Review
a. The TC salutes and reports to the RO that the troops are

ready for Pass-in-Review: “GINOO, HANDA NA PO ANG MGA TALUPAD PARA SA
PASA MASID”.
b. The RO acknowledges and directs the TC to Pass-in-review:

“PASA-MASID”.

c. The TC faces about and directs his staff: “KALUPUNAN,
SUMALIKOD KO, KAD” then directs: “PASA-MASID”. The Battalion Commanders
(BCs) face about and command simultaneously their respective staff: “KALUPUNAN
SUMALIKOD KO, KAD”. Then the first BC commands: “HARAP SA KANAN, RAP”,
followed by the second BC. The same procedure as in pass-in-review of parade follows.
d. After the last element has passed (usually the band), the TC
and staff march to the center. The TC then reports to the RO: “GINOO, TAPOS NA PO
ANG PAGPUGAY SA WATAWAT”.
e. The TC faces about and commands: “MGA PINUNO,

KAWAL AT KAWANI, LUMANSAG”, then dismisses his staff.
7.2 FLAG RETREAT
A. General
1. The term “Retreat” is taken from the French word “Retraite” and
refers to evening ceremony. The sounding of the bugle at retreat is first used in the
French Army and dates back to the Crusades. Retreat is sounded at sunset to notify
sentries to start challenging until sunrise and to tell the rank and file to go to their
quarters.
2. Retreat is a ceremony in which the unit honors the flag when it is

lowered in the evening.
3. To the Color is being used as music honoring the flag as it is

lowered in the evening.
B. Sequence of Events
Thirty minutes before the scheduled flag retreat time, the units with
the Troop Commander (TC) are formed in line formation at parade rest.
2. Start of Ceremony
a. The RO announces HUMANDA SA PAGSILONG NG

WATAWAT. The TC directs his staff to attention: “KALUPUNAN, MGA PINUNO AT
KAWAL, HUMANDA”, faces about and commands the troops: “MGA TALUPAD, DA”,
then faces about.
b. The Sergeant Major proceeds to the lectern and leads the

PANUNTUNANG PANSARILI NG KAWAL PILIPINO. The TC faces about and
commands the troops: “TAAS KANANG KAMAY, NA”. He then faces about and

orders his staff: “KALUPUNAN, MGA PINUNO AT KAWAL, TAAS KANANG KAMAY,
NA”.
c. After the PANUNTUNANG PANSARILI NG KAWAL

PILIPINO, the TC orders his staff: “KALUPUNAN, MGA PINUNO AT KAWAL, BABA
KANANG KAMAY, NA”, faces about and commands the troops: “BABA KANANG
KAMAY, NA”, “TIKAS, NGA OR TIKAS NA”. Retreat is sounded at this time. After the
retreat, the siren is sounded.
d. As the siren fades out, the TC orders his staff:

“KALUPUNAN, MGA PINUNO AT KAWAL, HUMANDA”, faces about and commands
the troops: “TALUPAD, DA”, “TANGHAL, TA”. The TC then faces about and executes
present arms with his staff: “KALUPUNAN, MGA PINUNO AT KAWAL, PUGAY
KAMAY, NA”.
e. The band begins to play TO THE COLORS. Gun fires one

(1) salvo at the first note of TO THE COLORS.
f. At the last note of TO THE COLORS, the TC executes with

his staff: “KALUPUNAN, MGA PINUNO AT KAWAL, BABA KAMAY, NA”, faces
about and commands the troops: “BABA, TA”, then faces about.
3. Pass-in-Review
a. The TC salutes and reports to the RO that the troops are

ready for Pass-in-Review: “GINOO, HANDA NA PO ANG MGA TALUPAD PARA SA
PASA MASID”.
b. The RO acknowledges and directs the TC to Pass-in-review:

“PASA-MASID”.
c. The TC faces about and directs his staff: “KALUPUNAN,

SUMALIKOD KO, KAD” then directs: “PASA-MASID”. The Battalion Commanders
(BCs) face about and command simultaneously their respective staff: “KALUPUNAN
SUMALIKOD KO, KAD”. Then the first BC commands: “HARAP SA KANAN, RAP”,
followed by the second BC. The same procedure as in pass-in-review of parade follows.
d. After the last element has passed (usually the band), the TC
and staff march to the center. The TC then reports to the RO: “GINOO, TAPOS NA PO
ANG PAGSILONG NG WATAWAT”.
e. The TC faces about and commands: “MGA PINUNO, KAWAL

AT KAWANI, LUMANSAG”, then dismisses his staff.

SECTION VIII
WELCOME CEREMONY AND

SEND OFF CEREMONY FOR UNITS
(UNIT HONORS)
8.1 ARRIVAL CEREMONY PROCEDURE
FORMATION
After the march music, the UC brings back his troops to attention. Initially, the
unit is formed en masse near the stage or the grandstand.
ARRIVAL OF THE KEYNOTE SPEAKER
(As soon as the CSAFP or Major Service Commanders together with the GOH arrive)
EMCEE: “ANNOUNCING THE ARRIVAL OF THE GUEST HONOR”.
EMCEE: “CSAFP OR MAJOR SERVICE COMMANDERS, DUMATING”.
Appropriate number of side boys renders honors for the GOH as he goes up the stage)
IN CASE THE AFP CONTINGENT IS NOT YET IN FRONT OF THE STAGE ARRIVAL
OF AFP CONTINGENT
As soon as the GOH and CSAFP or Major Service Commanders are seated at
the stage, the AFP Contingent marches from naval ship / aircraft / ground vehicle in
proper formation and proceed in front of the stage upon signal in their designated
position.
EMCEE: “ANNOUNCING THE ARRIVAL OF AFP CONTINGENT”
Part II / Section VIII: Welcome Ceremony and Send Off Ceremony for Units 179
Band plays appropriate music. Placing of lie to the Commander and Staff and to
other Officers takes place as soon as the Contingent is formed. Then, the UC brings his
troops to present arms and presents his troops to the Major Service Commander.
IN CASE THE AFP CONTINGENT IS ALREADY IN FRONT OF THE STAGE
When the Major Service Commander or his designated representative arrives at

the grandstand, the unit commander (UC) brings his troops to attention. When the Major
Service Commander or his representative has taken his eat, the UC brings his troops to
present arms and presents his troops to the Major Service Commander. The latter
acknowledges the presentation and immediately, the band plays appropriate march
music. (Everybody in the grandstand should likewise stand).
PHILIPPINE NATIONAL ANTHEM
EMCEE: “PLEASE REMAIN STANDING FOR THE PHILIPPINE NATIONAL

ANTHEM”.
INVOCATION
(Once the arriving party has taken their appropriate position)
EMCEE: “LADIES AND GENTLEMEN, PLEASE RISE FOR THE INVOCATION”

The chaplain then delivers the invocation. (Everybody takes seat after the
invocation).
REPORT OF THE HAND-OVER PARTY
EMCEE: “LET US NOW HEAR THE REPORT OF THE HAND-OVER PARTY".

Head of the Hand-Over party goes to the stage, uses the microphone at
the right side of the stage and renders the report.
ACCOMPLISMENT REPORT OF THE AFP CONTINGENT
EMCEE: “LET US NOW HEAR THE REPORT OF THE AFP CONTINGENT”. AFP
Commander goes to the right side of the stage and renders his report.
WELCOME HANDSHAKE
EMCEE: “THE WELCOME HANDSHAKE TO THE TROOPS WILL BE

RENDERED BY THE GUEST OF HONOR”.
The GOH, escorted by the CSAFP or Major Service Commanders, goes down
the stage and shake hands with officers and men of the different contingents who have
just arrived to convey his personal arrival message. The Band plays appropriate music
while the GOH is welcoming the troops.
REMARKS AND INTRODUCTION OF THE KEYNOTE SPEAKER:
EMCEE: "THE CSAFP OR MAJOR SERVICE COMMANDER WILL GIVE HIS

REMARKS AND SUBSEQUENTLY INTRODUCE THE KEYNOTE
SPEAKER”.
The CSAFP or Major Service Commander renders his remarks.
EMCEE: THE CSAFP OR MAJOR SERVICE COMMANDER WILL NOW

INTRODUCE THE KEYNOTE SPEAKER”
The GOH delivers his speech
DEPENDENTS’ TIME
(As soon as the GOH has finished delivering his speech)
EMCEE: “LADIES AND GENTLEMEN, THAT ENDS OUR CEREMONY. THANK

YOU FOR BEING WITH US TODAY”. The dependents may now
approach their loved ones who have just arrived.
IN CASE THERE IS AN AWARDING
If there is an awarding, the following procedures shall be done:
a. The UC commands MGA WATAWAT AT MGA TAONG

PARARANGALAN, PUMAGITNA, KAD. The unit staff executes right face and at the
last note of the command of execution KAD, marches forward and halts after a
considerable distance, allowing space for the colors.
b. Awardees come forward. The Major Service Commander joins the colors;
the most senior unit staff member commands HARAP SA KALIWA, RAP, then
PASULONG to position themselves behind the colors. When the colors and awardees
are already in their proper position, the UC salutes and reports to the Major Service
Commander, “Nandito na po ang mga watawat at ang mga taong pararangalan”.
After being acknowledged, he executes order arms, faces about, then joins his staff at
the back of the colors taking the most direct route. Thereafter, he commands
TANGHAL, TA for the troops. When the troops are at present arms, the UC faces about
and commands TANGHAL, TA for his staff, colors and awardees. The Band then plays
the National Anthem, after which the UC commands BABA, TA. If the UC is an
awardee he takes his proper position with the other awardees.
c. The Guest of Honor (GOH) and the Major Service Commander go down
the grandstand for the awarding ceremony. The citations of the awards are read before
they are presented to the awardees. After the presentation of awards, the GOH goes
back to the grandstand while the colors and awardees return to their former positions.
d. At this point, the spouses/parents proceed toward the troops to present

leis to the officers and enlisted men of the unit. They return to their respective seats
after presenting the leis.
SPEECHES
a. The Major Service Commander introduces the GOH for the welcome
remarks.
b. If previously ordered to bring his unit to Parade Rest, the UC brings his
unit to attention after the speech of the GOH. Recess follows.
8.2 SEND-OFF CEREMONY PROCEDURE
ARRIVAL OF THE KEYNOTE SPEAKER
(As soon as the CSAFP OR MAJOR SERVICE COMMANDERS together with the GOH
arrive)
EMCEE: "ANNOUNCING THE ARRIVAL OF THE GUEST HONOR".
(In case of PN, ships individually render passing honor to the GOH as he passes in front
of them while going to the stage for the ceremony. Personnel man the rail aboard the
ship.)
(In case of the PAF, troops are already in formation and the aircraft behind them.)
(In case of the PA, troops are also in formation the ground vehicles behind them.)
EMCEE: " CSAFP OR MAJOR SERVICE COMMANDERS, DUMATING".
(Only in the case of PN, appropriate number of side boys renders honors for the GOH
as he goes up the stage.)
(Once the GOH has taken his place at the stage)

PHILIPPINE NATIONAL ANTHEM:
EMCEE: "LADIES AND GENTLEMEN, PLEASE RISE FOR THE PHILIPPINE

NATIONAL ANTHEM".
INVOCATION
EMCEE: "PLEASE REMAIN STANDING FOR THE INVOCATION".
(Band will provide music)
SEND-OFF PROPER
EMCEE: "LET US NOW WITNESS THE SEND-OFF CEREMONY FOR THE

SHIPS/AIRCRAFT/GROUND VEHICLES THAT WILL BE DEPARTING
TODAY FOR TRANSPORT/SEALIFT/AIRLIFT MISSION OF AFP
PERSONNEL TO. "
(After this announcement, Head of Mission faces about to receive the reports of the
different Contingent Commanders. Starting with the Commander, AFP Contingent
Commanders render individual reports of their completeness)
HEAD OF MISSION: "MAG-ULAT".
COMMANDERS: "GINOO, MGA PINUNO AT TAUHAN NG (_______________

HEADQUARTERS, AFP UNIT), NARITO PO'NG LAHAT, NAPAG-
ALAMAN".
(As soon as the Contingent Commanders have rendered their reports, the Head
of Mission faces about and report to the GOH)
HEAD OF MISSION: “GINOO, MGA PINUNO AT TAUHAN NG MGA

CONTINGENTS NA PAALIS, NARITO PO’NG LAHAT
NAPAG-ALAMAN”.
The GOH acknowledges
INSPECTION OF TROOPS
EMCEE: "THE INSPECTION OF TROOPS TO BE CONDUCTED BY THE GUEST

OF HONOR".
(The GOH, escorted by the CSAFP OR Major Service Commanders, goes down stage
and shakes hands with departing Officers and men of the different contingents to
convey his personal send-off message. The Band plays an appropriate music while the
GOH is inspecting the troops).
REMARKS AND INTRODUCTION OF THE KEYNOTE SPEAKER
EMCEE: "THE __________ WILL GIVE HIS REMARKS AND SUBSEQUENTLY

INTRODUCE THE KEYNOTE SPEAKER."
(The CSAFP OR Major Service Commanders renders his remark).
EMCEE: THE CSAFP OR MAJOR SERVICE COMMANDER WILL NOW
INTRODUCE THE KEYNOTE SPEAKER."
(The GOH will deliver his speech.)
READINESS REPORT
(After the speech of the Keynote Speaker)
DEPARTURE OF SHIPS/AIRCRAFT/GROUND VEHICLE
(For the PN, the ships pull-out from the pier after all the members of the contingent and
involved personnel in the mission have embarked their respective ships. As soon as the
ships to be sent-off have cast-off their lines, the Band plays "Anchors Away”)
ENDING OF THE CEREMONY
(For the PN, as soon as the Band finished playing "Anchors Away”)
EMCEE: "LADIES AND GENTLEMEN, THAT ENDS OUR CEREMONY. THANK

YOU FOR BEING WITH US TODAY. GOOD DAY AND MAY GOD
BLESS US ALL."
SECTION IX
ACTIVATION/DE-ACTIVATION OF UNITS
Activation
The following are the procedures/sequences in the activation of units:
a. Arrival of the Guest of Honor/Speaker (GOH)
1) The elements of the units to be activated are formed en masse in

front of the Grandstand or ceremonial venue and are initially at parade rest. The band (if
available) is likewise prepositioned at the vicinity of the ceremonial venue.
2) As soon as the party of the Guest of Honor / Speaker arrives, the

designated Troop Commander (TC) calls the troops to attention. He commands,
TALUPAD, DA or as appropriate.
b. Singing of National Anthem
1) When all the guests are seated. The designated emcee announces,
“PLEASE STAND FOR THE PHILIPPINE NATIONAL ANTHEM”.
2) The TC directs to the troops to execute present arms. He

commands, TANGHAL, TA. The band then plays the National Anthem.
3) After the band finishes playing of the National Anthem, the TC

commands the troops to execute order arms. He commands, BABA, TA.
4) The emcee then announces, “PLEASE REMAIN STANDING FOR

THE INVOCATION.”
Part II / Section IX: Activation/De-activation of Units 185

c. Invocation
The Chaplain approaches the rostrum and delivers the invocation. When
the invocation is finished, the Chaplain exits and proceeds to his seat.
d. Reading of the Unit Activation Order
1) After everybody is seated, the emcee announces. “THE

ACTIVATION ORDER OF (Name of Unit) WILL NOW BE READ BY THE ADJUTANT
GENERAL (or designated person).”
2) The Adjutant proceeds to the rostrum and reads the unit activation
order. After reading the order, the adjutant returns to his seat.
e. Unfurling of the Unit Color
1) After the reading of orders the emcee announces. “We will now
witness the unfurling of the unit color by the GOH to be attested by the host.”
2) The GOH and the Host stand, while a color bearer escorted by a
designated Sergeant Major of the activated unit approaches them with the case unit
color. The color bearer then lowers the color infront of the GOH and Host. The GOH
and Host untie and remove the case of the color. Upon removal of the case, the color
bearer slowly unfurls the color. At this point the band plays appropriate background
music or the unit hymn. (No part of the color should be allowed to touch the ground.)
The unit Sergeant Major then hands over the unfurled color to the Host who in turn
gives it to the GOH.
3) The Adjutant proceeds to the rostrum and reads the appointment

orders of the incoming Commander of the activated unit. After reading the appointment
orders, the adjutant exits and the emcee announces. “THE INCOMING COMMANDER
OF (Name of Unit) WILL NOW RECEIVE THE COLOR.”
4) The incoming unit commander proceeds in front of the GOH and

Host and salutes. The GOH hands over the unit color to the incoming Commander who
then gives it to the Sgt Major and color bearer to be placed in a prepositioned flag
stand. The GOH and Host then proceed to their respective seats.
f. Assumption of Command
1) As soon as the GOH and Host are seated, the emcee announces.
“THE INCOMING COMMANDER OF __________ WILL NOW READ HIS
ASSUMPTION OF COMMAND.”

2) The Commander proceeds to the rostrum and reads the order. He
says “Pursuant to General Orders Number ________ Headquarters Dated __________,
I hereby assume command of the newly activated (Name of Unit) effective this date. I
sign in your presence.”
After signing the document, the newly designated Commander delivers his
remarks. Then, he introduces the GOH.
g. Speech of the GOH
The Guest of Honor/Speaker delivers his speech after the introduction.
h. Conclusion
1) After the speech of the GOH, the emcee announces “LADIES AND
GENTLEMEN THAT CONCLUDES OUR ACTIVITIES. THANK YOU VERY MUCH.
2) The TC then marches off the troops and dismisses them in a

designated area.

De-activation of Units
The following are the procedures/sequences in the de-activation of units:
a. Arrival of the Guest of Honor/Speaker (GOH)
1) The elements of the units to be de-activated are formed en mass in

front of the grandstand or the ceremonial venue and are initially at parade rest. The
band (if available) is likewise pre-positioned at the vicinity of the ceremonial venue.
2) As soon as the party of the Guest of Honor/Speakers arrives, the

designated Troop Commander (TC) calls the troops to attention. He commands,
TALUPAD, DA or as appropriate.
b. Singing of National anthem
1) When everybody has settled down or is already seated. The

designated emcee announces. “PLEASE STAND FOR THE PHILIPPINE NATIONAL
ANTHEM”.
2.) The TC directs the troops to execute present arms. He commands,

TANGHAL, TA. The band then plays the National Anthem.
3) When the band finishes playing the National Anthem, the TC

commands the troops to execute order arms. He commands, BABA, TA.
4) The emcee then announces, “PLEASE REMAIN STANDING FOR

THE INVOCATION.”
c. Invocation
The Chaplain approaches the rostrum and delivers the invocation. When
the invocation is finished, the Chaplain exits and proceeds to his seat. The emcee
announces, “THANK YOU.”
d. Reading of the Unit De-activation Order
1) After everybody is seated, the emcee announces, “THE DE-

ACTIVATION ORDER OF (Name of Unit) WILL NOW BE READ BY THE ADJUTANT
GENERAL (or designated person).”
2) The Adjutant proceeds to the rostrum and reads the order. He says,

“PURSUANT TO GENERAL ORDER NUMBER , HEADQUARTERS
DATED , (Name of Unit) IS HEREBY DE-ACTIVATED EFFECTIVE
THIS DATE.” After reading the de-activation order, the adjutant returns to his seat.
e. Hauling down/Encasing of the Unit Color
1) The emcee announces, “WE WILL NOW WITNESS THE HAULING

DOWN AND ENCASING OF THE (Unit) COLOR BY THE GOH TO BE ASSISTED BY
THE HOST.”
2) The GOH and the Host stands. A color bearer escorted by a

designated Sgt Major of the de-activated unit approaches them with the unfurled unit
color. The color bearer then lowers the color and slowly furls it infront of the GOH and
Host (while the band plays Auld Lang Syne or appropriate music). The GOH
covers/encases the colors. The encased color is handed by the Sergeant Major to the
Host who then gives it to the GOH.
3) The incumbent Commander then approaches the rostrum and

delivers his remarks then introduce the GOH.
f. Speech of the GOH
The Guest of Honor/Speaker delivers his speech.
g. Conclusion
1) After the speech of the GOH, the emcee announces, “LADIES AND
GENTLEMEN, THAT CONCLUDES OUR ACTIVITIES. THANK YOU VERY MUCH.”
2) The TC then marches off the troops and dismisses them in a

designated area.
NOTE: If former commanders of the de-activated unit are present during the ceremony; the cased unit
color should be passed on to them in succession then return to the incumbent Commander before it is
given to the GOH. Normally, the GOH is the commander of the unit that issues the de-activation order.

SECTION X
FUNERAL HONORS AND SERVICES
10.1 GENERAL
The practice of giving final tribute and honors to a dearly departed has evolved
over the years from a simple ceremony to elaborate and colorful rites to make the
occasion more meaningful in perpetuation of the memory of the dead.
The funeral rites of soldiers, more than any other ceremony, have followed an old
pattern as the living honor to the brave dead.
10.2 PERSONS ENTITLED TO FUNERAL HONORS AND SERVICES
a. Veterans of Previous Wars and Recognized Guerillas

b. Veterans of Expeditionary Forces
c. Active and Retired Military Personnel
d. Honorably Separated Military Personnel
e. Government Officials and VIPS as directed by the SND and the President
f. Reserved officers in the inactive status
g. Person who served in the Philippine Constabulary when still part of the
AFP.
10.3 TYPES OF FUNERALS
1) Chapel service, followed by a movement of the grave or place of local

disposition with the prescribed funeral honors.
2) Graveside honors.
a. Military funeral honors consists of the following elements:

1) Band
Part II / Section X: Funeral Honors and Services 190

2) Escort appropriate to the deceased
3) Colors
4) Clergy
5) Firing party with drum and bugle
6) Hearse (caisson) and active pallbearers
7) Honorary pallbearers
8) Personal color (if appropriate)
b. Upon request, chaplains may conduct or arrange for appropriate

burial service for interment of members of the military service, active and retired, and for
members of their families. The family of the deceased (or their representative) may
however, request some other clergyman to officiate in lieu of military chaplain. A civilian
clergyman can conduct all religious elements of a military funeral or interment.
Although the desires of the family are to be given the fullest consideration possible in
the selection of elements involved. The funeral, however, should be conducted as
prescribed in the manual.
c. The commanding officer of the deceased or his representative, in

coordination with the cemetery superintendent and the funeral director, makes the
funeral arrangements and supervises the conduct of the funeral.
d. When honorary pallbearers are desired, they are selected by the

family of the deceased or their representative, or when they so desired, by the
commanding officer. As a rule, no more then twelve (12) honorary pallbearers should be
selected.
e. At a military funeral, persons in military uniform attending in their

individual capacity must face the casket and execute the hand salute at the following
times:
1) when honors, if any, are sounded;
2) at any time when the casket is being moved (the exception
being when they themselves are moving);
3) during cannon salutes, if sounded;
4) during the firing of volleys;
5) and while TAPS is being played.
f. During the religious graveside service, all personnel bow their

heads at the words “Let us Pray”. All mourners at graveside except the active
pallbearers follow the example of the officiating chaplain. If he uncovers, they uncover; if
he remains covered, they remain covered. But when the officiating chaplain wears a
biretta (clerical headpieces) during the graveside service, all personnel, as indicted
above, must uncover.
g. The remains of a member of the armed forces, who die while on

active duty, may be consigned directly to a national cemetery from a military installation.
In such cases, the cemetery superintendent will, regardless of the time of arrival, (if not

otherwise provided for) engage a funeral director to receive the remains at the common
carrier terminal hold the remains at his establishment until the date of the funeral, if
necessary and deliver the remains to the cemetery. The superintendent is not
authorized to allow the funeral director to render any other service incident to the
interment.
a. Funeral Service – include escort, band, colors, clergy, caisson and/or

funeral car, caparisoned horse, pallbearers and chapel services.
b. Graveside Services – include the clergy, pallbearers, firing party and

buglers.
c. Vigil Guards – the sentries posted to keep watch on the blear when
remains of a deceased are lying in state.
d. Interment Flag – The interment flag is used to cover the casket of the
deceased. The white part with the sun and stars shall cover the head of the casket, the
blue portion to the right and the red part to the left end of the deceased with both colors
evenly divided on each side of the casket. The flag must not touch the ground when
lowered to the grave. No wreath of flowers should be placed on top of the flag-shrouded
casket. Nonetheless, a small cross of flowers may be placed over the flag as a symbol
of “God above the country”. Issuance of one interment flag to heirs of deceased is
authorized in accordance with change Nr 5, AFPR G 131-372.
e. Escort and Transportation – This shall be provided by unit commanders

upon request of heirs or nearest relatives of the deceased.
f. Burial expenses – Reimbursement of burial expenses is authorized

pursuant to Sec 699 of the RAC as implemented by AFPR G 131-181 dated 15 Jun 58
as amended by change dated 1 July 65.
g. Interment at Libingan Ng Mga Bayani – For those who may be entitled

to Interment at Libingan Ng Mga Bayani pursuant to AFP G 131-371 dated 2 Feb 60.
h. Lie-in-state at AFP Chapel – Before the actual funeral, a deceased may

lie-in-state at any AFP chapel provided such service does not interfere the regular
scheduled church services of said chapel. However, it shall be the AFP chaplain directly
in-charge of the chapel who shall make the necessary arrangement for deceased
personnel authorized to lie-in-state AFP chapel.
i. Chapel - means the church, home, or any other place where services are
held, other than the service at the grave.

j. Casket - is interpreted to include a receptacle containing the remains of
the deceased.
10.5 FUNERAL WITH CHAPEL SERVICE
a. Before the beginning of the service, the funeral escort is formed in line
facing the chapel. The band forms on the flank toward where it will be marched.
b. Members of the immediate family, relatives, and friends of the deceased

are requested to enter the chapel and be seated before the casket is taken in.
Members of the immediate family and relatives occupy pews (seats) to the right (front)
of the chapel.
c. The hearse bearing the remains to the chapel should arrive in front of the
chapel a few moments before the time set for the service. As the hearse approaches,
the escort commander commands MGA TANOD, DA until the hearse stops in front of
the chapel. When the casket is prepositioned already with his / her immediate
dependents and pallbearers, the escort commander brings his troops to TANGHAL TA.
As the escort commander executes present arms, the band renders the honors, and if
appropriate, followed by a hymn. At the first note of the hymn, the casket is moved from
the hearse by the active pallbearers and carried between the ranks of honorary
pallbearers, if any, into the chapel. The remains are handled in a dignified, reverent, and
military manner, ensuring that the casket is carried level and feet first at all times. As
soon as the casket enters the chapel, the band ceases to play, and the escort
commander commands the troops to BABA TA and TIKAS PAHINGA.
d. When honorary pallbearers are present, they are formed in two ranks
each one facing the other, in order of seniority, with the most senior being the closest to
the hearse, thus forming an aisle from the hearse to the entrance of the chapel. At the
first note of the music and while the casket is being borne between the ranks of
honorary pallbearers, they uncover or salute. They then follow the casket in column of
twos and occupy pews (seats) to the left front of the chapel.
e. When the casket has been placed on the church truck, two active
pallbearers push the truck to the front of the church while the other active pallbearers
move to the vestibule and await the termination of the church service. If there is no such
truck the active pallbearers carry the casket to the front of the church as instructed by
the chaplain before the service. When no honorary pallbearers are used and if the
active pallbearers are selected friends of the family, they may, if desired by the family,
occupy the pews (seats) to the left front of the chapel.
f. After the chapel service, the honorary pallbearers (if present) precede the
casket in column of twos as the two active pallbearers push the church truck to the
entrance of the chapel. The honorary pallbearers again form an aisle from the entrance
of the chapel to the hearse with the most senior closest to the chapel. They uncover or
salute as prescribed. When the casket has been placed in the hearse, the honorary

pallbearers enter their vehicles. When marching, the honorary pallbearers form columns
on each side of the hearse, the leading member of each column opposite the front
wheels of the hearse.
g. The casket, followed by the family group, is moved to the entrance

immediately behind the honorary pallbearers. As soon as the honorary pallbearers have
taken their position, the active pallbearers carry the casket to the hearse and form a
column of two behind it (if the honorary pallbearers march). If the honorary pallbearers
do not march, the active pallbearers form files on each side of the hearse, the leading
member of each column opposite the front wheels of the hearse. The family group
remains at the chapel entrance until the honorary pallbearers have broken ranks to
enter their vehicle or have taken their positions for marching. The members of the family
group then are guided to their vehicles.
h. When the casket appears at the entrance of the chapel at the conclusion
of the service, the funeral escort and band repeat the procedure as prescribed for
entering the chapel. When the casket has been secured into the hearse, the band
ceases playing and the escort is brought to the order.
i. The procession is then formed in the following order.

1) Escort Commander (with Ex-0 and Guidon Bearer as appropriate)
2) Colors
3) Band
4) Funeral elements
5) Honorary pallbearers (if riding in cars)
6) Clergy
7) Caisson or hearse, and honorary pallbearer (if walking)
8) Active pallbearers
9) Personal colors (if appropriate)
10) Family
11) Friends and patriotic or fraternal organization
FUNERAL PROCESSION
NOTE: The firing party, drummer and bugler will be pre-positioned at graveside if they are not part of the
escort.

j. When the procession has been formed, the escort commander commands
PASULONG, KAD to the band and escorts the elements in the rear column. The
procession marches slowly to solemn music (cadence of 100 beats per minute). When
there is considerable distance from the chapel to the grave, the escort, after leaving the
vicinity of the chapel, may march in quick time. The band plays appropriate music
throughout the march. Care must be exercised to avoid disturbing other funeral
processions or service that may be passed on the route of the march. When the escort
is in the vicinity of the grave, it resumes a slow cadence to solemn music. Customary
music is used.
k. As the procession approaches the grave, the marching elements move

directly to their predesignated positions. The band and military escort are formed in line
in view of the next of kin. The other marching elements are halted as near as
practicable to the grave. The firing party is positioned so that it fires over the grave and
so that it is in view of the next of kin.
l. Before the hearse is halted, the honorary pallbearers are formed in two
ranks, the most senior closest to the hearse, forming and aisle extending from the
hearse toward the grave. When the grave is too near to the road to permit this
formation, they take their position at the grave before the casket is removed from the
hearse.
m. When the casket is ready to be moved from the hearse, the escort
commander commands TANGHAL, TA. At the command of execution TA, the escort
executes present arms and the band renders honors. After the casket was emplaced to
its truck, the escort commander commands BABA TA, Immediately follows by last
viewing and benediction from the clergy.
n. When casket is about to be buried, the escort commander commands

TANGHAL TA, followed by the firing of twenty-one (21) gun salutes. And plays of taps
by the drummer and bugler, after that, the escort commander commands BABA TA.
The band renders, if appropriate the alma mater hymn.
Note: If a military chaplain is not present, the officer in charge or non-commissioned officer in charge
presents the flag to the next of kin.

10.6 GRAVE SERVICE
For a funeral without chapel service, all elements of a military funeral must be
present. However, if troops are not conveniently available, or if the family desires
eliminate other elements, the following must be used:
a. Clergy
b. Officer in Charge or non-commissioned officer in charge, appropriate to
the grace of the deceased.
c. Active pallbearers
d. Firing party
e. Drummer and Bugler
f. Personal color bearer (if applicable)
These elements are positioned at the graveside before the arrival of the remains.
10.7 CREMATED REMAINS
a. When the remains are cremated and the ashes interred with military
honors, necessary modification will govern.
b. For all phases of the funeral, where the cremated remains are carried by
hand, one man is detailed to carry the receptacle (casket) containing the ashes and
another is detailed to carry the flag, folded into the shape of a cocked hat. The
pallbearers carrying the flag are always positioned to the right of the remains. When the
receptacles are carried from the hearse into the chapel and from the chapel to the
hearse, these two men are the only participants in the ceremony. During the procession
to the gravesite, the receptacle and flag are carried by the two pallbearers followed by
four (4) additional pallbearers. When the receptacle has been placed on the gravesite,
all six pallbearers unfold the flag and hold it over the grave.
c. When the receptacle and flag are placed before the chancel of the chapel
or transported to gravesite by vehicle, the receptacle and folded flag are place side by
side. If the pallbearers walk to the gravesite, the two bearers who carried the receptacle
and the flag join the other four pallbearers already prepositioned on either side of the
hearse.
d. When no hearse is used, suitable transportation is provided for the

receptacle and flag bearers and the other pallbearers.
e. When the remains are removed to a ceremony and the ashes are to be
interred with military honors at a later time, the ceremony consists only of the escort to
the crematory. All personnel salute as the remains are carried into the crematory. The
firing of volleys and the sounding of TAPS are omitted. When the funeral ceremony is
held at the crematory, and when no further honors are anticipated, the volleys are fired
and TAPS is sounded at the discretion of the commander officer.

10.8 CEREMONY IN TRANSFERRING REMAINS
a. If the remains of a general or flag officer are brought ashore in the vicinity
of a military post, the flag will be displayed at half-staff and gun salute will be fired as
the procession moves. The number of guns will be that to which the officer was entitled
as a salute.
b. When the remains of a deceased soldier are moved to a railway station or

any other point for shipment to another place for interment or final disposition, funeral
services are modified as necessary. When no further military honors are anticipated at
the place of interment or final disposition, the volleys are fired and TAPS sounded at the
discretion of the commanding officer. When military honors are anticipated at the place
of final disposition, the volleys and TAPS are omitted.
10.9 GUN SALUTE
a. When the funeral of a general officer on the active or retired list, which
was entitled to a gun salute, takes place at or near a military installation, guns equal to
the number to which the officer was entitled, may be fired at noon on the day of the
funeral. The military installation mentioned in general orders fires the prescribed
salutes.
b. Immediately preceding the benediction, a gun salute corresponding to the

grade of the deceased is fired at five-second intervals. Following the benediction, three
volleys are fired.
10.10 FUNERAL OFF POST
a. The commander, upon request, provides funeral detail for deceased active
duty or retired armed forces personnel when the burial is to take place in a civilian or
national cemetery off the installation. However, upon request, the composition may be
the same as that of funeral inside posts as appropriate. The detail is normally composed
as follows:
1) Officer in charge or noncommissioned officer in charge.
2) Six active pallbearers
3) Firing party
4) Drummer and Bugler
Note: When military pallbearers are not available, the firing party may fold the flag after the firing.
b. The arrangement for the funeral is supervised by the survivor assistance

officer. The officer in charge or noncommissioned officer in charge of the funeral detail
coordinates all aspects of the ceremonies with this officer.
c. Upon arrival at the destination where the funeral is to be conducted, the

officer in charge or noncommissioned officer in charge meets the survivor assistance

officer and ascertains the sequences of the ceremony. The normal sequence of events
is as follows:
1) At the funeral home
a) On the order of the funeral director, the pallbearers move the

casket to the hearse. The pallbearers should be certain to carry the casket feet first and
level at all times.
2) At the church:
a) The active pallbearers carry the casket from the hearse into
the chapel.
b) When the casket has been placed on the church, two
pallbearers push the truck to the front of the church while the other pallbearers move to
the vestibule and await the termination of the church service. If there is no church truck,
the pallbearers carry the casket to the front of the church as instructed by the funeral
director or minister concerned. If desired by the family, the active pallbearers may
occupy the pews (seats) to the left front of the church.
c) After the church service, the pallbearers, under the direction

of the funeral director, move the casket to the hearse. When the casket has been
placed in the hearse, the pallbearers enter their vehicles.
3) At the cemetery:
a) The officer in charge or a designated individual commands

the prepositioned firing party, drummer and bugler DA to TILAP, and TANGHAL TA as
soon as the casket is moved from the hearse. Then command BABA, TA is given when
the casket reaches the grave.
b) The pallbearers carry the casket, feet first and level to the
grave. On reaching the grave, the casket is placed on the lowering device. The
pallbearers raise the flag from the casket and hold it in a horizontal position, waists high,
until the conclusion of TAPS.
10.11 PARTICIPATION OF AVIATION
When aviation participates in a military funeral, it is timed so that the aircraft

appears over the procession.
10.12 PARTICIPATION OF FRATERNAL OR PATRIOTIC ORGANIZATION
The family or representative of the deceased may request fraternal or patriotic

organizations, of which the deceased was a member, to take part in the funeral service.
With immediate family approval, fraternal or patriotic organizations may conduct

graveside service, at the conclusion of the military portion of the ceremony, signified by
the flag presentation to the next of kin and escort departure from the cemetery.
10.13 DUTIES OF THE CHAPLAIN
The chaplain takes his position in front of the chapel before the arrival of the
remains. He precedes the casket, when it is carried from the hearse into the chapel and
from the chapel to the hearse. While the remains are being placed in the hearse, he
stands at the rear and to the side facing the hearse. When he is wearing vestments, he
may, at his discretion, proceed from the chancel to the sacristy (vestry) at the
conclusion of the chapel service and divest, joining the procession before it moves from
the chapel. He then precedes the hearse to the graveside and precedes the casket to
the grave.
10.14 PRELIMINARY ARRANGEMENTS
The officer in charge of a military funeral, the commander of the escort, the
funeral director, and the superintendent of the cemetery or his representative visit the
places involved and make careful arrangements before the time set for the funeral.
They determine the positions at the grave for the various elements of the funeral and
make arrangements for traffic control.
10.15 FLORAL TRIBUTES
a. In the absence of the chaplain, the chaplain’s assistant helps the funeral
director in arranging all floral tributes in the chapel. The commanding officer or his
representative coordinates with the funeral director the necessary transportation for
prompt transfer of floral tributes from the chapel to the gravesite. The vehicle bearing
the floral tributes is loaded promptly at the conclusion of the chapel service. It precedes
the funeral procession, moving as rapidly as practicable to the site of the grave. The
funeral procession does not move from the chapel until the vehicle carrying the floral
tributes has cleared the escort.
b. The funeral director or the cemetery representative is responsible for

removing cards and making a record that give a brief description of the floral piece
pertaining to each card. After completion of the funeral services, the cards and records
are turned over to a member of the family of the deceased.
10.16 RULES FOR CEREMONIAL FIRING
a. For a ceremonial firing, the firing party may consist of seven (7) riflemen
with one noncommissioned officer as firing party commander. However, twenty one (21)
riflemen with FPC may complement during interment of senior military officers or other
VIP’s and government officials.

CEREMONIAL FIRING
b. The firing party is normally pre-positioned at the gravesite and facing

toward the direction that allows it to fire directly over the grave. However, care should
be taken to ensure that rifles are fired at a 45-degree angle from the horizontal.
1) To load:
a) Magazines loaded with three rounds of blank ammunitions

are already inserted in their rifle before forming the firing party when seven (7) riflemen
is detailed.
b) At the conclusion of the religious services or on the escort

commander’s command, the firing party commander directs the loading of blank
ammunitions. At the command of MAGPUNGLO each rifleman executes port arms,
faces to the half right, and moves his right foot ten (10) inches to the right to a position
that gives him a firm distance. He then chambers a round, places the weapon in the
position, and resumes port arms.
2) To fire by volley:
a) When the riflemen have completed the movements and are

locked, the commands are HANDA, SIPAT, PUTOK. At command HANDA, each
rifleman moves the safety to the fire post. On the command SIPAT, the rifle is
shouldered with both hands, the muzzle to the front at an angle of 45 degrees from the
horizon. On the command of execution PUTOK, the trigger is squeezed quickly and the
weapons are immediately returned to port arms.
b) To continue the firing, the commands SIPAT and PUTOK

are given as previously prescribed. To chamber another round, the command HANDA,
is always given for each rifleman to manually chamber the next round. When the
command SIPAT and PUTOK are given another volleys of ammunition are fired.
c) When the third round has been fired, the firing party
commander commands BABA TA and TANGHAL TA. He then proceeds to

presentation and the playing of TAPS or Tawag Paghimlay is sounded. After he
commanded to order arms, the firing party commander and his elements remain at
attention until the flag has been folded and saluted by the officer in charge or non-
commissioned officer in charge of the funeral detail. At this time, the firing party
commander executes about face and commands HARAP SA KANAN (KALIWA), RAP;
AGAP TA; and PASULONG KAD. Weapons are unloaded and cleared as soon as
possible before leaving the gravesite.
FIRING BY VOLLEY
Note: When twenty-one (21) riflemen with FPC are required same execution will be adopted.
10.17 NOTICE OF DEATH
a. President/Ex-President
On the day after receipt of an official notice of death of the President or an

Ex-President of the Philippines, the Commanding Officer at all installations / stations
equipped with necessary personnel and material shall cause the performance of the
following:
1) Eight guns to be fired at reveille and a gun fired every half-hour,

beginning one hour after reveille, and ending at retreat after which the salute of a gun
representing each province shall again be fired.
2) All troops at all military stations or bases and the cadets of the
PMA, PAFFS and PMMA shall be paraded at 1000 hours and the official orders
announcing the death shall be read.
3) On the day of funeral, while the remains are being borne to the
place of interment, after the funeral service at the house, building or church, 21 gun
salute shall be fired at intervals of one every minute (minute guns) at all military
installations / stations equipped with necessary personnel and material.

4) Posts distant from the place at which the funeral is held shall fire
the salute directed in (a) above at a reasonable time after the hour set for the funeral.
5) If the remains are removed from the immediate vicinity of the place
of death, all troops along the route of the funeral trains shall be aligned along the funeral
route to render appropriate honors.
6) Military mourning shall be observed for a period of one (1) month

after the date of the order announcing the death.
b. Vice President
On the day after receipt of the official notice of death of the Vice-President
of the Philippines, unless this days falls on a Sunday or holiday, in which case the
honors shall be rendered on the day after Sunday or Holiday, the Commanding Officer
at all military installations/stations will cause 8 guns to be fired every half-hour until
retreat is sounded and immediately after which a salute of one gun for each province
shall be fired.
c. Secretary of National Defense
In the event of the death of the Secretary of National Defense, the same
honor shall be rendered as prescribed in case of the death of the Vice-President of the
Philippines, omitting the guns to be fired at reveille.
d. Undersecretaries of National Defense
In the event of death of the Undersecretary of National Defense, the

minute guns to be fired on the day of the funeral and the gun salute to be fired
immediately after retreat shall be limited to the number of guns to which that official is
entitled.
e. General/Flag Officer
1) Orders announcing the death of a general or flag officer on the

active or retired list will specify the military installation/station at which gun salute shall
be fired. One hour after reveille following the date of receipt of the order, guns shall be
fired at half-hour interval until retreat.
2) When the funeral of an officer on the active or retired list entitled to

a salute takes place at or near a military installation/station, minute guns shall be fired
while the remains are being borne to the place of the interment.
3) Immediately after the remains have been lowered into the grave, a
salute corresponding to the rank of the deceased shall be fired, followed by the volleys
by artillery, guns firing simultaneously or three (3) volleys of musketry.

10.18 FUNERAL ESCORTS
a. Funeral and Graveside Services – Funeral services within the context of

this manual shall include escort, band, colors, clergy, caisson and/or funeral car,
pallbearers, and chapel services. Graveside services include the clergy, pallbearers,
firing party, drummer and bugler.
The funeral party consists of the following:

1) Band
2) Escort
3) Colors
4) Clergy
5) Caisson and active pallbearers Caparisoned horse or Funeral car
6) Honorary pallbearers
7) Firing Party
b. Funeral Escorts – The following guidelines will govern the composition of

funeral escorts. However, local commanders may vary the composition as maybe
appropriate to suit local situations:
1) One Squad - EP from E1 to E4

2) One Section - EP from E5 to E7
3) One Platoon - Company Grade Officer
4) One Company of - Field Grade Officer to One (1) Star
Two (2) platoons Rank of General/Flag Officer
5) One Bn of two (2) - Two (2) Star rank of General/Flag
Coys Officer to General and civilian VIPs
entitled to a gun salute fm 13 to 19 guns
6) Bde Size of 2 Bns - President, Ex-President, SND, USND,
CSAFP, or as prescribed by Senate
President, Speaker of House of Reps,
the SND, Supreme Court Justices or the
President
c. Composite Escort Units:
1) Normally, the funeral escort will be composed of personnel from the

Major Service responsible for providing the funeral services. However, the funeral
escort may be composed of a composite/AFP unit for persons that may be prescribed in
appropriate regulations.
2) Commanders of Composite Units and the band will be provided by

the Major Service/Unit responsible for providing the funeral services.

3) All elements of the funeral party except the caisson are present
during the graveside services. However, if troops are not conveniently available or fit
and if the family so desires, the following are used instead:
a) Clergy
b) Active pallbearers
c) Firing Squad
d) Bugler
d. Pallbearers
1) Six (6) active pallbearers shall be selected at the request of the

family of the deceased, otherwise by the commanding officer.
2) The decision in selecting honorary pallbearers rests with the

relatives of the deceased otherwise, the commanding officer.
3) Detailed active pallbearers shall be on the same rank of the

deceased and/or on lower rank.
10.19 MILITARY MOURNING
a. When a military personnel dies, the commander of the camp where the
deceased was last assigned shall declare military mourning within the military camp,
post or station concerned unless mourning is inappropriate due to circumstances of the
death. The badge of military mourning shall be prescribed. The badge of military
mourning is a straight band or plain black cloth or black crepe four inches wide, worn
around the left sleeve and above the elbow of the service uniform. It shall be worn
during periods prescribed or when specifically ordered by proper authority, and by all
military personnel in uniform attending a military funeral in their individual capacity.
b. National Flag at half-staff – The Camp Commander of the camp where the
deceased lies in state shall be responsible for placing the national flag at half-staff. The
national and regimental colors and standards will be draped and two streams of black
crepe (7 inches long and about 12 inches wide) attached to the ferrule below, will be
used.
HALF MASS

1) Death of an Officer – For officer who dies at a military post, the
National Flag will be displayed at half-staff.
2) Funeral of an Enlisted Personnel – During the funeral of enlisted

personnel at a military post, the national flag will be displayed at half-staff. It will then be
hoisted to the top after the final volley or gun is fired, or after the remains are taken from
the post.
3) The funeral honor services and other last courtesies are also given
to retired personnel and inactive reserve officers when their remains are brought to the
chapel.
4) DCS RRA shall be responsible for coordinating with relevant offices

or units for the availability of funeral services and other last courtesies for deceased
AFP veterans, AFP retirees and reservists in the inactive status.
5) Unless directed otherwise by CSAFP or higher authority, Maj Svc

Command and Commanders of AFP Wide Support and Separate Units are responsible
for arranging and conducting the funeral services according to the following guidelines:
a) For AFP personnel who dies while in active service by the

Major service to which deceased was assigned at the time of death. If the deceased
was detailed to an AFP Wide Support or Separate Unit at the time of death, that unit will
conduct the funeral services unless the particular Maj Svc of the deceased specifically
requests for the conduct of funeral services.
b) For AFP personnel on Retired/Inactive status, and for civilian

when so directed:
i. By the Maj Svc to which deceased was last assigned
at the time of separation form the AFP.
ii. By the Maj Svc Reserve Command to which the
Inactive Reserve Officer was last assigned.
iii. HSC, GHQ will provide funeral services for all others
remains falling under the foregoing classification, when so authorized and directed by
proper authority.
c) Funeral services in localities where the responsible Maj Svc

having no means or facilitates to conduct said services, the same will be assigned to the
Maj Svc or unit which is in the most convenient position to provide the same. DCS PER
in coordination with DCS OPR shall designate the particular Maj Svc, which shall render
the services referred to above.
d) CSAFP, or higher authority, may direct, in specific case, the

funeral services that will be rendered to include funeral escorts and honors. In such

cases, GHQ & HSC will be responsible for planning, conducting and coordinating the
funeral services and arrangement, unless otherwise directed.
10.20 COMMANDER FUNERAL ESCORT
The Commander of a Funeral Escort will be as follows:
a. Of the President or an ex-President: as directed by the Secretary of

National Defense.
b. Of the Secretary of National Defense: as directed by the Acting Secretary

of National Defense.
c. Of the Undersecretary of National Defense: as directed by the Secretary

of National Defense.
d. Of the Chief of Staff, or a former Chief of Staff: as directed by the

Secretary of National Defense.
e. Of an Officer: an officer of the same grade; if none such be present, as

directed by the commanding Officer.
f. Of a cadet: a cadet of the same class
g. Of a non-commissioned officer of one of the first three grades: by a non-

commissioned officer of the highest grade available.
h. Of an E-4: by an E-4.
10.21 MILITARY ATTENDANCE AT A FUNERAL
a. Procedures
1) The funeral of a person in the military service is attended by such

personnel as directed by the commanding officer.
2) All persons in the military service not in formation attending military

funerals will follow the mourners in order to rank, seniors in front. All person in the
military service in uniform attending in their individual capacity will face the casket and
execute the hand salute at any time when the casket is being lowered into the grave,
during the firing of the volley, and while TAPS is being sounded. During the prayer or
blessing of the remains at the graveside, military personnel in uniform remain covered
and vow their heads. Honorary pallbearers in uniform will conform to those instructions
when not in motion.

3) Military personnel in civilian clothes in the above case will stand at
attention uncovered, and hold the headdress over the left breast.
4) The chaplain will remain uncovered except in inclement weather or

if religious rites prescribed head covering.
5) During a military funeral, the drum shall be muffled and covered

with black crepe or thin black serge.
6) The regimental colors shall not be place in mourning or draped

except when ordered by the Secretary of National Defense. When so ordered, two (2)
streams of black crepe 7 feet long and about 12 inches wide, attached to the ferrule
below the spearhead shall be used.
7) Uniform – See AFPR G-137.
b. When in formation under arms - See training publications of the different

arms.
10.22 OFFICER AND OTHER GRADES OUT OF RANKS
a. At a military funeral, all persons in the military service in uniform or civilian

clothes attending in their individual capacity, or as honorary pallbearers will stand at
attention uncovered, and hold the headdress over the left breast, while the casket is
being carried from the caisson to and lowered into the grave during the firing of the
volley while TAPS is being sounded, and during the services at the grave. During the
prayer they also bow their heads. In cold or inclement weather, they will remain covered
and will remain executing the hand salute as the casket is carried past them to grave or
until it is carried beyond saluting distance. They will also execute the hand salute during
the firing of the volleys and while TAPS is being sounded. This will also apply to the
chaplain except during the reading of the service.
b. While the casket is being carried from the house of the caisson, from the
caisson to the church, or from the church to the caisson, they will stand at attention
uncovered and place the headdress over the left breast. In cold or inclement weather
however, they will remain covered and will execute the hand salute.
c. They will salute the casket as it passes in any military funeral at anytime
or place, by facing the casket, assuming the position of attention uncovering and placing
the headdress over the left breast. In cold or inclement weather, they will remain
covered and will execute the hand salute.
d. The active pallbearers while carrying the casket will remain covered; at
other times they will conform to the above prescription.

10.23 WHERE REMAINS OF THOSE IN ACTIVE SERVICE ARE TURNED OVER TO
RELATIVES
The commanding officer of any post, camp, depot or and other station will furnish
a firing squad of not to extend eight (8) men, a drummer and bugler with appropriate
vigil guards preferably from the branch of service of the deceased to attend the funeral
of a person who has died in active military service and whose remains have been
turned-over to the relatives or friend of the deceased. And provided that such a firing
squad can be furnished without interfering with duties of the man composing it, and
without expense to them or to the Government, except in the use of available
transportation.
10.24 WHERE THE FUNERAL OF THOSE ON RETIRED LIST NOT HELD AT

MILITARY POST.
a. Where the funeral of an officer or an enlisted personnel on the retired list

occurs other than at a military post, base, camp or station, but near one, a funeral
escort may be ordered by the commander of the post, base, camp, or station which is
nearest to the place where the funeral is to be held. Such escort will exceed the number
prescribed in paragraph 18 for the rank of the deceased officer or enlisted personnel.
b. Where the funeral occurs other than at a military post, base, camp or
station, and too remote from there to justify the sending of the eight (8) men, a drummer
and bugler with appropriate vigil guards preferably from the branch of service of the
deceased, a funeral escort may be ordered by the proper commander under provision
of paragraph 18.

SECTION XI
WREATHLAYING CEREMONY
11.1 GENERAL
Wreathlaying has a historical function that immortalizes great men, events and
places. This activity is usually given by visiting dignitaries, ranking government and
military official to pay tribute, homage and respect to a particular place or person on
significant occasions and dates that are of great importance to a history or person. This
is usually done at the following places.
a. Rizal Monument
b. Libingan ng mga Bayani
c. Bonifacio Monument
d. Aguinaldo Shrine
e. Corregidor Shrine
f. Tejeros Convention Marker
g. Dambana ng Kagitingan
h. Other national shrine and sites
11.2 ORGANIZATION
The ceremonial elements shall be composed of the following:
a. Escort of Honor of thirty-six (36) men (or as the space area warrants) with
one (1) CPT/1LT or LT/LTJG as Escort Commander and one (1) guidon bearer.
b. Two (2) wreath bearers or more (in even numbers) depending on the
number of wreaths to be laid.
c. Firing Party twenty-one (21) men (3 x 7) with Firing Commander.
Part II / Section XI: Wreathlaying Ceremony 209

d. Band of at least twenty-five (25) members with conductor. A drummer and
three (3) buglers will be made as part of the band.
e. Two (2) color bearers for the National and Unit colors, and two (2) color
guards.
11.3 FORMATION OF TROOPS (WREATH FORMATION)
a. The members of the Escort of Honor form at both sides of the path where
the Guest of Honor and Military Host (MH) will walk towards Point 4 (where the wreath
is to be laid) facing each other and maintaining proper interval between each other. The
Escort Commander and the guidon bearer behind him position themselves
approximately six (6) paces to the front of the marker (Point 2) where the Guest of
Honor and the MH will stand for the ceremony.
In case there is a civilian host, the civilian host will remain at Point 2 throughout
the ceremony.

b. The National and the Unit color bearers and guards are prepositioned on
both sides of the tomb, monument or shrine with the National Color at the right side.
c. The Firing Party is formed approximately ten (10) paces to the right of the
monument, tomb or shrine.
d. The wreath detail position themselves at a point in the path to assist the
GOH in bringing the wreath to Point 4.
e. The band is formed at the vicinity to the right of the Escort Commander or
as the area dictates.
11.4 PROCEDURE
a. The GOH alights from his car at Point 1 where he will be met by the Host.
(If the MH is riding in a car with guest of honor(s), both will alight at the same point). At
this time, the ceremonial troops are brought to attention by the Escort Commander.
b. The MH escorts the GOH to point 2. In accordance with the protocol

requirement, the MH stays at the left side of the GOH. Other guests stay behind them.
c. As soon as the GOH and the MH have occupied their respective positions
at Point 2, the Escort Commander faces the troops and commands TANGHAL, TA. He
assumes his original position, as the guidon bearer executes the appropriate salute.
d. The Band plays the National Anthem of the GOH (if he is head of the state
or ambassador) followed by the Philippine National Anthem. If the GOH is not a head
of the state or ambassador, only the Philippine National Anthem will be played.
e. After the National Anthem has been played, the Escort Commander
together with the guidon bearer executes order arms. He faces the troops and
commands; BABA, TA. He faces about, salutes and says, "Ginoo, handa na po ang

pag-aalay". The Escort Commander together with the guidon bearer goes to the side
giving way to the GOH and MH.
Note: In cases were there are more than one wreathlayers, the most junior will lay the wreath first.
f. Band plays the Pilipinas Kong Mahal.
g. At the last note of the music, the MH invites the GOH to move forward.
h. As the GOH and the MH approach the wreath, one of the wreath bearers
will command DAMPOT BULAKLAK, NA and simultaneously, the wreath bearers
Proceeds to Point 4 followed by the GOH and the MH. Other guests remain in their
positions at Point 2. At this instance, the drummer and three (3) buglers who are initially
with the band, position themselves near the monument.
i. When the Honoree and MH reaches Point 3, the MH stops. The GOH and
the Wreath Details continue walking until they reach Point 4. (Note: The movement from
Point 2 to Point 4 should be completed to coincide with the last note of the Pilipinas
Kong Mahal).
j. The GOH assisted by the wreath bearers, lays the wreath then steps back
to Point 4. Wreath bearers salute the monument then face about and occupy their
respective positions at both sides of the monument.
k. At this instance, Escort Commander commands TANGHAL, TA. The

escort Commander together with the guidon bearers, executes present arms.
l. Drummers sound four (4) ruffled drums. Everybody in the area renders
appropriate respect/salute.
m. After the ruffle drums have been sounded, the firing party fires three
volleys then the bugler sounds the TAPS. If the flower drop is added in the ceremony,
petals are dropped after the sounding of TAPS.
n. At the last note of TAPS, Escort Commander and the guidon bearer
executes order arms. He commands the troops BABA, TA.
o. The Band plays Sampaguita while GOH moves from Point 4 to Point 3
where he will be joined by the host.
p. From Point 3, the GOH and Host goes back to Point 2.
q. The band ceases playing the music as soon as the GOH and the Host
have occupied their original positions at Point 2.
r. Escort Commander with guidon bearer move to their original positions at

Point 2. Escort Commander executes about face and commands TANGHAL, TA. He

again executes about face and together with the guidon bearer they execute present
arms. After the Honoree has acknowledged the salute, the Escort Commander and the
guidon bearer execute order arms. The Escort Commander then faces about and
commands BABA, TA. Again he faces about and executes hand salute to the GOH
and says "Tapos na po ang pag-aalay" (Sir, that ends the ceremony).
s. The GOH acknowledges his salute. .
t. The GOH and the MH face each other. The MH will render appropriate
respect/salute and exchange pleasantries with the GOH.
11.5 DIAGRAM (POINTS 1, 2, 3, 4)
Diagram: Depicting the formation of troops during wreath laying ceremonies.

(May vary depending on the venue).

A WREATHLAYING CEREMONY
11.6 PROCEDURE FOR THREE VOLLEYS OF FIRE
On the third and fourth drum ruffles, the Firing party commander commands
HARAP SA KANAN, RAP and AGAP, TA respectively. After the fourth drum ruffle, the
firing party commander will command UNANG TILAP SIPAT, TOK. After the last word
of the preparatory command SIPAT, the first squad firers aim their rifles 45 degrees
upward and to the left. Simultaneously, their right foot will move one foot backward
opposite the direction of their rifles. At the command of execution TOK, firers must pull
the trigger at the same time. The second and third squads will do the same as the firing
party commander dictates.
11.7 FLOWER DROP – refer to Special Ceremonies for Philippine Air Force.

SECTION XII
MILITARY WEDDING
12.1 GENERAL
The military wedding is like other weddings except for the following members of
the AFP in the bridal party are in uniform and the bride and groom usually leave the
chapel or church under the traditional arch of swords. Another difference is, during the
reception, the groom's sword will be used by the bride to cut the first piece of cake. The
uniform worn is in accordance with the kind of wedding, which was planned by the
concerned parties. Members of the AFP, however, usually wear white/white duck and
gala during such occasion.
The arch of swords takes place immediately following the ceremony when the
couple leaves the chapel or church. Only commissioned officers are entitled to a draw
sword for their wedding. Commissioned officers and cadets are authorized to participate
in the sword ceremony. They have to be in white duck, major service blouse or as
appropriate. Prior to the conduct of this, however, approval/permission from the
officiating chaplain or clergyman must be sought especially when it is being done inside
the chapel or church.
12.2 PLANNING THE WEDDING
Part II / Section XII: Military Wedding 215

The date and time of the wedding are decided by the couple, their parents and
some close relatives. Likewise, they decide on where the wedding ceremony and the
reception will take place. In planning the wedding, the following are to be considered:
a. Religious Ceremonies
b. Parents
c. Best man for the groom
d. Maid of honor for the bride
e. Bouquet or corsage for the bride
f. Rings for the bride and groom
g. Wedding gown for the bride
h. Reception
i. Wedding trip
12.3 PREPARATION FOR THE WEDDING
a. The Chapel
The chapel is reserved on the first come, first served basis. Permission for
its use shall be obtained as soon as possible, in order to ensures the desired date and
hour for the wedding. Reservation for the chapel should be done by the couple with the
chapel authority at least one month prior to the scheduled date.
b. The Chaplain
As in the case of all weddings, it is important for the engaged couple to
consult their chaplain (clergyman) at least a month before the schedule of the wedding.
The chaplain will advise the couple concerning such requirements as medical test,
obtaining the marriage license and other requirements. Although most chaplains refer to
officiate in the chapel where he is assigned, a clergyman from the couple's home church
may assist the ceremony if this is acceptable to the chaplain and is so arranged
beforehand. The official chaplain (clergyman) will be in accordance with the religious
preference of the couple.
c. The Music
In conformity with the religious aspect of wedding ceremonies, the pianist
shall play traditional wedding music and selection from the library of sacred music
available in the chapel or church.
d. Flowers and Decorations

Flowers and decorations for the church may be done by the church
authorities. It may also be done by the concerned parties. However, decoration which
shall require alteration to the chapel or church or should have prior clearance and
approval by the chaplain (clergyman).
12.4 REQUIREMENTS FOR THE WEDDING
The following are to be secured a month or so prior to the schedule of the

wedding:
a Birth Certificates of both groom and bride.
b Baptismal Certificates of both groom and bride.
c Background Information of the bride in case the groom is a military man

and vice versa.
d Request permission to marry (Personal Action Form) addressed to the

Major Service Commander (Attn: Personnel Officer).
e Certificate that the prospective groom and bride have undergone series of
seminars on family planning from Population Commission Centers or from Rural Health
Centers.
f Certification that the couple has undergone pre-marriage, counseling at

St. Ignatius chapel, GHQ, CGEA.
g Certification that the marriage has been announced several times in

churches / chapels near the residence of the bride and groom.
12.5 WEDDING ENTOURAGE
a. The entourage is normally composed of the following:
1) Sword Sponsor
2) Groom with parents
3) Ushers
4) Bestman
5) Principal Sponsors
6) Ring Bearer

7) Coin Bearer
8) Flower girl/s
9) Secondary Sponsors
10) Bride with parents
11) Maid of Honor
b. The bride and the groom may have one attendant each, this would be the
best man and the maid honor. The bride will ask the sister or a very close relative, or an
intimate friend, to be her maid of honor. The bride can also have bridesmaids. Other
members of the bridal attendant are the following: flower girls with the age of 4-7 years
old, coin bearer and the ring bearer (4-5 years old).
c. Best Man
The groom chooses his best man and ushers from among his closest
friends or relatives. His best man may be a brother or an intimate friend. The best man
is bride groom's aide. It is his duty to ensure the smooth administration of the rites.
Before the ceremony, the best man checks on the groom's uniform, marriage license,
wedding rings and swords. He checks what has to be signed, and that everything is in
order. He notifies the ushers to be at the chapel or church at least twenty minutes
before the ceremony and he will arrive with the groom to be sure that the latter is not
late and that he is properly dressed. Following the couple's vow, the best man joins in
the recessional in which he customarily escorts the maid of honor. Afterwards, he may
hurry on to the place of reception and check on details. He does not stand in the
receiving line at the reception, but is near the groom to be of further help.
d. The Ushers
The ushers represent not only the groom but also the families of the bride
and groom as well. They act as unofficial host, greeting the guest in a pleasant manner,
and are escorts in the chapel, church and in the place of the reception. When ushering,

the ushers should not wear the swords. They may however, leave their swords at a
place convenient for the arch of sword (sabers) ceremony.
e. Secondary Sponsors
Secondary Sponsors are selected by the couple from their close relatives
and friends. Usually the secondary sponsors are composed of three pairs and their
duties are as follows:
1) Candle - The first pair is usually designated as the pair to light the
candles.
2) Veil - The second pair is designated to pin the veil on the couple.
3) Chord - The third group will put on the chord to the couple.
f. Principal Sponsors
The principal sponsors are selected persons usually of the higher age
bracket than that of the couple and coming from relatives, family friends and senior
officers of the AFP chosen by the couple. The main duty of the principal sponsors is to
act as secondary parents to the couple.
g. Sword Sponsors
The Sword Sponsors are selected officers of the AFP usually composed of
classmates of the groom to perform the arch of swords. The sword sponsor is
composed of a minimum of four (4) pairs and a maximum of eight (8) pairs, depending
upon the size of the chapel or church.
12.6 WEDDING CEREMONY
a. The Processional
Normally, the bridal entourage is arranged in the order stated during the
processional, however, it varies depending upon the couple and church authorities:

1) Sword Sponsor
2) Groom with parents
3) Ushers
4) Bestman
5) Principal Sponsors
6) Ring Bearer
7) Coin Bearer
8) Flower girl
9) Secondary Sponsors
10) Bridesmaid/s
11) Bride with parents
12) Maid of Honor
b. Procedure
As soon as the bridal entourage has been formed at a designated or

appropriate area in the vestibule as in (Fig 1), The Sword Sponsors march in column of
two's towards the altar with the most senior or designated commander, giving the
commands. When the elements reach the point, which is in line with the first pew, the
Commander commands, TILAP, TO. As soon as they are halted, the Sword Sponsors
automatically execute center face. They maintain said formation until the last element of
the bridal entourage has passed and everyone has reached their respective positions in
the altar as in (Fig 2). The Swords Sponsor commander then commands PALABAS,
RAP and marches off towards the entrance of the chapel or church. The groom who
has been prepositioned near the altar waits for the bride. When bride reaches the point
between the groom and the maid of honor, she pauses about three paces from the
groom. Then the bride reaches groom's left arm. The couple then proceeds to their
designated seats. The chaplain then gives the signal for the guests to take seats. The
ceremony follows.

Figure 1: Figure 2:
FORMATION OF BRIDAL ENTOURAGE POSITON OF BRIDAL ENTOURAGE
AT THE ENTRANCE
c. The Recessional
ARCH OF SWORD (SABER)
(1) The Bride and the Groom are the first to leave the chapel, with the
Bride on the right side of the Groom. The Maid of Honor and the Best Man walk out
together, followed by the Bridesmaids and the ushers in pairs. The recessional will be
conducted in the order in Fig 3.

Figure 3: RECESSIONAL
(2) Arch of Swords (Sabers) Ceremony - Before the end of the

ceremony, the Sword Sponsors again form at the vicinity of the entrance of the chapel.
They march towards a designated area where the bridal entourage will form for the
recessional with the designated commander giving commands. Upon reaching the
designated point, the Sword Commander commands, TILAP, TO: The Sword Sponsor
halts and automatically executes center face. As soon as the Bride and Groom and
other members of the bridal entourage are ready for recessional, the Sword Sponsor
Commander commands, PALABAS, RAP first and then PASULONG, KAD. The Sword
Sponsor marches towards a designated area outside the chapel or church where the
arch of sword is to be conducted. Upon reaching the area, the Sword Sponsor
Commander then commands, TILAP, TO. The Sword Sponsor halts and automatically
executes center face. As soon as the Bride and the Groom are approximately 6 paces
before the first elements of the Sword Sponsor, the Sword Commander commands,
ANTABAY, BUNOT, KALIS. The Sword Sponsor executes the command wherein each
sword/saber bearer raises his right arm with the sword/saber, rotating in a clockwise
direction, so that the cutting edge of the sword/saber will be on top, thus forming an
arch with his opposite across the aisle. As the Groom and Bride pass by a pair of Sword
Sponsor, the swords of the particular pair will be rotated with a snap and hitting each
other's sword thereby producing a sound. Afterwards that pair automatically executes
carry sword. This series of sword ceremonies is done up to the last pair of Sword
Sponsors.

12.7 WEDDING RECEPTIONS
a. The type of reception as well as the number of guest to be invited

depends upon the choice of the couple. A reception may be held at home, in the
officer's club at a hotel or other similar places, which the couple may select.
b. A receiving line may also be formed at the entrance of the place of

reception. An example of a receiving line is indicated in Fig 4. To greet the bridal party,
one offers something like the following "Best Wishes to the Bride and Congratulations to
the Bridegroom".
Figure 4: VERSION OF A RECEIVING LINE
c. Seating arrangement - A presidential table is always prepared in the

reception area. Usually, the Groom and Bride, Principal Sponsors, Chaplain or
Clergyman and the Parents are seated at the presidential table.

SECTION XIII
OATHTAKING
13.1 GENERAL
Oathtaking may be a separate and distinct ceremony or integrated as a part of a

formal ceremony such as flag raising.
13.2 OATHTAKING (INDOOR PART OF A PROGRAM)
a As soon as the emcee announces that an Oathtaking Ceremony will take

place, the marcher of the group comes in front, faces the audience and says: MGA
TAONG MANUNUMPA, PUMAGITNA KAD. The persons about to take their oath rise
from their seats and orderly form a line in front of the marcher facing the stage.
b The marcher faces about, salutes the person who will administer the oath
and reports: "Ginoo, ang mga taong manunumpa nandito na pong lahat".
c. The person who will administer the oath rises, acknowledges the salute,
proceeds to the rostrum and says: “Mangyaring itaas ang kanang kamay at ulitin
ang aking sasabihin” After the last word is delivered, the persons about to take their
oath should mentally count one to three. The third count will be for the raising of their
right hand.
d. After the oath taking, on the last word of the person administering the
oath, the persons who swore should mentally count one to three. The third count will be
hands down. The administering officer may then shake hands with the oath takers. (If
oath takers are in mass, shaking hands may be waived. The sentence; “Congratulations
to all of you!” may do.) After which, the marcher again says: MGA TAONG NANUMPA,
SUMALUNAN, KAD. The oath takers go back to their seats and sit down on the signal
from the marcher.
Part II / Section XIII: Oathtaking 224

e. The next number of the program follows.
13.3 OATHTAKING (OUTDOOR)
a The oath takers are initially positioned opposite the troop commander and
staff.
b As soon as the emcee announces the oath taking, the marcher

commands: MGA TAONG MANUNUMPA, PASULONG, KAD. They march forward and
stop approximately six paces away from the troop commander.
c The marcher salutes and reports to the troop commander: "Ginoo, ang
mga taong manunumpa nandito pong lahat".
d The troop commander acknowledges the salute and directs his staff to
march to the side. The person who will administer the oath goes to the rostrum and
says: "Mangyaring itaas ang kanang kamay at sumunod sa akin". He then
administers the oath.
e After the oath taking, the VIPs shake hands with the oath takers. The
marcher then commands the oath takers to occupy their positions, which may be:
1) Designated seats in the grandstand, or
2) A single line to the right of the troop commander and staff facing
the troops to witness the pass-in-review if there is any.
AFP OATHTAKING CCAFP OATHTAKING
Part II / Section XIII: Oathtaking 225

SECTION XIV
OPENING/CLOSING AND
GRADUATION CEREMONIES
14.1 GENERAL
This section prescribes the standard procedures and sequences to be adopted

for the Course Opening/Closing and Ceremonies in the conduct of any unit training.
a. Course – includes all courses, seminars and training conducted by units.
b. Party – includes the host, guest/s, and distinguished personalities who are
supposed to have seats or places at the stage or similar places.
14.3 SEQUENCES
a. OPENING CEREMONY (Indoor)
1) Processional
2) Entry of colors
3) National Anthem (Mass singing)
4) Invocation
5) Presentation of Students
6) Declaration of Opening of the Course
7) Introduction of Keynote/Guest of Honor and Speaker
8) Speech
9) Presentation of Plaque to the Guest (if any)
10) Mass Singing of Pilipinas Kong Mahal
11) Exit of Colors
Part II / Section XIV: Opening/Closing and Graduation Ceremonies 226

12) Recessional
b. CLOSING CEREMONY (Indoor)
1) Processional
2) Entry of Colors
3) National Anthem (Mass singing)
4) Invocation
5) Opening Remarks
6) Presentation of Candidates for Graduation
7) Declaration of Graduates
8) Distribution of Certificates of Awards
9) Introduction of the Guest Speaker
10) Speech
11) Presentation Of Plague/Memento to the Guest (If any)
12) Mass Singing of Pilipinas Kong Mahal
13) Exit of Colors
14) Recessional
14.4 PROCEDURES
a. Opening Ceremony (Indoor)
1) Processional – This part of the program marks the entry of the party. Here,
the students arise and stand at attention. To make simultaneous movements, a
command may be necessary or any form of signal that may serve as a cue. The party
members, on the other hand, position themselves right in front of their respective
designated seats and remains standing facing the students.
2) Entry of Colors – Colors to be used are the national color and unit (training
unit) color.
3) Singing of National Anthem – The cue when to start the singing of

National Anthem may be given by the one designated to lead and position

himself/herself at the middle before the students. After the singing, everybody remains
standing for the invocation.
4) Invocation – the minister or the designated person who will lead the
invocation proceeds to the podium/rostrum after the singing. After the invocation,
everybody will take his/her respective seats. Again pre-arrange signal shall be made as
a cue for everybody to sit at the same time.
5) Presentation of Students – Students shall be presented to the commander

or to his representative who has the authority to declare the opening of the course by
the School Commandant or by his authorized representative. The statement during the
presentation shall include the number of students, title of the course and the
recommended date of opening. The students rise upon presentation at a pre-arranged
cue.
6) Declarations of Course Opening – At this portion the Commander or his

authorized representative declares the course open. The moment the Commander
leaves the rostrum/podium, the students in coordinated movement sit down.
7) Introduction of the Guest Speaker – Everybody remains seated when the

guest speaker is being introduced. The moment the guest speaker is presented,
everybody rises.
8) Speech of the Guest Speaker – Everybody remains standing unless told

by the keynote/guest speaker to sit down. At the end of his speech, everybody rises
with a round of applause.
9) Presentation of Plaque of Appreciation to the Guest/s (if any). This portion

is optional.
10) Exit of Colors
11) Recessional – Exit of the party and program ends. Take note: the
headgear shall not be taken off from invocation up to the end of ceremony.
b. OPENING CEREMONY (Outdoor)
The sequences and procedures are the same except that there will be no
entry and exit of colors. Colors will be placed at the ceremonial area and the graduating
class will be in mass formation.
c. GRADUATION CEREMONY (Indoor)
1) Processional - this is the first part of the program, which marks the entry of
the party. Here, the students rise and stand at attention. The party members, upon

reaching the stage, will position themselves right in front of their respective designated
seats and remain standing.
2) Entry of Colors - Colors to be used are the national color and unit (training
unit) color.
3) National Anthem - The cue when to start the singing of National Anthem
shall be given by the one designated to lead. After the singing, everybody remains
standing for the invocation.
4) Invocation - The minister or the designated person who will lead the
invocation approaches the podium/rostrum after the singing and proceeds with the
invocation. After the invocation, everybody takes their respective seats. A pre-arranged
signal will be made as a cue so that everybody will sit down at the same time.
5) Presentation of Candidates for Graduation - The candidates for graduation

shall be presented by the School Commandant in the case of Major Service Training
Command/Center or by the training director/s for the In-service Unit Training. The
presentation statements shall include the number of candidates and the course title
among others. In this part, the candidates rise soon as they are presented. Pre-
arranged signal is needed in order to achieve a coordinated and simultaneous
movement.
6) Declaration of Graduates - The Commander or his authorized

representative, by virtue of his authority, declares the candidates for graduation as
graduates. Right after the declaration of graduates, the graduating class gives a round
of applause and then sits down.
7) Distribution of Certificates and Awards - The Adjutant or the

Administrative Officer reads the orders for those who will graduate, followed by the
giving of awards and certificates for outstanding students. The distribution of certificates
maybe given in bunch or individually and the sequence shall be at the option of the
school or unit concerned. The awards, however, shall be given and be received
individually.
8) Introduction of the Guest Speaker - Everybody will be seated while the

guest speaker is being introduced. The moment the guest speaker is presented,
everybody rises.
9) Speech - Everybody remains standing unless told by the guest speaker to

sit down. At the end of his speech, everybody rises with a round of applause.
10) Mass Signing of “Pilipinas Kong Mahal” followed by Unit or School Hymn,
if any. The one designated to lead positions himself at the center in front of the class.
After the singing, he goes back to his place.

11) Exit of Colors.
12) Recessional - End of the program.
d. GRADUATION CEREMONY (Outdoor)
Basically, the sequences and procedures are the same except that there
are no Entry and Exit of Colors. Colors are in place at the ceremonial area before the
start of the ceremonies.
14.5 Other Details
a. A Master of Ceremonies in this particular program is optional.
b. An OVERTURE may be tendered to the Guest of Honor and Speaker who

are mostly VIP (SND, CS, AFP, Major Service Commanders, and the like). It is genial
gesture of ingenuity by the host to the GOHAS. This must be inserted after the
processional.
c. Parade and Review
Parade and review shall only be tendered during graduation in honor of

the graduating class and also of the Guest of Honor. The parade sequences and
procedures are similar with that of giving honors to awardees. The program proper is
conducted in such manner. However, there are modifications in the processional, the
playing of National Anthem, and the recessional. The processional is substituted with
the marching of the graduating class with the colors towards the grandstand being led
by the troop commander. In the recessional, the graduating class exits in the manner
and sequence at the option of the school or unit concerned. When the band plays the
National Anthem, everybody renders hand salute.
d. Appropriate Authorized Representative of the Commander.
Appropriate person to act as authorized representative of the Commander

or person to act in his behalf to declare the opening or to declare the graduates are the
Assistant or Deputy Commander, the Chief of Staff and the Staff for Training or their
equivalent, in that order.
e. Cue and Signal
Cue or any form of signal must be established to achieve a coordinated

and simultaneous execution by the graduates.

PART III
SPECIAL
CEREMONIES
Part III: Special Ceremonies 231

SECTION I
SPECIAL DRILLS AND CEREMONIES FOR THE

PHILIPPINE MILITARY ACADEMY
DRILL REGULATION OF THE CCAFP, PMA

1.1 PURPOSE AND SCOPE:
a. Purpose. To prescribe drill regulations for the Cadet Corps Armed Forces
of the Philippines (CCAFP) during the conduct of its parade on Saturdays and Sundays
in PMA composed of cadets wherein their uniforms and squad formations and
compositions are different from the other AFP units thereby requiring a different kind of
marching that fits to the steps and movements of the CCAFP peculiar to the “Old Drill”
tradition of the Academy.
b. Scope. The drill regulation of the CCAFP covers only marching and
brigade parade formations. All other aspects of drill and ceremonies such as
Commands, Manual of Arms, etc will be taken from the existing drill regulations of the
AFP Manual.
1.2 GENERAL:
a. The Philippine Military Academy takes the task of building leaders very
seriously. Since its creation in 1898, the academy has refined a unique system in
teaching leadership that is to include the drill regulations.
b. The academy, with a history as old as the Armed Forces of the Philippines
itself, is an institution rich in unique traditions handed from generations of classes.
c. Today, that uniqueness is also attributed by PMA being one of the Tourist
Spots in Baguio City and being always visited especially on weekends because of the
Part III / Section I: Special Drills and Ceremonies for the Philippine Military Academy 232
holding of Parade and Silent Drill. It is this reason why CCAFP has to abide with its own
drill regulations during parades inside Fort Del Pilar only.
d. During parades outside camp wherein PMA is required to participate,

CCAFP should abide with existing regulations of the present AFP Manual on Drill and
Ceremonies.
1.3 FORMATIONS:
a. The very basic unit in the CCAFP is the squad. It is composed of one (1)
squad leader, one assistant squad leader and six (6) members. They are arranged or
formed as follows:
SQUAD FORMATION
b. A platoon is composed of three (3) squads.
1.4 STEPS AND MARCHING
a. All marching movements executed from the halt are initiated from the
b. Except for route step march and ease march, all marching movements are
executed while marching at attention. Marching at attention is the combination of the
position of attention and the procedures for the prescribed step executed
simultaneously.
c. When executed from the halt, all steps begin with left foot.
d. All marching movements are executed in the cadence of quicktime (120

steps per minute).
e. A step is the prescribed distance from one heel to the other heel of a
marching soldier. A step is approximately 30 inches long.
f. To march with a 30-inch step from the halt, the command is PASULONG
KAD. On the preparatory command PASULONG, shift weight of the body to the right
foot without noticeable movement. On the command execution KAD, step forward 30-
inch steps, keeping the head and eyes fixed to the front. The arms swing in natural
motion, without exaggeration and without bending at the elbows, approximately six (6)
inches straight to the front and three (3) inches straight to the rear of the trouser seam.
Keep the fingers curled as if in the position of Attention so that the fingers just clear the
trouser.
g. To halt while marching, the command PULUTONG, HINTO is given. The

preparatory command PULUTONG is given as either foot strikes the marching surface
as long as the command of execution TO is given the next time that foot strikes the
marching surface. The halt is executed in two counts. After HINTO is commanded,
execute the additional step required after the command of execution and then bring trail
foot alongside the lead foot, assuming the position of Attention and terminating
movement.
h. During LIKO SA KANAN/LIKO SA KALIWA, Half Step March (15 inch

step) is executed the moment the pivot foot executes the turning. Continue marching,
taking 120, 30-inch steps per minute, clipping the arms to your sides. At the command
PASULONG KAD, execute shoving and shift to normal steps.
1.5 SQUADS LEFT OR RIGHT
The squad being in line, the command to turn on a fixed pivot sand march is -
PANGKAT PAKANAN (PAKALIWA), KAD.
a. When executed from the halt, the entire squad steps off with the left foot,
the count beginning on the beat following the command of execution. On movements
from a halt, whether the turn is to the right or left, the left foot falls on the odd counts.
The sixth count, on which the entire squad steps off in the new direction, therefore
requires a full step forward with the right foot.
b. When executed while marching, if the turn is to the right, the command of
execution is given as the right foot strikes the ground; if to the left, as the left foot strikes
the ground. The count begins on the second step after the command of execution, the
beat between the command and the first count being designated as "step". The
execution of the movement begins on the first count, the intervening step being a full
step to the front by all members of the squad. If the turn is to the right, the count of one
will fall on the right foot. The sixth count, on which all step off in the new direction,
therefore will require a full step with the left foot, and the sixth count on the right, the
step off being made with the foot.
(1) At the count of ONE - in the front rank, No. 1 faces to the right in
marching and marks time; No. 2 executes right oblique, taking one full step; No. 3
executes right oblique, taking one full step. In the rear rank, No. 4 takes one step to the
front; No. 3 takes one step to the front; No. 2 faces to the left in marching and takes one
full step; and No. 1 faces to the left in marching and takes one full step.
(2) At the count of TWO - in the front rank, No. 1 marks time; No. 2
takes a short step into his position in line; No. 3 takes a full step in the oblique direction;
and No. 4 takes a full step in the oblique direction. In the rear rank, No. 4 takes his
second full step to the front; No. 3 takes his second full step to the front; No.2 faces
right in marching and takes a step into position directly behind No.3; and No. 1 takes his
second step in the left direction.
(3) At the count of THREE - in the front rank, No. 1 marks time; No. 2
executes Half Right Face in marching and marks time; No. 3 takes a short step into his
position in line; and No. 4 takes his third full step in the oblique direction. In the rear
rank, No. 4 takes his third full step to the front; No. 2 takes one step to the front, thus
keeping himself directly behind No. 3 rear rank; and No. 1 takes a short step to the right
in marching, thus placing himself directly behind No. 2 rear rank.
(4) At the count of FOUR - in the front rank, No. 1 marks time; No. 2
marks time; No. 3 executes Half Right Face in marching and marks time; and No. 4
takes a short step into his position in line. In the rear rank, No. 4 takes his fourth step to
the front; No. 3 takes a half step to the front, thus coming behind No. 3 front rank; No. 2
takes a short step to place himself behind No. 3 front rank; and No. 2 takes a short step
to place himself behind No. 1 front rank.
(5) At the count of FIVE - in the front rank, No. 1 marks time; No. 2
marks time; No. 3 marks time; and No. 4 executes Half Right Face in marching and
marks time in the rear rank, No. 4 executes Right Oblique and takes full step into his
position in line covering No. 4 front rank; No. 3 faces to the right and marks time; No. 2
faces to the right and marks time; and No. 1 faces to the right and marks time.
(6) At the count of SIX, everyone steps off with a full step to the front.
Thus far we have been considering Squad Right. Had the

command been squad Left, No. 4 front rank would have been the pivot man Instead of
No. 1; No. 2 rear rank would have moved straight to the front, followed by Nos. 3 and 4.
c. SQUADS LEFT (PANGKAT PAKALIWA), Squads in Column
d. SQUADS RIGHT (PANGKAT PAKANAN), Squads in Column. This is

executed just like the squads left, but the turning is on the right.
e. SQUADS RIGHT (PANGKAT PAKANAN), Squads in Column
f. SQUADS LEFT (PANGKAT PAKALIWA), Squads in Column. This is

executed just like the squads RIGHT, but the turning is on the left.
1.6 TO TURN ABOUT (SQUAD RIGHT ABOUT)
a. Being in line, the command to turn about and march is PANGKAT

PAKANAN (PAKALIWA) PABALIK, KAD.
b. At the command KAD, the squad executes Squad Right twice. In starting
the second squad right, the foot is planted in the first step on the six count. All execute
forward march without command, the foot being planted in the first step in the new
direction on the eleventh count.
c. In the rear rank the third man from the right marches straight to the front
three steps and one half step, changes direction to the right and takes three steps and
one half step in the new direction. The second and first men from the right oblique to the
left, then oblique to the right, so as to follow the third man in column as in squad right.
On the ninth count all three men face to the right in marching, cover their file leaders
and mark time. The other number of the rear rank marches straight to the front four
steps, obliques to the right one step, completes the change of direction to the right,
marches four steps in the new direction, obliques to the right, places himself abreast of
the men on his right, and covers his file leader. On the eleventh count both ranks
execute forward march without command.
d. Being in line, the commands to turn about and halt are PANGKAT
PAKANAN (PAKALIWA) PABALIK, KAD, TILAP, TO. TILAP, TO is given after the
completion of the first Squad Right. The turn is executed as prescribed in b and c
above, except that all men, on arriving on the new line, mark time until the command TO
is given. TO should be given on the tenth count.
e. In all Squad Right (left) movements, when the preparatory command Halt
is given before the 6th count, or step, the squad marks time in place until halt. If given
after the 6th count or step, the squad will continue the march until halt. In all Squad Right
(Left) About movements, when the preparatory command is given before the 11th count
or step, the squad marks time in place until halt has been given after the 11th count or
step, the squad continues the march until halt.
1.7 RIGHT TURN, RIGHT HALF TURN (TO TURN ON A MOVING PIVOT)
Being in line turn to the right (left) on a moving pivot on the command 1. PIHIT
SA KANAN (KALIWA), 2. KAD At the second command the pivot man of the front rank
faces to the right in marching, takes one full step and then eight half steps. It is a
common error for the pivot to take half steps of more that 15 inches and to take up the
full step too soon with the result that the men on the marching flank must increase the
length of the stride or double time to get into position. Nos. 3 and 4 front ranks execute
right (left) oblique, turn 45 degrees to the right (left) until opposite their places in line
then execute a second right (left) oblique, and on arriving abreast of the pivot man take
up the half steps. On the tenth count all take the full step without command.
The rear rank men execute the movement successively on the same ground to
the front rank. The rear rank, therefore, moves forward at the command KAD (or
continues to move forward, if already marching), until it arrives at the place where the
front rank began the movement, when it executes the movement exactly described for
the front rank.
Note that the squad turns on No. 1 front rank but he does not remain in his
position even temporarily, as in Squad Right. He is, therefore, called the moving pivot.
No. 4 is called marching flank. Had the command been Left Turn, No. 4 would have
been the moving pivot, No. 1 the marching flank and the oblique would have been to the
left.
PIHIT HATING KANAN (KALIWA), KAD, is executed similarly. The pivot man
makes a half change of direction to the right (left), takes one full step and 8 half steps
while the other men take a quarter change in obliquing. On the sixth count all take the
full step without command. The half turn is actually completed in full steps. In turning on
moving pivot, being in march, the count for the movement begins on the second step
after the command of execution. Slight changes of direction are executed at the
command, PAGAWING KANAN (KALIWA), KAD.
The cadet should note the occasions for these two methods of making turn by
squad, one on a fixed pivot and the other on a movable pivot, as they are the most
important in the platoon and company drill. The turn on a fixed pivot is used in all
changes from line to column and from column to line; whereas the turn in a movable
pivot is used in making changes of direction in column, each squad then clearing the
turning point before the next arrives thereat.
1.8 MARCHING TO THE FLANK
a. The squad may be marched to the flank (for short distances only) when
marching in column.
b. The command for this movement is KANANG (KALIWANG) PANIG,

KAD. The preparatory command is given as the foot in the desired direction strikes the
marching surface, and the command of execution is given the next time the foot in the
desired direction strikes the marching surface. On the command of execution KAD, all
members take one more step, pivot 90 degrees in the commanded direction on the ball
of the lead foot, and step off in the new direction with the trailing foot. As the members
begin to march in the new direction, they glance out of the corner of the right eye and
dress to the right.
SPECIAL CEREMONIES
PHILIPPINE MILITARY ACADEMY
1.9 AWARDING OF OUTSTANDING CADETS/CCAFP UNITS AND TURN OVER

OF CCAFP CHAIN OF COMMAND
A. Start of Ceremony: - March 2000
B. Place of Ceremony: - Borromeo Field
C. Uniform:
Officers - Service Blouse
Cadets - Full Dress White u/a
Civilian - As appropriate
D. Composition:
1. CCAFP
2. PMA Band
3. Reviewing Officer – CSAFP
E. Procedure:
a. Units march into formation
b. Adjutant designates base coy
c. Dressing of units
d. Posting of guides
2. Parade Proper
a. First Captain and Staff draw sword
b. Manual of Arms
c. Receipt of Reports
d. Publication of Orders of the Day
e. Officers Center March
3. Presentation and Honors
a. First Captain commands his staff, KALUPUNAN

SUMALIKOD KO, KAD” and simultaneously faces about facing the reviewing party.
b. First Captain faces about (facing the troops and command

TANGHAL, TA. When the troops are at Present Arms, he faces about and salutes the
Reviewing Party with his staff.
c. Band plays four (4) ruffles and flourishes, followed by a

march.
d. Reviewing Party and Brigade Staff execute Order Arms after

the last note of music.
e. First Captain faces about and commands BABA TA.
4. Inspection of Troops:
5. Cadets’ Awarding Ceremony:
a. When the Reviewing Party is in position, First Captain faces

about then commands, “MGA TAONG PARARANGALAN AT LAHAT NG WATAWAT,
PUMAGITNA, KAD”. At the command of execution KAD, the band plays the
appropriate music while cadet awardees and Colors move as follows:
b. Colors move eight (8) paces forward and halt.
c. Individual awardees move forward to form a line, four (4)

paces in front and center of the colors. They line up according to rank of decoration /
award from the right. Cadet Officers return sword. Unit Commanders and Staff who are
awardees join the line of awardees.
d. Brigade Staff under the command of the most senior

member executes right face and marches just enough to clear the line of awardees.
The staff then halts and faces to the left.
e. First Captain moves forward, takes his post four (4) paces in
front and center of the awardees. He commands PASULONG KAD as the band plays
march music.
f. First Captain halts the awardees and colors ten (10) paces in
front of the awarding party, and First Captain salutes the awarding party and reports
“Ginoo, narito pong lahat ang mga pararangalan at ang mga watawat”.
g. Brigade Staff faces about and marches back to their

position.
h. First Captain after reporting faces about and marches

around the right flank of awardees towards his post. He commands TANGHAL TA to
the troops faces about and commands TANGHAL TA loud enough for his staff and
awardees to hear. He salutes with his staff.
i. Band plays the NATIONAL ANTHEM.
j. After the NATIONAL ANTHEM, the First Captain commands

BABA TA to the troops. He executes About Face, and faces the Grandstand.
k. Academy Adjutant reads the citation of each awardees

according to the rank of the award to be confirmed. As each awardee’s name is called,
he proceeds by the most direct route towards the awarding party. He salutes, receives
his award, salutes again and returns to his position. An awardee receiving more than
one (1) award need not go back to before he goes back to his position.
l. After the last award has been presented, the awardees

except Cadet Officers move to a position centering the grandstand and facing the
troops. Cadet Officers return to their respective position via most direct route.
m. Colors execute Right About and return to their position.
6. Remark of the GOH:
a. When the colors are in position, the Guest of Honor is

introduced by the Superintendent.
b. The Guest of Honor delivers his remarks.
7. Turn-over of Cadet Chain of Command Ceremonies:
a. First Captain gives KALUPUNAN SUMALIKOD KO

commands MGA KADETENG NAKATAKDANG MAMUNO HUMARAP AT
PUMAGITNA, KAD. Incoming Cadet Officers face right/left as the case may be at the
last note of GITNA. At the last note KAD, incoming cadet officers march off towards
their respective designations two (2) paces behind the positions of their outgoing
counterparts. Simultaneously, ongoing Cadet Officers shall face about, execute Staff
Behind Me at the last note of KAD and wait for their incoming counterparts.
b. Similarly, Regimental Commander and Staff move forward
and halt two (2) paces in front of the incoming regimental Commander and Staff, the
Turn-over of Command will commence.
c. First Captain commands, MGA PINUNO, ILIPAT ANG

INYONG PAMUMUNO. Incoming Cadet Officers shall salute their counterparts and
receive their swords, shake hands and move back to their initial position.
TURN-OVER CEREMONIES
NOTE: Turn-Over of Command is done simultaneously by all unit leaders except the Regimental
Commander and his staff. Shaking hands between the Incoming and Outgoing Regimental Commander
is done last. Band will play STRONG HEARTS continuously and stops after the shaking of hands of both
the Regimental Commanders.
8. Commencement Exercise:
a. Outgoing First Captain gives Staff Behind Me, faces about

facing the line of troops and commands, MGA MAGSISIPAGTAPOS, HUMARAP AT
PUMAGITNA KAD. At the last note of GITNA graduating cadets execute Right/Left
Face and march off at the last note of KAD. First Class cadets from 1st and 2nd
Battalions form five (5) columns between the One Half Battalion Staff and those from
the 3rd and 4th Battalions execute the same procedures. The Regimental Commander
then commands LAKAD PALOOB KAD. One half (1/2) Battalion First Class cadets will
execute Column Right. He then commands the two (2) groups to march towards the
center and halts them four (4) paces at the back of the line of the Regimental Staff.
b. As the last graduate reaches his position in the long gray

line, the new FC commands DRAW SWORD. He then faces about and, along with his
staff, moves up to occupy their position in front of the grandstand.
c. After the FC and staff have reached their position, the

emcee announces the playing of the ALMA MATER SONG.
d. After the last note of the ALMA MATER SONG, the new FC
leads the Corps in giving three (3) cheers. The outgoing FC leads the new graduates in
giving three (3) cheers to the Corps.
9. The Review
a. He gives KALUPUNAN, SUMALIKOD KO and directs the

Corps PASA MASID. After the last platoon of Hawk has passed the grandstand,
Regimental Commander and Staff move forward facing the Reviewing Officer, halt and
report (First Captain) "Ginoong Pangulo, tapos na po ang seremonya".
b. After the parade, the centermost graduate commands

HARAP SA LIKOD RAP. The graduates execute about face, bow to the audience and
fall out.
1.10 COMMENCEMENT EXERCISES
1. Start of Ceremony: -
2. Place of Ceremony: - Borromeo Field
3. Detail:
Uniform: - Officers - Service Blouse

Cadets - Full Dress White u/a
4. Composition:
a. CCAFP
b. PMA Band
c. Saluting Battery
d. GOH - The President of the Philippines
5. PROGRAMME:
I. ACADEMIC PROCESSION
II. NATIONAL ANTHEM
III. INVOCATION - COMMAND CHAPLAIN
IV. INTRODUCTION OF GUEST OF HONOR - SUPT, PMA
V. COMMENCEMENT ADDRESS - PRESIDENT, PMA
VI. DECLARATION OF GRADUATES AND - SUPT, PMA
CONFERMENT OF BACHELOR OF SCIENCE
DEGREE
VII. AWARDING OF DIPLOMAS - PRESIDENT, RP
Assisted by - SUPT, PMA
- DEAN, COP
- COMDT OF CADETS
VIII. GIVING OF AWARDS TO -
Outstanding Graduates
IX. COMMISSIONING OF GRADUATES - SND
X. OATH OF OFFICE - CHIEF OF STAFF, AFP
XI. ALMA MATER SONG
XII. CHEERS
XIII. RECESSIONAL
6. Procedure:
A. National Anthem
B. Invocation
C. The most senior cadet reports to the Dean “SIR, THE CLASS OF
___, STRONG, READY FOR GRADUATION”.
D. The Dean presents the class to the Superintendent
E. Declaration as graduates and Conferment of Bachelor of Science

Degree by PMA Superintendent
F. Introduction of the Guest of Honor and Speaker
G. Commencement Address by Guest of Honor
H. Commissionship of Graduates by SND
I. Oath of Office to be solemnized by CCAFP
GRADUATION (COMMENCEMENT EXERCISE)
1.11 GRADUATION BALL
1. Start of Ceremony: -
2. Place of Ceremony: - Yap Hall
3. Details:
a. Uniform: - Officers - Mess Jacket

Graduates - Full Dress Gray
Ladies - As Appropriate
b. Master of Ceremony
c. All Officers and their ladies will assemble at the Reception Area
located infront of Yap Hall before _____ March _____.
4. Schedule of Activities:
Reception Line
Inspirational Talk (Superintendent, PMA)
Dance
5. Procedure:
a. The graduating cadets will form together with their partners o/a
_______ March _____ at the reception line.
b. After the reception, the Superintendent will give inspirational talk.
c. Dance, dance, dance.
1.12 DISTRIBUTION OF RANK INSIGNIA
1. Start of Ceremony - March
2. Place of Ceremony - Yap Hall
3. Uniform:
Officer - Service Blouse
Cadets - Full Dress Gray
Civilian - As appropriate
4. PROGRAMME:
a. Entry of Official Party
b. Invocation
c. Entry of Colors
d. National Anthem
e. Remarks - Lim Family Rep
f. Distribution of Rank Insignias
g. Intermission - CCAFP HIMIG
h. Benediction - Command chaplain
i. Exit of Colors
j. Recessional
5. PROCEDURE:
a. The Cadets and their Guest are already seated in their respective
chairs.
b. After the entry of the Official Party, the EMCEE request everybody
to rise and announces, ENTER THE COLORS. Ruffles will be played by the Drummer
as the CCAFP National Color and Standard Bearers marches to the beat of 60 steps
per minute.
c. The Color Bearers halt at the center facing the audience.
d. National Anthem will be played (CCAFP Standard Colors Dips)
e. After the National Anthem, the EMCEE announces, “POST THE

COLORS”.
f. The Command Chaplain delivers the Invocation.
g. After the Invocation, the representatives of the LIM Family will

deliver his/her remarks.
h. Distribution of Rank Insignias.
i. Intermission of the CCAFP Choral Group
j. After the rendition of the CCAFP Choral Group, the EMCEE directs
everybody to rise and announces EXIT THE COLORS. The CCAFP Colors exits at a
normal pace (120 Steps/minute).
k. Recessional.
ENTRY OF COLORS
1.13 ATHLETIC EXHIBITION AND ATHLETIC REVIEW WITH AWARDING

CEREMONIES
1. Start of Ceremony: 0900H March
2. Place of Ceremony: Borromeo Field
3. Uniform:
Officers - Service Uniform
Cadets - Drill “A” Pants w/ Coy Shirt and Black Rubber Shoes
4. Composition:
a. CCAFP
b. PMA Band
c. Reviewing Officer: MAYOR OF BAGUIO CITY
5. Procedure:
PART I - ATHLETIC EXHIBITION
a. Band sounds Attention Call
b. Entrance of different Corps Squads
c. Start of Athletic Exhibition
d. Performance by different Corps Squads
(1) Athletics (5) Karate

(2) Judo (6) Taekwondo
(3) Aikido (7) Gymnastics
(4) Arnis (8) Thai Rifle and Pistol Drill
PART II - ATHLETIC REVIEW WITH AWARDING CEREMONIES
a. Formation of Troops:
(1) Units march into formation
(2) Adjutant designates base company
(3) Dressing of Units
(4) Posting of Guides
b. Sound Off
(1) The Adjutant directs the troops to TIKAS PAHINGA.
(2) The Adjutant directs IHUDYAT, the Band plays sound off.
(3) The troops are brought HUMANDA and PUGAY KAMAY.
(4) Band plays TO THE COLORS.
c. Parade Proper
(1) The Adjutant reports "Ginoo, handa na po ang patikas".

First Captain (FC) salutes and directs Adjutant to receive the report.
(2) Receipt of unit reports by the Adjutant.
(3) Publication of the orders of the Day.
(4) Officer’s center march.
d. Presentation and Honor
(1) First Captain (FC) faces about (facing the Reviewing

Officer) and commands his staff, KALUPUNAN SUMALIKOD KO.
(2) First Captain (FC) faces about (facing the troops) and
commands PUGAY KAMAY, NA. He then faces about and salutes the Guest of Honor
(GOH) with his staff.
(3) Band plays one ruffle and MABUHAY.
(4) Brigade Commander and Staff come to attention after the

last note of the music.
(5) First Captain (FC) faces about and commands BABA, NA.
e. Inspection
(1) When the troops are at Order Arms, First Captain faces
about and reports to the Guest of Honor "Ginoo, handa na po ang talupad upang
siyasatin". The Guest of Honor goes down the Grandstand and boards the command
car.
(2) Band plays appropriate music.
(3) First Captain goes down the command car, salutes, then
proceeds to this original position after the last vehicle has passed by. Guest of Honor
and Host return to their original position.
(4) First Captain goes back to his position.
f. Sports Award Ceremony
(1) When the Guest of Honor has taken his seat, First Captain
faces about and commands, MGA TAONG PARARANGALAN AT LAHAT NG MGA
WATAWAT, PUMAGITNA, KAD. At the command of execution KAD, the band plays
appropriate march music while awardees and Colors move as follows:
(a) Colors move eight (8) paces forward and halt.
(b) Athletic Saber Awardee and winning company coach

of each sport award move forward to form a line, four (4) paces in front and center of
the colors. Jurado Cup awardee (CO and Guidon Bearer) move by the most direct route
to join the line. They line up according to rank of award from the right.
(2) Brigade Staff under the command of the most senior

member executes Right Face and marches just enough to clear the line of awardees.
The staff halts and faces to the left.
(3) First Captain moves forward, takes his post four (4) faces in
front and center of the awardees, commands PASULONG, KAD as the band plays
march music.
(4) First Captain halts the awardees and Colors ten (10) paces
in front of the Grandstand. First Captain salutes Guest of Honor and reports "Ginoo,
narito pong lahat ang mga pararangalan at ang mga watawat".
(5) Brigade Staff faces left and marches back to its position.
(6) First Captain, after reporting, faces about and marches

around the right flank of awardees towards his post. He commands PUGAY KAMAY,
NA to the troops, faces about and commands PUGAY KAMAY, NA, loud enough for his
staff and the awardees to hear. He salutes with his staff.
(7) Band plays the NATIONAL ANTHEM.
(8) After the National Anthem, the First Captain commands

BABA KAMAY, NA to the troops. He executes about face and faces the Grandstand.
(9) Adjutant, HTG reads the citation of each award according to

the rank of the award to be conferred. As each award is called, the awardee proceeds
by the most direct route towards the awarding party. He salutes, receives the award,
salutes again and returns to his position.
(10) After the last award had been presented, the individual
awardees move to a position centering the Grandstand, facing the troops, Jurado Cup
awardee returns to position via the most direct route.
(11) Colors execute Right About and return to their position.
g. Remarks of the Guest of Honor
(1) When the Colors are in position, the Guest of Honor is

introduced by the Superintendent.
(2) Guest of Honor delivers his remarks.
h. Pass-In-Review
(1) When the remarks are over, First Captain faces about and
commands KALUPUNAN, SUMALIKOD KO then directs PASA MASID.
(2) Band moves forward and halts.
(3) Pass in Review
(4) After the last platoon “H” has passed the Grandstand, First
Captain with Staff moves forward facing the Guest of Honor, halt and report "Ginoo,
tapos na po ang seremonya".
1.14 RING HOP
1. Time of Ceremony: March
2. Place of Ceremony: Yap Hall
3. Composition:
a. Graduating Cadets and their invited visitors
b. Underclass Representatives
c. Invited Officers and their ladies
d. PMA Band
4. Details:
Uniform: Officers - Mess Jacket
Cadets - Full Dress Gray w/ sash & gloves
Ladies - Formal Dress
5. Reception:
a. Starts at 19000H and terminates _______
b. Composition of Reception Line:
(1) Superintendent and Lady
(2) Dean and Lady
(3) Commandant and Lady
(4) CS and Lady
(5) Class President and First Captain
c. The Cadet-In-Charge of the Cadet Speaker’s Board will be the

master of ceremony.
d. Order of Entry – Invited officers and their ladies, graduating class

and their guests must pass thru the Reception Line.
e. Procedure:
ENTRANCE OF GRADUATING CLASS
Immediately after the members of the reception line and the cadets’
guests/partners had taken their respective seats, members of the Graduating Class
forms in front of the main entrance of the Yap Hall in eight (8) columns. After the
formation, the band plays blares and ruffles that signals the EMCEE to announce,
“Ladies and gentlemen, good evening, we now start the ring hop ceremony”. With
that, the orchestra plays march music for the Class to march forward until reaching an
approximate distance of ten (10) paces from the stage. On the command of the First
Captain, the Class moves forward and halts. After which, the First Captain reports to
the Superintendent, “Ginoo, narito pong lahat ang miyembro ng klase______”. The
PMA Superintendent acknowledges the First Captain. The opening of the program,
which will be highlighted by the giving of token box of rings to the Class by the
Superintendent, shall now be formally announced by the EMCEE.
In this part of the ceremony, the PMA Superintendent delivers his

remarks and subsequently offers the token of rings to the Class President. The Class
President moves forward, salutes, receives the box from the Superintendent and the
latter takes his seat. After the PMA Superintendent has taken his seat, the Class
President delivers his response. At this juncture, the First Captain gives TIWALAG and
the Graduating Cadets proceed to their respective seats beside their partners.
Ring Ceremony/Hop (dance)
After TIWALAG, the Graduating Cadets with their respective

partners divide and form into two (2) pre-arranged columns in alphabetical order by the
company near the side of the two (2) dummy/mock rings (ring boxes are carried by the
lady partners). After the cadets had occupied their respective positions, the orchestra
plays KAYDET GIRL. While the KAYDET GIRL is played continuously, the EMCEE
announces the names of the members of the Graduating Class alternately together with
their respective partners. Succeeding names of partners are called as the pair
preceding them clears the ring.
After the last pair has gone through the mock ring, the Chairman of
the Ring Committee delivers his Closing Remarks and with the orchestra playing, the
floor will be opened for dance. The dance will be terminated informally NOT LATER
THAN 2400H by the competent authority in consideration for the activities the following
day.
RING HOP
1.15 INITIATION RITES
PROCEDURES
With the march music to be played by the PMA Band, the upperclassmen will
enter the parade ground passing through the 51 steps and form at the center portion of
the Borromeo Field. After the sounding of an Attention Call, the Fourth classmen will
enter from the northeast side of the Borromeo Filed in double time manner positioning
themselves in front of the upperclassmen.
The playing of the Philippine National Anthem will be followed by an Invocation to

be rendered by the Command Chaplain. Immediately after the Invocation, the
Commandant will give his Welcome Remarks to be followed by his specific instruction
on his intent for the activity. From that cue, the Brigade Commander shall now give
orders to the Brigade to start with the Initiation Rites. With the band playing march
music, the upperclassmen will proceed to their respective areas while the fourth
classmen will make two (2) rounds in the parade ground before proceeding to the first
company that shall first administer the initiation rites.
Initiation will start after the band plays Attention Call and stops when the next
Attention Call is given. Drums will be played for the transition from one company to
another. After all companies have initiated the fourth classmen, the Corps will reform to
the previous formation. At this juncture, the fourth classmen accompanied by the band
will sing Plebe Song.
After the singing of Plebe Song by the fourth classmen, the Brigade Commander
will declare all fourth classmen At Ease and after which, the Superintendent, PMA will
deliver his message. The activity is formally terminated by the Mass Singing of the
Alma Mater Song.
PROGRAMME
- ENTRANCE OF THE UPPERCLASS CORPS
- ENTRANCE OF FOURTHCLASS CADETS
- SINGING OF THE PHILIPPINE NATIONAL ANTHEM
- INVOCATION BY THE COMMAND CHAPLAIN
- REMARKS BY THE COMMANDANT OF CADETS
- INITIATION RITES PROPER (5 minutes/company)
- SINGING OF THE PLEBE SONG
- DECLARATION OF AT EASE BY THE BDE CMDR
- MESSAGE OF THE SUPERINTENDENT, PMA
- ALMA MATER SONG
DECLARATION OF AT EASE
1.16 RECOGNITION RITES
Recognition Rites immediately follows the Pass-in-review. The Corps instead of

proceeding to the 53 steps, each platoon of the Corps starting from 1st platoon of Alpha
Coy shall execute the following procedures:
PROCEDURES
At the command PANGKAT-PANGKAT PAKANAN, KAD, fourthclass cadets,

who are all occupying the rear rank, execute KALIWANG PANIG and march to their
designated position forming one column per company. The upperclass cadets return to
the slope forming two (2) column per company.
The band sounds ATTENTION CALL to signal the entrance of the fourth class
cadets. The two leftmost columns ("A" and "H" Coys) march forward and the remaining
columns follow in sequence. The fourth-class cadets form an octagon facing outward.
Once the fourth class cadets are in position, the band sounds again the
ATTENTION CALL to signal the entrance of the upperclass cadets. The upper-class
cadets halt facing the fourth-class cadets.
The upperclass and fourthclass cadets exchange salutes with the latter executing
first. After the exchange of salutes, the fourth-class cadets remove their headgears
through a command from the designated fourth-class Cadet Commander. The band
plays the Alma Mater Song, which signals the start of the Recognition Rites, which is
done in an orderly manner. Following a counter clockwise manner, the upper-class
cadets move from one fourth-class to another to have the most coveted Handshake of
Recognition.
After the Recognition Rites, the upper-class cadets shall reform by companies
and march back to barracks. The fourth class cadets follow suit. At this juncture, the
GOH and Speaker will be ushered by the Host towards the Longayban Hall for a
cocktail.
PROGRAMME
I. ENTRANCE OF THE CORPS
II. PRESENTATION AND HONORS
III. INSPECTION OF TROOPS
IV. INTRODUCTION OF THE

GUEST OF HONOR - - - - - - - - PMA Superintendent
V. SPEECH - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Guest of Honor
VI. PASS-IN-REVIEW
VII. RECOGNITION RITES
RECOGNITION RITES
1.17 INCORPORATION DAY
A. INVOCATION
B. ASSEMBLY AREAS
The upperclass Corps/Brigade (minus) forms and accounts along Quezon

Avenue. Meanwhile, the New Cadet Battalion (NCBn) forms and accounts in front of the
Covered Court then march off towards the vicinity of mess hall. Both the upperclass
corps and NCBN wait for the Band Company to preposition near the vicinity of View
Deck “66”.
C. MARCHING TO INITIAL POSITIONS
The Band sounds "ATTENTION CALL" then followed by a march music.

The New Cadet Battalion, with Alpha Platoon leading, marches to the western portion of
the Borromeo Field passing infront of the Grandstand. Halting will be done by platoons
and left face executed automatically facing east.
Immediately after halting, the New Cadet Battalion shall be dressed and
after the dressing, the Band sounds "ATTENTION CALL" followed by a march music
for the entrance of the upperclass corps. The upperclass corps marches off and halts at
the line of troops.
The NCBn Commander and the Brigade Commander alternately give a

series of manual of arms to their troops as follows:
1. Right Shoulder Arms
2. Left Shoulder Arms
3. Port Arms
4. Order Arms
5. Inspection Arms
6. Port Arms
7. Order Arms
D. PRESENTATION OF THE NEW CADETS TO THE CORPS
After the manual of arms, the NCBn Commander commands his unit
TANGHAL TA faces about and executes TANGHAL TA with his staff. At this instance,
the Brigade Commander commands the upperclass corps TANGHAL TA and executes
also with his staff. After a while, both unit commanders (Upperclass & NCBN)
successively command BABA TA with the latter. The pledge on Honor Code and
System by the class to be incorporated follows to be led by the NCBN Commander.
Immediately after the pledge, the band plays the PMA Alma Mater Song and after the
last note of the song, the NCBN commander salutes the Bde Commander and reports
“Ginoo, ang klase ng ________ ay handa na pong isanib sa sampanaw”. In return,
the Brigade Commander salutes and replies “Isanib ang klase ng ________ sa
sampanaw”.
E. INTEGRATION OF FOURTHCLASS CADETS TO THEIR RESPECTIVE

UNITS
The NCBn Commanders faces about and commands HARAP SA

KANAN, RAP then PASULONG, KAD. The fourth classmen will execute LIKO SA
KALIWA at designated markers then incorporate themselves with their respective
platoons. Halt will be given by their respective Battalion Commanders.
F. PARADE PROPER
Once the Fourth class Battalion (fourth classmen) has halted, the Band
sounds ADJUTANT's CALL. The Brigade Adjutant designates Alpha Company as the
base unit. He then takes his post at the front and center of the line of troops and directs
MGA GABAY, SUMALUNAN, KAD. The Brigade Adjutant then follows the sequence of
the Review to include the SOUND OFF. At this juncture, Speakers Board to narrate
Class 2005 profile.
G. PRESENTATION AND HONORS
After the Officer Center March, the Brigade Staff executes KALUPUNAN,
SUMALIKOD KO then the Brigade Commander commands TANGHAL, TA, faces
about and salutes the honoree with his staff.
H. MANUAL OF ARMS
I. INSPECTION
When the troops are at Order Arms, Brigade Commander faces about and
reports, "Ginoo, handa na po ang mga talupad sa pagsisiyasat" to the Honoree. He
then sheaths his sword. The Guest of Honor, accompanied by the Superintendent and
the Brigade Commander, troops the line with the band playing appropriate music.
J. AWARDING OF ALUMNI AWARD TO GOH
K. INTRODUCTION OF THE GUEST OF HONOR
After trooping the line, the Superintendent introduces the Guest of Honor.
(NOTE: The audience must not stand when the Superintendent introduces the GOH).
The speech of the Honoree follows. (The Brigade Commander may be directed to bring
the troops to TIKAS PAHINGA)
L. PASS-IN-REVIEW
After the speech of the honoree, the Brigade Staff executes

KALUPUNAN, SUMALIKOD KO then the Brigade Commander commands PASA
MASID.
INCORPORATION CEREMONIES
SECTION II
SPECIAL CEREMONIES FOR

PRESIDENTIAL SECURITY GROUP AT
MALACAÑAN PALACE
2.1 MILITARY HONORS
A. Purpose
To provide drill regulations for the PSG (PRESIDENTIAL SECURITY

GROUP) during military ceremonies in Malacañan Palace. The PSG has its own
peculiarities in uniform, formation and composition as compared to those applied and
used by the AFP because of the area limitation of the Palace Grounds and International
Protocol requirements.
B. Scope
This section discusses the peculiarities of the PSG in drills and

ceremonies. All other sections/scopes of the AFP Manual on Drills and Ceremonies will
be adhered to by the PSG unless provisions prescribed therein are not applicable to
accorded ceremonies inside the Malacañan Palace Grounds.
2.2 ARRIVAL HONORS FOR VISITING HEADS OF STATE AT MALACAÑAN

PALACE
A. Background
State Visit is a visit of the Head State of a nation or country invited by and
cordially given the full hospitality of the host country. It is in this manner that when the
President of the Republic of the Philippines hosts a state visit, he/she welcomes the
Visiting Head of State to the Malacañan Palace with Full Military Honors.
Part III / Section II: Special Ceremonies for Presidential Security Group 259
B. Sequence of Events / Units and Individual Actions
The VVIP Convoy, after the wreath laying ceremony at the Rizal
Monument, passes through the Solano Check Point. Upon reaching Gate 6 of the
Malacañan Palace Complex, the VVIP vehicle (primary vehicle) turns right toward the
front of the Kalayaan building where the Very Important Person (VVIP) is to be
welcomed by the President. VVIP Delegation vehicles enter through Gate 6 park along
the road towards Mabini Hall. Security vehicles remain outside (JP Laurel) after
debussing. Members of the VVIP’s delegation proceed to the left portion of the
Kalayaan Grounds. After the VIP has debussed, The VVIP Vehicle parks on the left
corner of the Kalayaan Parking Area. The President then invites the Visiting Head of
State to the designated place for the Arrival Honors.
Initially, the Honor Guard Battalion is at Parade Rest. The Honor Guard
Commander (HGC) brings the unit to Attention as soon as the VVIP arrives.
After the President and the Visiting Head of State have occupied their
positions, the Honor Guard Commander (HGC) faces the troops and commands
TANGHAL, TA, faces about and executes Present Swords together with his staff. Four
ruffles and four flourishes are then sounded. The National Anthem of the Visiting Head
of State is played and followed by the Philippine National Anthem while the twenty-one
(21) gun salute is rendered.
After the playing of the two National Anthems, the HGC and his staff carry
swords. The HGC faces the troops and commands BABA, TA. He faces about then
executes Present Sword to the two Heads of State and says "Your Excellencies, the
troops are ready for inspection". The honorees acknowledge the salute. The HGC
carries his sword and escorts the Visiting Head of State with the President to review the
troops starting from the First Platoon of the Honor Guard Battalion while the band plays
Marshall Music. When they approach the Colors, the HGC commands "Your
Excellencies, the Colors, ready, hand salute" as he executes Present Sword. After
passing, he commands READY DOWN. After reaching the last rifleman, they will turn
right and proceed back to their former positions. The HGC reels off from the two
personages and proceeds to his position in front of his staff. When the President and
the Visiting Head of State are in their positions, the HGC faces the troops and
commands TANGHAL, TA. Then, the HGC faces about and executes Present Sword
with his staff. When acknowledged, the HGC and his staff execute Carry Sword. He
then faces about and brings the troops to Attention, faces about, then executes Present
Sword and says “Your Excellencies the ceremony is over". Thereafter, the Visiting
Head of State and the President face each other and shake hands.
The President then invites the Visiting Head of State toward the Reception
Line (right side of the Kalayaan Grounds) where Philippine Government Officials,
Official Delegation and other VIPs are waiting to be introduced by the President.
When the two Presidents reach the first person at the Reception Line, the
HGC, his staff and the Color Detail march and position at the sentry gate.
When the VVIPs finish with the Reception Line, they position at the back
of the Colors. The HGC will then order PASULONG, KAD, then march together with the
Color Detail towards the Palace Main Lobby. Only the Heads of State, spouses and four
uniformed military aides follow the path set by the HGC, maintaining at least twelve to
fifteen-meter distance. The Band likewise follows the same path maintaining at least
twenty meters from the two Heads of State group but turns right toward Gate 5 and
goes to halt aligning with the Column Guards while playing Marshall Music. Other
government officials and members of Official Delegation are directed to proceed to the
Palace through the Palace Side Lobby.
The HGC and his staff are then positioned in front and to the right of the
Palace Main Lobby Entrance facing the approaching Heads of State. The Color Detail
positions in front of the Palace Main Lobby facing the entrance. Then, before the two
Presidents reach the Palace Main Lobby entrance, the HGC orders his staff and the
Color Detail to execute Present Arms. After the two Presidents reach the last element of
the Column Guards, the HGC orders all Honor Guards to Order Arms. This signals the
end of the arrival honors.
C. Troop Composition and Uniforms
1. Troop Composition
1 Honor Guard Battalion
2 Company Commanders with EX-O and Guidon Bearers
4 Platoons (A Platoon Leader, Platoon Sergeant and 21 Rifleman
each Platoon)
Color Detail
Band
1 Column Guard Platoon
2. Uniform:
Officers: Gala Blue, Shako, Sword strap with breastplate, Gloves,

Sash, Dress Shoes, Aiguillette (Formal).
EP: Gala Blue, Shako, M14 Rifle, Gloves, and Dress Shoes.
Figure 1 Figure 2
D. EXIT OF VVIP
After the Courtesy Call of the Visiting Head of State to the President, the
VVIP makes an exit through the Palace Main Lobby where the primary VIP car is
prepositioned. Foyer honors composed of two man guard is accorded during the exit.
The foyer honor guards are prepositioned at the main lobby. When the
Honoree reaches the middle steps of the stairs, as he/she goes down, foyer honor
guard commander orders TANGHAL TA and subsequently executes Present Arms.
When the Honoree crosses the door of the main lobby, Honor Guard
Commander gives the order BABA TA and executes Carry Sword. This signals the end
of the call and departure honors for the Visiting Head of State.
2.3 ARRIVAL HONORS FOR VISITING HEAD OF STATE AT MALACAÑAN

PALACE DURING INCLEMENT WEATHER
A. Background
It is conducted when the arrival of the Visiting Head of State of the

scheduled State Visit and courtesy call to Malacañan Palace coincides with an
inclement weather.
Forty-five minutes before the arrival of the Visiting Head of State and there
is an inclement weather condition, the Honor Battalion prepositions at the Palace
Reception Hall. The Honor Guard Battalion marches from initial formation area at
Heroes Hall, platoons in column, squads in file formation. After the battalion has taken
its position, the Color Detail follows and proceeds to the designated position. The Band
is prepositioned at the reception hall mezzanine. Initially, the Honor Battalion is at
Parade Rest.
The VVIP Convoy passes through the Solano Check Point. Upon reaching
Gate 5 of the Malacañan Palace Complex, the VVIP vehicle (primary vehicle) together
with the Official Delegation turns right toward the entrance of the Palace Main Lobby
where the Chief, Presidential Protocol meets the Visiting Head of State and escorts
Him/Her to the Reception Hall where the President is waiting. Security vehicles remain
outside (JP Laurel) after debussing.
As the VVIP reaches the middle stairs going up toward the reception hall,
the HGC brings the battalion to Attention.
At the Reception Hall, the President meets the Visiting Head of State and
invites Him/Her to the designated place for the Arrival Honors. After the President and
the Visiting Head of State have occupied their positions, the Honor Guard Commander
(HGC) faces the troops and commands TANGHAL, TA. Then the HGC faces about and
executes Present Sword with his Staff. After which, four ruffles and four flourishes are
sounded. The National Anthem of the Visiting Head of State is played and followed by
the Philippine National Anthem while a twenty-one (21) gun salute is rendered.
After the playing of the two National Anthems, The HGC with his staff
executes Carry Sword. He faces the troops and commands BABA, TA, faces about
then salutes and says, “ Your Excellencies the ceremony is over ". Thereafter, the
Visiting Head of State and the President face each other and shake hands.
The President then invites the Visiting Head of State for the signing of the
Presidential Palace Guest Book. After the signing, the President leads the Visiting Head
of State to the reception line where Philippine Government Officials and other VIPs are
waiting to be introduced.
After the President has introduced the members of the Reception Line, the
President invites the Visiting Head of State to a private meeting at the Main Living
Room. This is the cue of the Honor Battalion to make an exit.
C. Troop Composition

each Platoon)
Color Detail
Band
2. Uniform:
Officers: Gala Blue, Shako, Sword strap with Breastplate, Gloves,

Sash, Dress Shoes (Wetlook), Aiguillette (Formal)
EP: Gala Blue, Shako, M14 Rifle, Gloves, Dress Shoes
(Wetlook)
D. EXIT OF VVIP
prepositioned. Foyer honors composed of two man guard is accorded during the exit.
The foyer honor guards preposition at the main lobby. When the Honoree
reaches the middle steps of the stairs as he/she goes down, foyer honor guards will
execute Present Arms.
When the Honoree crosses the door of the main lobby, honor guard
commander gives the order BABA TA and executes Carry Sword. This signals the end
of the call and departure honors for the Visiting Head of State.
2.4 CEREMONIES DURING STATE DINNER FOR VISITING HEAD OF STATE AT

MALACAÑAN PALACE
A. Background
When the President invites a Head of State to visit the country, it is

customary that the President hosts a State Dinner in honor of the Visiting Head of State
and his delegation. The President invites also other high ranking government officials
and the members of the diplomatic corps.
The VVIP convoy leaves from the Manila Hotel and passes through the
Solano checkpoint. Upon reaching Gate 5 of the Malacañan Palace Complex, the VVIP
vehicle (primary vehicle) turns right entering Malacañan Palace then turns left toward
the side door of the Palace where the VVIP is received by the Chief, Presidential
Protocol.
As the VVIP debuses the vehicle, the Foyer two-man guard execute
Present Arms, which is subsequently followed by the sounding of the welcome tune of
the trumpeters. The Chief, Presidential Protocol escorts the Visiting Head of State,
passing through the Foyer Honors, to the Palace Main Living Room where the President
and his/her spouse are waiting to welcome the Visiting Head of State. Delegation
vehicles enter through Gate 5 and debus at the Palace Main Lobby. Security vehicles
remain outside (JP Laurel) after debussing.
The President then invites the Visiting Head of State to the designated
room for the Reception Line. The Color Detail is prepositioned in the same area where
the Reception Line is located. After the President and the Visiting Head of State have
occupied their positions, the Chief, Presidential Protocol announces the commencement
and order of the Reception Line. When the Reception Line is about to be finished, the
Band forms and positions at the Palace Reception Hall.
After the Reception Line, the President and the Visiting Head of State
proceed to the Ceremonial Hall for the State Dinner followed by the two National Colors.
Upon reaching the entrance of the Ceremonial Hall, the Color Detail halts and waits for
the two Heads of State to take their positions at the Presidential Table. When they are
in their respective positions, the Master of Ceremony for the State Dinner announces
the Entry of Colors: "Enter the Colors", which is the signal for the Color Detail to march
and proceed to the designated position at the center of the Ceremonial Hall. Upon
reaching the designated position, the detail executes TANGHAL, TA and is followed by
the playing of the National Anthem of the Visiting Head of State, then the Philippine
National Anthem. After which, the Detail executes Order Arms and posts the two
National Colors at the back of the Presidential Table, then automatically makes an exit.
This signals the start of the State Dinner Program.
The primary vehicle of the Visiting Head of State will be prepositioned at

the Palace Main Lobby Entrance. After the State Dinner is finished, the President will
escort the Visiting Head of State to the Palace Main Lobby for the exit. When the
President and the Visiting Head of State is about to go down the stairs, the two-man
guards execute Present Arms. After the two Heads of State had passed through the
Foyer Honors, the guards execute Order Arms. The activity ends when the President
was able to go back to his/her official residence.
C. Troop Composition and Uniform

each Platoon)
Color Detail
Band
2. Uniform:
Officers: Gala Blue, Shako, Sword strap with Breastplate, Gloves,

Sash, Dress Shoes Aiguillette (Formal)
EP: Gala Blue, Shako, M14 Rifle, Gloves, and Dress Shoes
D. EXIT OF VVIP
prepositioned. A foyer honors (two-man guard) is accorded during the exit.
2.5 ARRIVAL HONORS FOR PRESENTATION OF CREDENTIALS
A. Background
An Ambassador newly designated by any country that the Philippines has

diplomatic relations with cannot be recognized by the government unless he/she can
present his/her credentials. Protocol dictates that the new emissary, as the official
representative of his country, must be accorded the full hospitality including full military
honors, by the host country in receiving him when he/she officially presents his/her
credentials.
The VVIP Convoy, after the wreath-laying ceremony at the Rizal

Monument, passes through the Solano Check Point. Upon reaching Gate 5 of the
Malacañan Palace Complex, the VVIP vehicle (primary vehicle) turns right toward
Malacañan Palace Main Lobby Grounds and halts at the road intersection where the
Honoree, Newly Ambassador Designate, be welcomed by the Military Host (The
Presidential Guards Commander).
The Military Host then invites the Newly Ambassador Designate to the
designated place for the Arrival Honors in front of the Palace Main Lobby.
Initially, the Honor Guard Company shall be at Parade Rest. The Honor
Guard Commander brings the unit to Attention as the Honoree arrives.
After the Newly Ambassador Designate and the Military Host have
occupied their positions, the Honor Guard Commander faces the troops and commands
TANGHAL, TA. The HGC then faces about and executes Present Sword while his Ex-O
as the Guidon Bearer executes Salute. After which, four ruffles and four flourishes are
sounded. The National Anthem of the Newly Ambassador Designate is played and
followed by the Philippine National Anthem.
After the playing of the two National Anthems, The HGC and his staff
Carry Swords. He faces the troops and commands BABA, TA. He faces about then
executes present sword to the Honoree and says "Your Excellency, the troops are
ready for inspection". The Honoree acknowledges the salute. The HGC carries his
sword and escorts the Honoree with the MH to review the troops starting from the Band
as it plays Marshall Music. When they approach the Colors, the HGC commands
”YOUR EXCELLENCY, THE COLORS, READY, HAND, SALUTE" as he executes
Present Sword. After passing, he commands READY, DOWN. After reaching the last
rifleman, they turn right and proceed back to their former positions. The HGC reels off
from the two personages and proceeds to his position in front of his staff. When the
Honoree and the MH are in their positions, the HGC faces the troops and commands
TANGHAL, TA. The HGC then faces about and executes Present Sword with his staff.
When acknowledged, the HGC with his staff executes Carry Swords. He faces about
then brings the troops to Attention, faces about then executes Present Sword and says
“Your Excellency, the ceremony is over". Thereafter, the Honoree and the MH face
each other and shake hands.
The Military Host then presents the Newly Ambassador Designate to the
Chief, Presidential Protocol to escort him/her to the Palace Reception Hall for the
ceremonial rites to present his/her credentials to the President of the Republic of the
Philippines.
After the Presentation of Credentials rites, the Newly Ambassador

Designate exits through the Palace Main Lobby where he/she will be accorded Foyer
Honors before boarding the VVIP vehicle.
C. Troop Composition and Uniform

each Platoon)
Color Detail
Band
2. Uniform:
Officers: Gala Blue, Shako, Sword strap with Breastplate,

Gloves, Sash, Dress Shoes Aiguillette (Formal)
EP: Gala Blue, Shako, M14 Rifle, Gloves, Dress Shoes
D. EXIT OF VVIP
After the Courtesy Call of the Newly Ambassador Designate to the

President, the VVIP makes an exit through the Palace Main Lobby where the primary
VIP car is prepositioned. A foyer honor is accorded during the exit.
The foyer two-man guard will preposition at the main lobby. When the
Honoree reaches the middle steps of the stairs as he/she goes down, honor guards
execute Present Arms.
When the Honoree had passed and acknowledged the salute, the guards
execute Order Arms. This signals the end of the call and departure honors for the Newly
Ambassador Designate.
2.6 PROVISION FOR GALA UNIFORM
The Gala Uniform used by the members of Honor Guard Details in the
Presidential Security Group are the following:
Officers: Gala Blue, Shako, Swordstrap with Breastplate, White Gloves,

Sash, Dress Shoes, Aiguelette (Formal), Sword
EP: Gala Blue, Sash, Shako, M14 Rifle, White Gloves, Dress Shoes
The sets of uniform mentioned above will be used solely during events, honors
and occasions in Malacañan Palace and in which the President is involved, highlighted
by the following activities:
-Arrival/ Departure Honors for Visiting Heads of States

-Arrival/ Departure Honors during Presentation of Credentials of Newly
Ambassador Designated
-Arrival/ Departure Honors during State Dinners
Activities of the President outside the Palace, which need personnel in gala
(Color Bearers) will also be provided for.
SECTION III

PHILIPPINE MARINE CORPS
3.1 CAKE CUTTING CEREMONY
3.1.1 SEQUENCE OF CAKE CUTTING CEREMONY
I. PROGRAM PROPER:
a. Arrival Honor
b. Entry of Troops
c. National Anthem
d. Invocation
e. Remarks and Reaffirmation of Marine Oath
f. Awarding Ceremony
g. Pageantry
h. Introduction of the Guest of Honor
i. Speech of the Guest of Honor
j. Presentation of Memento
k. Cake Cutting Ceremony
II. PROCEDURES:
a. Arrival Honor
1. Distinguished guests aside from the Guest of Honor will be

accorded 8-man side boys upon entry at the left-wing portion of the BNS Gymnasium
and will be escorted to a pre-designated area inside the gym while waiting for the arrival
of the guest of honor.
Part III / Section III: Special Ceremonies for Philippine Marine Corps 271
2. A battalion-size arrival honors with 21-gun salute will be
provided to the Guest of Honor, none other than the Commander-In-Chief, AFP upon
her arrival to the BNS Gymnasium.
3. After the ceremonial honor, the GOH together with other

distinguished party will be ushered toward the stage inside the Gym. EMCEE will
announce their entry and at this point, the audience stands up.
b. Entry of Troops
1. Troops enter the main entrance of the Gym with the Marine
Drums and Bugles Team leading; followed by the Troops Commander and Staff and the
two ceremonial honor companies marching in column and in tandem with each
company.
2. The Color Detail enters last after the troops are already pre-
positioned in their designated place inside the Gym.
3. EMCEE requests the audience to stand up for the entry of

the Color and for the National Anthem.
c. National Anthem
1. Troop Commander gives command: “TANGHAL TA!”
2. Drums and Bugles play the national anthem.
3. Upon termination of the music, Troop Commander gives

command: “BABA, TA!”. EMCEE again requests the audience to remain standing for
the invocation.
d. Invocation
The Command Chaplain approaches the rostrum and presides the

invocation. After the invocation, EMCEE advises the audience to take their seats and
subsequently announces the next part of the program – the welcome remarks of the
CPMC.
e. Remarks and Reaffirmation of Marine Oath
1. CPMC approaches the rostrum for the welcome annotations,

and then leads the reaffirmation of the Marine Oath.
2. Upon hearing the cue from CPMC the phrase “I ENJOIN

ALL MARINES . . . TO REPEAT AFTER ME THE MARINE OATH”. The last note of
the word “OATH” will be the cue for all Marine audience to stand up and raise their
right hands.
3. The ceremonial troops (still at position of attention) raise

their right hands in 2-count manner to attain unison of execution.
4. The reaffirmation of Marine Oath as being recited will be

complement by background clippings and related film clips to render more feeling to this
segment program.
5. The cue for bringing down right hands will be the last note of
the phrase: “SO HELP ME GOD”.
f. Awarding Ceremony
1. After the reaffirmation, CPMC returns to his seat. The Troop
Commander faces about and gives Command, “MGA TAONG PARARANGALAN AT
MGA WATAWAT, PUMAGITNA, KAD”. Subsequently, he will march forward to fetch
the awardees and the Color Detail.
2. At the last note of the command “PUMAGITNA”, troop staff

executes right face. On the command “KAD” they march forward far enough to provide
clearance for the colors and awardees. Subsequently, they will return to their original
position when color and awardees pass by.
3. On the command “PUMAGITNA” Color Details execute
carry colors. On the command “KAD”, they execute two-step forward then halt and
wait for the Troop Commander to fetch them.
4. On the command “KAD”, awardees march from their initial

position and form a line in front of and centered on the Color Detail. They then face the
stage and wait for the Troop commander to fetch them.
5. Troop Commander marches forward and takes his post five

steps in front of and centered on the awardees and Color Detail. He faces about and
commands “PASULONG, KAD”. On the command “KAD”, the Band plays march
music and continues to play until the detachment is halted in front of the stage.
6. Troop Commander and the detachment halt approximately

10 steps in front the stage. Then, Troop Commander executes Present Sword and
report: “GINANG PANGULO, ANG MGA TAONG PARARANGALAN AT MGA
WATAWAT NARITO NA PO”. The GOH returns the salute.
7. Troop commander comes to ORDER SWORD then faces to

the right in marching, passes around the right flank of the awardees and proceeds
directly to his post, two steps in front of and centered on his staff. He then commands
“TANGHAL, TA” to the ceremonial troops.
8. Troops execute PRESENT ARMS. Then, Troop Commander
faces about and gives commands “TANGHAL, TA” to himself, his staff, and the
detachment.
9. At this juncture, the Band plays “TO THE COLOR”. All

spectators stand up. Military audience renders salute with its equivalent for civilians.
10. After the Band has ceased playing, Troop Commander gives
command “BABA, TA” to himself, his staff, and detachment. After which, he faces
about and gives commands “BABA TA” then “TIKAS PAHINGA “ to the ceremonial
troops.
11. The presentation of awards follows. Awardees will come

upstage one right after the other upon calling of each name. They come forward taking
the right-wing portion of the stage, then halt once upstage and face the audience. A
spotlight will be focused on the awardee as his citation is being read by the EMCEE.
Upon hearing the phrase “BY COMMAND OF ________” will be the cue for the
awardee to execute right face and approach the Guest of Honor to receive his award.
12. The Guest of Honor (assisted by CPMC) presents the

award. After which awardee returns back to his original position downstage.
13. When the last award has been presented and the Guest of
Honor and CPMC have already returned to their seats, Troop Commander brings his
staff to attention, then executes about face and gives command “TALUPAD
HUMANDA”.
14. Again, Troop commander executes about face and gives

command “SUMALUNAN, KAD”. On the command “SUMALUNAN”, awardees
execute left face. On the command “KAD” they march toward their pre-designated
seats.
15. On the command “SUMALUNAN”, the Color Detail

executes reverse march. On the command “KAD”, the color detail returns to original
post. The Band plays marching drumbeat until the colors are back in position.
g. Pageantry
1. After the awarding, the Medal of Valor reenactment follows.

All lights will be switched off to provide room for pre-positioning of props and players
except for some portion of the stage in which a designated light is left switched on dim
enough to shed light for the guests.
2. EMCEE announces that the putting off of the light is part of

the program.
3. Reenactment follows.
h. Introduction of the Guest of Honor Usual procedures applies
i. Speech of the Guest of Honor
j. Presentation of Memento
k. Cake Cutting Ceremony Proper
(Attention Call)
1. After the presentation of memento and the guests have

seated, the Band signals the start of the cake cutting ceremony by sounding the
Attention Call. This call is also the cue for the switching-off of all lights inside the
Gymnasium.
2. EMCEE informs the audience that the highlight of the affair

is about to begin and the shutting-off of light is part of the ceremony.
3. At the sound of the Attention Call, Troop Commander and

staff and the Color Detail march toward their pre-designated position to give clearance
for the cake cutting ceremony proper.
(Entry of Alfa Guidon)
4. Once the area is cleared, the “Young” and “Old” Marines

take their post. Ample time should be given in order for the two marines to have
enough moment for pre-positioning before the spotlight is turned on.
5. EMCEE then reads the manuscript. Once the word Alfa

Company is mentioned, this will be the cue for the spotlight operator to switch on and
focus the spotlight to the old and young marines. Once the spotlight is switched on, this
signals for old marine to give command “PASULONG KAD” just loud enough to be
heard by the young marine.
6. On the command “KAD”, both march toward the stage as

they are trailed by spotlight and marching drumbeat as they shove off.
7. The two halt at the pre-designated place in front the stage.

They then execute center face and the old marine hands over the Alfa Guidon to the
young marine.
8. After handing over the Guidon, they execute outward face

and prepare to exit.
(Entry of Standard and Guidon Bearers)
9. At this point, the lead Unit Standard Bearer gives command

Carry Colors, then Center Face, and lastly Forward March.
10. On the command “March”, Unit Standard Bearers shove off

in two opposite column formations toward the stage under the trail of spotlights and
marching music with Guidon Bearers marching in trail.
11. On the command “March”, the old and young marines

march to exit passing in between the approaching Unit Standards and Guidon Bearers.
12. From the time the old and young marines march toward the
stage, the handling over of the Alfa Guidon until the moment Unit Standards and Guidon
Bearers march in, the EMCEE narrates the evolution of the Philippine Marine Corps.
This starts with the activation of the 1st Marine Company as represented by the Alfa
Guidon, the handling over of the Alfa Guidon to the young marine that symbolizes the
passing over of the Corps’ tradition to the new generation, and the growth of the Corps
as represented by the different Unit Standards and Guidon flags being marched in.
13. Unit Standard Bearers halt at their pre-designated position

parallel to the stage and face the audience.
14. Guidon Bearers halt in pairs at respective pre-designated

position perpendicular to the stage and execute center face.
15. During this point, the cake and Color Details pre-position
themselves for the next entry.
16. The marching music ends once the last 2 guidon bearers
have occupied their position and face each other. The Band gives a short pause then
plays the Marine Hymn that signals for the cake detail to march-in the anniversary cake.
The first step of the cake detail should be in time with the first note of the Marine Hymn
and all spotlights are refocused on them.
(Entry of Anniversary Cake)
17. The anniversary cake is ushered towards the stage with

Color Detail in trail. The first note of the Marine Hymn signals the time to take the first
step for the cake detail to move forward. The first note of the Marine hymn is also the
cue for spotlight operator to redirect the spotlights to the cake detail.
18. Guidon Bearers in twos dip their guidon in unison as the

cake detail passes by and automatically return to carry guidon position, face about then
march to the second pre-designated post behind the Unit Standard Bearers.
19. Standard Bearers dip their flag once the Marine hymn is
played and return to carry color position once the music is finished.
20. Cake Detail halts at the pre-designated place below the

spotlight purposely dedicated for the cake. The halt of marching should be in time with
the last hymn of the music. Once at halt, the Color Detail splits in twos and take its post
in line with the Unit Standard Bearers.
(Cake Cutting Ceremony)
21. The Command Sergeant Major salutes and reports to CPMC

by saying “GINOO, NARITO NA PO ANG SAGISAG NG ATING IKA–LIMAMPU’T
ISANG KAARAWAN”. CPMC returns the salute and gives orders to the Command
Sergeant Major to prepare the anniversary cake.
22. The Command Sergeant Major faces about and gives

command “IHANDA AND SAGISAG NG KAARAWAN”. Cake Detail at the last note of
command executes center face and then lights all the candles. At this juncture, the
Band plays a mellow happy birthday song as the candles are being lit while CPMC
approaches the cake.
23. At the last note of the happy birthday song, CPMC blows the
candlelight. This is also the time for switching on the dedicated spotlight overhead of the
anniversary cake to provide illumination once the candlelights are put off.
24. CPMC takes the first slice and offers it to the Guest of Honor
and the succeeding ones to the other guests.
25. After which, CPMC directs the Command Sergeant Major to

withdraw the cake.
(Exit of the Anniversary Cake)
26. Command Sergeant Major and the Cake Detail take their
posts. He then gives command, “PIHIT SA LIKOD, NA”.
27. The command ”NA” signals the Unit Standards and Guidon
Bearers to execute center face.
28. The command “NA” signals the Color Detail to join in and
take post behind the Cake Detail.
29. Once the Color Detail has taken their position behind the
Cake Detail, the Command Sergeant Major gives command “PASULONG, KAD”.
30. On the command “KAD”, the Cake Detail, Colors,
Standards and Guidon Bearers in that order march to exit and return to their initial
position before the start of cake-cutting ceremony.
31. The command “KAD” signals the Band to play the Mabuhay
Song to give marching beat to the Cake Detail, Colors, Standards and Guidon Bearers.
32. The command, “KAD” signals the release of balloons and

confetti and the switching on of all lights inside the gym.
33. Once all the Standards and Guidon Bearers have taken their
posts, Troop Commander and staff return to their original post. They then march
forward and halt approximately 10 steps away from the stage.
34. Troop Commander renders salute and reports, “GINANG

PANGULO, TAPOS NA PO ANG SEREMONYA”. The Guest of Honor acknowledges
the salute.
35. Departure honor (optional)
TROOPS FORMATION FOR ARRIVAL HONOR

(BNS GYMNASIUM)
TROOPS FORMATION FOR CAKE CUTTING CEREMONY
(INSIDE BNS GYMNASIUM)
3.2 MESS NIGHT
SEQUENCE OF EVENTS
1800H Members of the Mess proceed to quarterdeck areas to prepare for the
arrival of the guests.
1815H The Vice President of the mess and escorts prepare for the reception of
the guests.
1830H Commandant, Philippine Marine Corps arrives and opens the bar, guests
are announced as they enter and sign guest book. No guests are
introduced after the Guests of Honor arrives (1900H).
1900H Guest of Honor arrives. He is met by the CPMC, Asst Commandant, MC

Major Unit Commanders.
1915H “First Call ” - Officers move to passageway. Last opportunity to make a

head call.
1930H Dinner chimes are sounded by the Chief Steward.
1935H “Officers’ Call” is sounded. Then, the two drummers and the two buglers
smartly march shoulder to shoulder, from the dining area to and around
the cocktail room in martial music signifying the start of the festivity. The
officer of mess and guests, except for the Presidential Table, follow the
drummers and buglers to the dinning room and remain at attention behind
their seats at the dinner table. Drummers and buglers stop playing.
Vice: (Reports to the President of the Mess) “All officers present, Sir”. The
President lets the Guest of Honor take his seat. Other members of the
mess follow.
Pres: “Very well”. The ringing of silence call. After which, one after another
through the bell, the officers of the mess immediately follows announce
the location of the Marines’ significant campaigns.
Declaration of Famous Battles/Campaigns (Moment of Silence)
Pres: Chaplain says the grace. The President requests the Guest of Honor to
rise. Other members of the mess follow.
Chaplain Chaplain says the grace and upon conclusion, the President lets the
Guest of Honor take his seat, and other officers and guests follow.
Pres: The President raps with a gavel “MR VICE, BRING FORTH THE BEEF
FOR INSPECTION”. From the kitchen, the drummer leads the bugler who
plays a festive tune. Following the bugler is a roast beef on a cart being
pushed by the Chief Steward and escorted by two assistants. The group
parades around the dining room and stops in front of the Presidential
Table.
Vice: The Vice moves to the roast beef, cuts a small slice and eats it. He
returns to his position and announces “I PRONOUNCE THIS BEEF FIT
FOR HUMAN CONSUMPTION”.
Chief Steward: Returns beef to its place of origin.
Main course is served; replaced with desert and coffee when appropriate.
(Note: There is no smoking during dinner).
All chimes are removed; Toasting wine is placed on the tables.
Vice: “SIR, THE WINE IS READY TO BE PASSED”.
Pres: “MR VICE, PASS ON THE WINE”
The Vice charges the glass of the Guest of Honor and those of other
guests at the Presidential Table, returns the decanter to the President and
returns to his seat. Each officer and guest with a decanter in front of him
will charge his own glass. (After those at the Presidential Table are
charged, decanter is passed to the left).
Vice: When all glasses are charged, the Vice reports. “SIR THE WINE HAS
BEEN PASSED”.
Pres: (Seated) “ MR VICE, A TOAST TO THE PRESIDENT OF THE REPUBLIC

OF THE PHILIPPINES”.
Vice: “GENTLEMEN, THE PRESIDENT OF THE REPUBLIC OF THE

PHILIPPINES”. All rise as the National Anthem is played, then all respond:
“THE PRESIDENT OF THE REPUBLIC OF THE PHILIPPINES”. All drink
and sit themselves. (It is intended that wine glasses be drained only after
the last toast). If a foreign guest is present, the next toast is always to the
President or sovereign of his country. Lacking such a guest, the next
toast is for the Philippine Marine Corps.
Pres: (Seated) “MR VICE, A TOAST TO THE PRESIDENT OF THE UNITED

STATES OF AMERICA”.
Vice: “GENTLEMEN, THE PRESIDENT OF THE UNITED STATES OF

AMERICA”. All rise and respond “THE PRESIDENT”. All drink and sit
themselves.
Pres: (Seated) “MR VICE, A TOAST TO THE SECRETARY OF NATIONAL

DEFENSE”.
Vice: “GENTLEMEN, THE SECRETARY OF NATIONAL DEFENSE”. All rise

and respond “THE SECRETARY”. All drink and sit themselves.
Pres: (Seated) “ MR VICE, A TOAST TO THE PHILIPPINE NAVY”.
Vice: “GENTLEMEN, THE PHILIPPINE NAVY”. All rise and respond “THE
PHILIPPINE NAVY”. All drink and sit themselves.
Pres: (Seated) “MR VICE, A TOAST TO THE UNITED STATES MARINE

CORPS”.
Vice: “GENTLEMEN, THE UNITED STATES MARINE CORPS”. All rise and
respond “THE UNITED STATES MARINE CORPS”. All drink and sit
themselves.
Other Officers may propose a toast.
Asst Comdt: “MR PRESIDENT, MAY I PROPOSE A TOAST TO THE PHILIPPINE
MARINE CORPS”?
Pres: (Seated) “MR VICE, TO THE PHILIPPINE MARINE CORPS”.
Vice: “GENTLEMEN, TO THE SUCCESS OF THE PHILIPPINE MARINE

CORPS”. All rise as the Philippine Marine Hymn is played then all
respond: “THE PHILIPPINE MARINE CORPS”. All drink and sit
themselves.
Pres: “MR VICE, LIGHT THE SMOKING LAMP”. The Vice lights the smoking
lamp and takes it to the front of the Presidential Table and offers a light to
the Guest of Honor and General Officers. The Vice places the lamp in
front of the President, turns and says; “GENTLEMEN THE SMOKING
LAMP IS LIT”. All may smoke.
Vice: Mr Vice goes to the rostrum and informally introduces each member of the
mess, except the Guest of Honor. The introduced guest may be requested
to speak or present any number. Each officer called stands up to be
recognized. Lastly, he introduces the PRESIDENT.
Pres: The President goes to the rostrum and introduces the Guest of Honor.
GOH: REMARKS (Complete attention is demanded but all may continue to

drink).
Pres: Acknowledge the remarks of the Guest of Honor. (Presentation of gift to

the GOH).
FREE FOR ALL - Wine and liquor may continue to be served. The remainder
of the evening may be spent as impulse or ingenuity suggests.
Singing is always in order. The junior is strictly forbidden to leave ahead of

the senior member.
SECTION IV

PHILIPPINE AIR FORCE
4.1 Flower/Confetti Drop
The following procedures in the performance of Flower/Confetti Drops

mission using UH-1H aircraft.
1. DEFINITION:
A. PIC – Pilot-in-Command
B. ATO – Air Transportation Office
C. AGL – Above Ground Level
D. AHO – Above Highest Obstacle
E. IP (Initial Point) – Holding point
2. PROCEDURES:
Part III / Section IV: Special Ceremonies for Philippine Air Force 283
a. MISSION PREPARATION
1. Briefing on schedule and other details of the activity must be
coordinated with controlling unit (Ground Controller) to include:
- call signs
- Frequencies
- ATO clearances (Blocktime and altitude restrictions to
observe)
2. Area reconnaissance and practice drop must be done prior

to actual performance of mission if time permits focusing on:
- obstacle (buildings, powerlines, antenna towers,
vegetation)
- restricted areas
- other aircraft performing within the area
b. TIMING
- aircraft must be IP 15 minutes before actual drop time
- IP to target time-minimum of two (2) minutes
NOTE: mandatory countdown every 5 seconds should be given by the ground controller when aircraft
leaves IP to target.
c. WIND CONDITION (Speed and Direction)

- to be obtained from control tower or ground controller so
as to adjust ground track and distance of drop.
d. ALTITUDE
- Holding minimum 500 ft AGL or higher Pilot must have
visual contact with target.
- During Drop – minimum 300 ft AGL or 100 ft AHO for
flower drops
- minimum 500 ft AGL or 100 ft AHO for confetti drops
e. AIRSPEED
- Holding – maintain 60 to 70 knots
- Leaving IP for target – from 60 to 70 knots adjust
airspeed depending on distance to travel and time
remaining basing on ground controller’s countdown.
- Drop – maintain 40-20 knots over target
NOTE: Do not hover target
f. GROUND TRACK
- Holding – racetrack pattern is recommended
- IP to target – if wind calm, direct tailwind or headwind
condition exist, head straight to target.
- If right or left crosswind condition exist, adjust ground
track depending on wind speed and direction.
- -If target is moving (funeral procession) – approach from
behind is recommended.
g. ACTUAL DROP
- Wind calm condition – commence drop approximately ½
rotor disk before or directly over target.
- -Direct Tailwind condition – commence drop
approximately 2 rotor disks before the target.
- -Direct Headwind condition – commence drop
approximately 1 ½ to 2 rotor disks after the target.
- Left or Right crosswind condition – adjust ground track
accordingly and apply parameters for headwind or
tailwind conditions.
NOTE: The PIC shall give the signal to commence drop.
h. RECOVERY (After the Drop)

- Climb to holding altitude then proceed back to IP for
further instructions
i. POST FLIGHT BRIEFING
3. RESPONSIBILITIES:
a. The Squadron Commanders of flying units will be responsible for

the compliance to this SOP.
b. The PIC will be responsible for the command and control of the
aircraft.
c. Crew Chief/Maintenance Crew will be responsible for the disposal

of flowers/confetti and visual clearing of the aircraft during flight.
4.2 PAF RETIREE’S DAY
1. INVOCATION
2. PRESENTATION OF TROOPS
a. Troop Commander (TC) directs his Staff “KALUPUNAN

SUMALIKOD KO, KAD”.
b. TC calls “TANGHAL SANDATA.” (This can be a direct command.)
c. Group Commanders (GC) in two counts face about and command

“TANGHAL, TA” one after the other and then face about.
d. The TC faces about and commands his staff “TANGHAL, TA”.
e. TC reports to GOH “Ihahandog ko po ang pamunuan.”
f. The Band plays appropriate ruffles and flourishes followed by

appropriate march music.
g. The TC after the ruffles and flourishes and march music, orders his
staff “BABA, TA.”
h. GCs order their staff “BABA, TA” one after the other and face
about.
i. At the completion of the presentation of honors to the reviewing

officer, the TC commands “TIKAS PAHINGA”, in preparation for the retreat.
3. RETREAT
a. GCs face about and command “TIKAS PAHINGA” then face about
and assume the parade rest position.
b. The TC then directs “IHUDYAT ANG PAGSILONG” faces about

and commands his staff “TIKAS PAHINGA.”
c. As soon as the TC and his staff are at parade rest the band sounds
retreat.
d. At the conclusion of retreat one volley will be fired from 105HW.

The TC commands his staff to “ATTENTION”, faces troops and directs “MGA
TALUPAD HUMANDA”. When the troops are at attention, the TC directs “TANGHAL
SANDATA”. When the units have completed these movements, TC faces the reviewing
officer and commands his staff “TANGHAL, TA”. This is the signal for the band to play
“To the Color”.
e. TC will order “BABA SANDATA” after retreat to the color.
4. INSPECTION OF TROOPS
a. TC faces about and salutes the GOH saying “Handa na po ang

patikas upang libutin.” The Band begins to play march music after the salute of the
TC has been acknowledged.
b. GOH and Host move down and board the vehicle. The GOH boards
first and occupies the left rear position. The vehicle proceeds to the post of the TC and
stops.
c. TC salutes the GOH then boards the vehicle occupying the front
right position.
d. As the reviewing party approaches the colors, the TC commands

“GINOO, ANG MGA WATAWAT, PUGAY KAMAY, NA”. TC commands “BABA, NA”
after passing the colors.
e. After reaching the first element of the troops, the inspecting party
returns to respective positions. The TC, as soon as the vehicle reaches the TC’s
position, alights and salutes the GOH and returns to his former position.
5. REMARKS AND INTRODUCTION OF THE GOH BY CG, PAF
6. ADDRESS OF GOH
7. PRESENTATION OF MEMENTO
8. PASS-IN-REVIEW
9. RECESSIONAL
10. COCKTAILS
CREDITS
LTGEN NARCISCO L ABAYA AFP
TDCS, AFP
BGEN EFREN L ABU AFP
DCS for Opns, J3
COL RICARDO A DAVID JR O-7461 PA (GSC)
COL BONIFACIO S TALDE JR 0-7814 PA
LTC TELESFORO L QUILLOY O-106855 PAF
LTC ARNOLD M QUIAPO O-8686 PA
MAJ RAMON C YOGYOG O-9392
MAJ DENNIS T ANTENOR CRUZ O-115512 PAF
MAJ SAMUEL T BACTAD O-119343 (GMS) PA
MAJ ARTHUR M BIYO O-9645 PN (M)
MAJ WILLIAM A ALUNDAY O-9830 PA
MAJ ROBERT C DAUZ O-9917 (CAV) PA
MAJ FERDINAND S RAZALAN O-9830 PA
MAJ EDIMAR S ORTEGA O-10176 PAF
LCDR FRANCISCO B GALERA O-116106 PN
CPT LINCOLN FRANCISCO T TAGLE O-10140 (INF) PA
CPT EDIMAR S ORTEGA O-10176 PAF
CPT ELPIDIO B TALJA JR P-10352 PAF
CPT JONAS R LUMAWAG O-10353 PN (M)
CPT ANTONIO I BAUTISTA JA O-10545 (INF) PA
CPT GABRIEL P UMALI P-118838 PAF
CPT ERNESTO N EVANGELISTA JR O-120954 PN (M)
CPT LEONCIO E CAWIL O-123826 (FS) PA

CPT LUCIANO V SAIYO JR O-125668 PAF
CPT AVELINO O MORADILLO O-127744 (QMS) PA
CPT FERDINAND C COMPAY O-127200 (OS) PA
CPT JESUS RICO D ATENCIO O-10511 PA
CPT ORLANDO D EDRALIN O-10556 (INF) PA
CPT LYNARD D CASTISIMO O-10992 PA
CPT MICHAEL G LOGICO O-11235 (INF) PA
CPT LENNON G BABILONIA O-11264 PA
CPT WENDELL D CACHERO O-11334 PA
CPT PALMER M PARUNGAO O-116445 PA
CPT LINCOLN T FRANCISO O-10140 INF PA
CPT LEODEVIC B GUINID O-10299 (INF) PA
CPT GLENN GASAT V CASTRO PN (M)
1LT JUSTINO J GALLEN JR O-12186 PAF
LTJG FRED R CORREO O-12217 PN
LTJG ELPIDIO P NATIVIDAD JR O-12180 PN
LT REYNALDO T SIRENEO O-120193 PN
LT JONATHAN V ZATA O-128074 PN
LT TEODORO A BOLANIO O-127259 PN
2LT VILLAMOR B COSTALES JR O-13242 PAF
MSg Willie D Jeruz 664125 PA
TSg Ma Elena R Medilo 753606 PAF (WAC)
SSg Alberto N Sarmiento Jr 780714 PA
Pfc Eulogio M Bilog II 813047 PA
Pfc Fabian A Ranit Jr 815389 PA
Ms Phoebe G Moso
Ms Zhielad Ritz C Gatchalian

In cooperation with
The Creative and Development Team, DAP MAIN OFFICE
&
The Production Team, Baguio Branch
Graphics design and layout - Duffie Taloma
Navigation and Scripting - Jaime Yaneza Jr
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 2002
ARMED FORCES OF THE PHILIPPINES

Manual On Drills and Ceremonies

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Manual On Drills and Ceremonies

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

MANUAL

ARMED FORCES OF THE PHILIPPINES

SECTION I. GENERAL DRILL INFORMATION 002

SECTION I. REVIEWS 107

SECTION I. SPECIAL DRILLS AND CEREMONIES FOR

GENERAL DRILL INFORMATION

1.1 PURPOSE AND SCOPE

b) All movements in this manual are precision movements designed to foster

c) In the military service, we help attain teamwork through drill and

d) Drills consist of certain movements by which the squad, platoon, company

Part I / Section I: General Drill Information 2

f) Finally, everyone gets a certain amount of pleasure from doing anything

BASE: The elements on which a movement is regulated. For instance, in

CADENCE: The uniform rhythm by which a movement is executed or the

CENTER (Gitna): The middle point or element of a command. In a platoon of

Part I / Section I: General Drill Information 3

DOUBLE TIME (Takbong Hakbang): Cadence at a rate of 180 steps per

ELEMENT: An individual, squad, platoon, company, or larger body, forming a

FORMATION (Hanay): Arrangement of the elements of a unit in line, in column

FRONT (Harap): The direction in which a command faces.

FRONTAGE (Harapan): The space occupied by an element measured from one

HEAD (Unahan): The leading element of a column. To understand this definition,

Part I / Section I: General Drill Information 4

LEFT (Kaliwa): The left extremity or element of a body of troops.

OBLIQUE (Lihis): An angle between 0 and 45 degrees. (Right/Left oblique -

RIGHT: The right extremity or element of a body of troops.

SLOW TIME: Cadence at a rate of 60 steps per minute.

Part I / Section I: General Drill Information 5

PARTIAL CHANGES OF DIRECTION: To change the direction of a column by

b. In all formations and movements, non-commissioned officers commanding

c. When acting as an instructor, the officer or non-commissioned officer goes

a. Except at the beginning of basic training, the commander or instructor

Part I / Section I: General Drill Information 6

c. Mass commands are used to develop confidence and promote

Part I / Section I: General Drill Information 7

COMMANDS AND THE COMMAND VOICE

a. A drill command is an oral order of a commander or leader. The precision

1) When at halt, the commander faces the troops when giving

2) When marching, the commander turns his head toward the

3) Exceptions to these rules occur during ceremonies.

c. When elements drill as a part of a larger unit, the rules of supplementary

d. The commander gives the command MANUMBALIK (AS YOU WERE) to

Part I / Section II: Commands and the Command Voice 8

2.2 TWO PART COMMANDS

1) The preparatory command states the movement to be carried out

2) The command of execution tells when the movement is to be

b. To change the direction of a unit when marching, the preparatory

2.3 ENGLISH VERSION TO FILIPINO VERSION

a. The AFP commands are derived from English and subsequently

1) In general, the word NA is used to signal the command of

a) TA – (abbreviated SANDATA) manual of arms for rifles and

b) KAD – (abbreviated LAKAD) from at rest to motion and all

Part I / Section II: Commands and the Command Voice 9

d) RAP – (abbreviated HARAP) in HANDA HARAP as literal

e) DA – (abbreviated HUMANDA) for attention.

f) NGA – (abbreviated PAHINGA) in TIKAS PAHINGA or

2.4 COMBINED COMMANDS

In some commands, the preparatory command and the command of execution

2.5 SUPPLEMENTARY COMMANDS

a. Supplementary commands are oral orders given by a subordinate leader

b. A supplementary command may be a preparatory command, a portion of

Part I / Section II: Commands and the Command Voice 10

c. A subordinate leader gives all supplementary commands over his right